EIA: India: Pune Nirvana Hills Slum Rehabilitation Project

Environment and Social Impact Assessment Report and Environment and Social Management Plan

Project Number: 44940 March 2012

IND: Pune Nirvana Hills Slum Rehabilitation Project Prepared by: Kumar Urban Development Limited This report is made publicly available in accordance with ADB’s Public Communications Policy (2005). It does not necessarily reflect the views of ADB.

Delivering sustainable solutions in a more competitive world

Environmental and Social Impact Assessment for Project Nirvana: Pune, India Final Report

March 2012

www.erm.com

Kumar Sinew Developers Private Limited

FINAL REPORT


Environmental and Social Impact Assessment for Project Nirvana: Pune, India

23 March 2012 Reference : I8390 / 0138632

Prepared by:

Rutuja Tendolkar Consultant

Reviewed & Approved by:

Neena Singh Partner

This report has been prepared by ERM India Private Limited, with all reasonable skill, care and diligence within the terms of the Contract with the client, incorporating our General Terms and Conditions of Business and taking account of the resources devoted to it by agreement with the client.

We disclaim any responsibility to the client and others in respect of any matters outside the scope of the above.

This report is confidential to the client and we accept no responsibility of whatsoever nature to third parties to whom this report, or any part thereof, is made known. Any such party relies on the report at their own risk.

ERM EXECUTIVE SUMMARY, KUMAR SINEW DEVELOPERS PROJECT # I8390/ 0138632 MARCH 2012

ES-I

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

ERM India Private Limited has been engaged by M/s Kumar Sinew Urban Developers Limited (hereinafter referred to as ‘KUL’ or ‘the client’) on the behest of the Asian Development Bank (ADB), to update the Environmental Impact Assessment report of the “Nirvana Hills Phase II” Project (hereinafter referred to as ‘Project Nirvana’) located at Survey No. 44/1, Erandwane, Haveli Taluka, Pune district in the state of Maharashtra in accordance to the ADB Safeguards Policy Requirements (2009). The ESIA also conforms to the requirements of the IFC Performance Standards, which was required by another group of Lenders lead by the Netherlands Development Finance Company (FMO). This report is an addendum to the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study (to be renamed as an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment or ESIA) which had been conducted by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd. in February, 2009. The ESIA assesses the aforementioned project on the basis of ADB’s and IFC’s established environmental and social frameworks1 and safeguard policies and standards. Project Nirvana, located in Survey no. 44/1, ward 57 Erandwane, in Haveli Taluka of Pune is an initiative on slum rehabilitation by KUL as a part of the SRA scheme. The project is spread over an area of approximately 79 acres (approximately 320,826 sq. m.) and incorporates six major slum zones (as identified by SRA) of Wadar Vasti, Kelewadi-Indira Park, Rajiv Gandhi Park, Vasant Nagar , Rautwadi and Hanuman Nagar. The client is implementing the second phase of the slum rehabilitation in the Kilewadi and Indira Park area. Demolition is currently underway in the Indira Park area and is being overlooked by the KUL personnel.

1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The site of Project Nirvana as per SRA demarcation is located at Survey no. 44/1, Erandwane, Haveli Taluka, in the city of Pune. Geographically, it is located at 18° 30’ 41.82”N and 73° 49’ 21.34”E and the entire site expanse is spread over a plot area of approximately 320,826 sq mts. The ongoing construction and development for Project Nirvana has been divided into three components. The first component is the Slum Rehabilitation and Redevelopment, the second is the Free Sale component utilised by KUL to construct its own commercial and residential properties and the third component pertains to provisions of infrastructure, utilities and amenities.

(1) The framework includes ADB’s 2009 Safeguards Policy Statement (SPS), the 1998 Gender and Development Policy, and 2001 Social Protection Strategy


ES-II

In all the five slum blocks together, there are about 4344 tenements. In all the above blocks, 21 rehabilitation buildings are proposed to be developed by the builder, each having 11 floors with 13 flats on each floor. The net carpet area provided for each of these apartments is equivalent to 25 sq.m. or 269 sq.ft. as per SRA guidelines. In lieu of the rehabilitation, KUL will obtain a Floor Space Index (FSI) of 2.5 which will be used for the construction of 18 sale buildings with residential and commercial units. In addition to the above, KUL has also committed to provide the following additional amenities including: � A temple; � Gym/playground; � Library; � Primary school and a secondary school; � A permanent crèche; � Community Hall; and � Aged People’s Space. The client has obtained the Annexure II for Rajeev Gandhi Park which was published by the SRA on the 30th of May 2011 and thus efforts to facilitate eligibility of tenements and the appeal procedure are currently ongoing. KUL has established an office in this area and setup a Community Relations Team (CRT) (along with SRA personnel) consisting of around 10 personnel. These personnel are involved in facilitating slum demolition, land transfer or agreements between the client and the slum dwellers along with maintaining records on rent distribution, facilitating cheque transfers, biometric identification etc. They also address community issues, record grievances and oversee the entire public relation mechanism. Labour camps have been set on site and about 100 labourers are currently being accommodated here. Inflows of about four hundred more labourers are expected during the construction. For the same, KUL is additionally developing a neighbouring site for building additional labour camps so as to accommodate the inflow. Certain number of utilities is planned for the entire development in Project Nirvana. Some of the general multipurpose utilities include shopping malls, community centre, kids’ playgrounds, crèche, temples and green zones. The primary utilities required for day to day functioning of the buildings as assessed and studied in details are:

� Parking Arrangements; � Water Supply and Storage system; � Sewage Disposal System, � Solid Waste Management; � Power Supply and Backup system; � Fire Fighting system; and � Rain Water Harvesting


ES-III

1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL BASELINE

The site is situated at a prime commercial and residential area of central Pune and is primarily surrounded by commercial and residential structures. The site setting is such that it is surrounded by dense settlements and developed regions or regions falling into NDZ. The environmental baseline is based on primary data collected by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd. as a part of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study. The data was collected for one season (November 2008 to February 2009). Available secondary data has been assessed covering an area of 10 km radius (referred to as the study area) from the Project Site. Analysis of Primary Baseline Data

The Project Site is located at an elevation of approximately 590 m above mean sea level (amsl). The northern portion of the Site is at higher elevation and the slope of the Site is from NW and NNW towards S and SSE. The difference in elevation at the Site is 30 m. Following the slope, natural drainage of the region is from N and NNW towards South and SSE and SE. According to Seismic Zone Map of India, Project Site falls in Zone III; Zone III is defined as a zone having medium damage risk and vulnerable to earthquakes of intensity MSK VII or less (as defined by Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council). Thus, the Project accordingly is required to have provisions of earthquake resistant construction of Plant structure. Suitable seismic coefficients in horizontal and vertical directions respectively, have to be adopted while designing the structures. The Project site falls in Moderate Damage Risk Zone B (Vb = 39 m/s) according to Wind and Cyclone Hazard Map of India. As per the information in Pune District Environmental Atlas, 2006, most of the Taluka in the Pune district are flood prone. River Indrayani, and river Pauna are the rivers which are likely to cause flooding in Haveli Taluka and river Mutha in Taluka Mulshi. Loni Kalbhor, Pimpari, Chikali, Ashtapur and Sangaur Haveli are the villages in Haveli Taluka which are affected by flood (1 in 100 years). As per the Natural Hazard Map of Pune District the area where Site is located has low flood frequency, with the last dam overflow having occurred more than 40 years ago. The study area has Tropical Wet and Dry climate. The year may broadly be divided into four seasons.


ES-IV

� Winter season : December- February � Summer season : March – mid June � Monsoon season : Mid June – September � Post Monsoon : October- November The area receives major parts of its rainfall during monsoon season due to south west monsoon. Owing to the geographical conditions in the district the rainfall is unevenly distributed. The western part to the West coast is a hilly area having forest cover and receives more rainfall than the eastern parts. In Haveli sub division, the climate is dry and healthy but varies much in different part of the subdivision, the rainfall increases so rapidly towards the west that in the border villages, rice and nagli take the place of jowar and bajra. Humidity is considerably low during the summer months and diurnal variations in humidity during this period are high and day time temperatures are high. Air Quality

Primary source of air pollution in the study area is vehicular traffic. The SPM

concentration observed during the period ranged from 96.5 μg/m3 to 56.2 μg/m3. The SPM values (98 percentile) were observed to be within the NAAQ’s limits at all monitoring locations. The RSPM concentration observed during the period ranged from 14 .7μg/m3 to 38.9μg/m3. As per revised NAAQS the prescribed limit of RSPM/PM10 for 24 hours monitoring is 100μg/m3. The 98 percentile PM10 values were observed to be well within the revised NAAQS limit at all locations. The SO2 concentration observed during the period ranged from 0.00 μg/m3 to 16.8 μg/m3. As per the revised NAAQS the prescribed limit of SO2 for 24 hours monitoring is 80μg/m3. The 98 percentile SO2 values were observed to be within the NAAQS limit at all locations. The NOx concentration observed during the period ranged from 0.0μg/m3 to 21.5μg/m3. As per revised NAAQS the prescribed limit of NOx

for 24 hours monitoring is 80μg/m3. The 98 percentile NOx values were observed to be within the revised NAAQS limit at all locations. The CO

concentration observed during the period ranged from 0.1 mg/m3 to 1.0 mg/m3. As per revised NAAQS the prescribed limit of CO for 8 hours monitoring is 2 mg/m3. The 98 percentile CO values were observed to be within the revised NAAQS limit at all locations.

Surface & Groundwater Quality Monitoring

All the parameters were found to be well within the desirable limits. It is recommended that BOD and COD should be analysed to assess if there is any sewage contamination as ground water table is not deep in this area.


ES-V

Soil Quality at Site

The top layer of the soil at the site is of hard strata and the texture is largely sandy loam with low to moderate erosion potential. The depth of this textured soil layer varies from 1.0m to 2.5m. The area is surrounded by plains containing murrum and soft rock. The observed values for metals namely Zinc and Copper much below the soil remediation intervention values specified in Soil Remediation Circular 2009.

Noise Level in the Study Area

The equivalent ambient noise level for day time (Leq day) and night time (Leq night) at proposed Project Site were observed to be below the prescribed corresponding limits for residential area. For other sampling locations too the results of day time and night time noise levels are below the prescribed corresponding limits. Noise levels measured at Project site indicates that both day and night time ambient noise levels (ANL)are closer to residential ANL limits of 55 dB(A) and 45 dB(A) respectively. Major source of noise in the baseline environment are the following: � Heavy traffic movement through Paud road and Karve road opposite to

Project site on its southern side; and � Dense residential and commercial zones abutting the project site on all

three sides barring the northern side. Ecology

The project site comprises of dense slum settlements covering almost the entire plot area with limited number of trees and other ecological features. As per EIA report 2009, the observations of field survey has concluded that the site is devoid of tree cover and the plant species observed in the area includes trees, shrubs, climbers and herbs that are common and found in other parts of Maharashtra as well. There are no endangered flora and fauna in the project region. The project proponent has obtained permission for cutting 24 number of trees from Horticulture Department of Municipal Corporation of Pune.

1.3 SOCIAL BASELINE

The population was mainly constituted by Hindus, with 3308 households reporting they followed Hinduism. It could be also gathered from the data that 42 households reported that they belong to the Muslim community. It should be noted that there are a few settlements, such as Rautwadi that have a dominance of certain communities (i.e. Marathi and Konkani) as well as Indira Park (predominantly scheduled caste communities of Mahar, Neo-buddha, Mang etc). Other communities also include Other Backward Caste (OBC) such


ES-VI

as Mali and the Nomadic Tribe Community of Vadars, the traditional stone cutters. The slums in the project area are densely clustered around approximately 70% of the site in largely flat structure with the usual built up being that of one-storied hutments. The average size of the structure is determined to be about 10*12 ft (i.e. 120 sq ft) in dimensions. The structure and layout of these tenements depict a typical slum scenario with narrow lanes and by-lanes, contiguous hutments with corrugated roofing, and inadequate public sanitation facilities. The household size on site varies from 2 to 7 and is on an average approximately 4 members per household. The sex ratio for the area is determined to be 888. This is much lower compared to the sex ratio of Maharashtra state (922) and even Pune district (917). The working age group constitutes 70.4 percent which indicates a positively skewed dependency. The dependency ratio for the area is estimated to be 0.4 which is significantly lower compared to the national ratio of 0.6. The data indicates that about 15 percent of the households have at least one elderly family member. It is estimated that project site has about 524 senior citizens, 222 of whom being women in a total of 511 households. From the primary data, the average duration of stay at the slum area is computed to be around 28 years. A majority (94.4 percent) of the population are native Marathi speakers. A minority of the population (about 88 households) are native Hindi speakers from the states of Uttar Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh. There are also few households who have their origins in Andhra Pradesh and Karnataka. However, it is imperative to note that only 719 households reported at the time of survey that they have a proof of residence and only about 816 households reported having election card. It is of significance that only 34 % of the total site population reported having at least secondary education. 53 % of the total male population at the site reported having at least secondary education and 56 % in the case of total female population at the site. Only about 2 percent of those having educational qualifications higher than secondary education have reported having postgraduate degrees. The common occupations that were cited by the slum residents include rickshaw driver, coolie, security guard and even services like plumbing, parlour work and salesmanship. Some of the respondents even reported their own businesses like repair shops, laundry, general stores etc. Another significant observation is that most of the women in the slum area were engaged as housemaids, while they also took up other occupations like tailoring, scrap business and selling of vegetable, fruits or flowers. The average income of the household is coming to about INR 6400 per month wherein the range of income listed being as low as below INR 1000 to INR


ES-VII

20000 a month .The average age of the earning member is estimated to be about 40 years. 279 households were headed by a male senior citizen and 42 households were headed by a female senior citizen. It is also imperative to note that on an aggregate level, 169 households were women headed households. Infrastructure and amenities

1021 of the households reported that their hutments were made of load bearing structure, 906 reported shed as the type of structure and 328 reported RCC as the structure. the entire slum has been electrified over the last ten years with specific settlements having electric meters through the Maharashtra State Electricity Board (MSEB). However over 90 percent of the connections are illegal with only very few households having meter facilities for electricity. The power supply in the area is also reported to be quite regular with only 3-4 hours cut on Thursdays. The most common cooking fuel reported was LPG with about 90 percent of the household relying on LPG for cooking. Municipal water was reported as the main source of water by 99 percent of the households in the primary survey. The water supply of Pune Municipal Corporation was reported to be regular. In addition, most of the households (99%) reported using public toilets that had been set up by the Pune Municipal Corporation and are also in charge of its maintenance. Education facilities are readily available in the area with a major municipal school (the school will need to be shifted due to the project) as well as two other private English and Marathi-medium schools. The primary data has also captured the existence of 3 aanganwadi centres. Availability of health infrastructure in the project area is limited to private clinics and hospitals such as the Jog Hospital with 150 beds and Krishna Hospital with about 70 beds. About 72 percent of the households reported having a bank account.

1.4 STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT, DISCLOSURE AND CONSULTATION

The stakeholders for the purpose of stakeholder analysis have been primarily classified as:

� Internal Stakeholders: � External Stakeholders

A detailed stakeholder analysis presents the description of the stakeholder, key expectations, influence level on the project and the priority for KUL. Some of the high influencers to be prioritised by KUL include local residents, hawkers and vendors as well as lenders/international banks.


ES-VIII

KUL has been engaging with the slum community since 2005, but a more structured engagement has been started only recently. The engagement has been in the following formats: � On going consultations and negotiations with individuals and cluster of

households to get the community to agree to the SRA scheme; � Individual consultations and interviews during the socio-economic survey

initiated at the behest of the Lenders through an ESAP. Currently, 3309 households of the 4038 households have been surveyed;

� Frequent interactions for specific purposes, as and when required, primarily related to the scheme; and

� KUL facilitating the formation of the Wada Basti Housing Society election in Phase I.

1.5 IMPACT ASSESSMENT

� The overall impact on land use will be beneficial in the medium context and minor intensity for a medium to long term duration.

� The maximum impact on solid waste generation would be in the

construction and operations phase. It should be noted that during the operations phase, generation of solid waste (sludge) can be reused for landscaping.

� The maximum impact on AAQ levels will occur during construction phase

of the project life cycle and is anticipated to be minor adverse. Else, during operational phase, depending upon the location of STPs and other such facilities and by maintaining green buffer zones, AAQ levels will not be impacted significantly by the project.

� The impact on soil and water environment will be minor adverse during

operational phase considering the long term sustained impact. Else, during construction phase, insignificant adverse impact is anticipated.

� The impact on ANLs will be moderately adverse in the medium context

both during construction and operation phases at moderate intensity. During operation phase, however, the impact will be longer during the entire operational phase and hence needs to be managed at receptor locations besides controlling the source. During decommissioning, impact on ANLs is expected to be minor adverse in the local context.

� The impact on ecological environment will be insignificant during

construction phase and moderately beneficial during operational phase. � In this context, the impact on cultural environment due to Project Nirvana

is insignificant through the project life cycle.


ES-IX

� The impact on visual environment will be insignificant during

construction phase and moderately beneficial during operational phase. � The impact due to sustainable resource management initiatives integrated

in the Project design will be significantly beneficial during project life cycle.

� The impact on traffic and transport infrastructure will be insignificant

during construction phase and moderately beneficial during operational phase.

� The impact on H&S aspects will be minor adverse during both

construction and operational phase. � The impact due to natural disasters and emergency scenarios will be

minor adverse during construction phase and insignificant during operational phase.

� Although physical displacement is likely to lead to other adverse impacts

such as temporary disruption of livelihoods and loss of social networks, overall, the impact has been assessed to be moderate due to the existence of mechanisms by which negotiated settlements can be reached with slum dwellers.

� Project Nirvana will bring about an improvement in the quality of life and

several other human development indicators by the rehabilitation of slum dwellers living in sub-standard conditions into organized housing with security of tenure.

� A subsequent exponential increase in population can lead to adverse

impacts such as stress on local infrastructure but can also create significant economic benefits in the project area

CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION 1

1.1 BACKGROUND 11.2 OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE OF WORK 21.3 APPROACH AND METHODOLOGY 31.4 LIMITATIONS 51.5 LAYOUT OF THE REPORT 61.6 ANNEXURE 6

2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 8

2.1 INTRODUCTION 82.2 PROJECT SETTING 92.3 SITE HISTORY AND DETAILS ON LAND OWNERSHIP 122.4 PROJECT COMPONENTS 132.5 PROJECT INFRASTRUCTURE AND UTILITIES PLANNED 172.6 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES 22

3 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL REFERENCE FRAMEWORK 31

3.1 INTRODUCTION 313.2 INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK - ENFORCEMENT AGENCIES 313.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY FRAMEWORK 353.4 APPLICABLE ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS 413.5 REGULATIONS RELATED TO SLUM AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION 463.6 LABOUR RELATED REGULATIONS 513.7 ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURAL HERITAGE RELATED REGULATIONS 533.8 CONSULTATION AND DISCLOSURE RELATED LEGISLATIONS 543.9 IFC PERFORMANCE STANDARDS 553.10 ASIAN DEVELOPMENT BANK REQUIREMENTS 61

4 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL BASELINE 67

4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE 674.2 TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE 694.3 GEOLOGY AND HYDROGEOLOGY 724.4 LAND USE 744.5 NATURAL HAZARDS 764.6 METEOROLOGY 794.7 AIR QUALITY 854.8 WATER QUALITY 914.9 SOIL QUALITY 944.10 NOISE LEVEL 954.11 TRAFFIC DENSITY 974.12 ECOLOGY 994.13 SOCIAL BASELINE 99

5 STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT, DISCLOSURE AND CONSULTATION 111

5.1 STAKEHOLDER CLASSIFICATION 1115.2 STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT AS PART OF THE PROJECT 120

6 IMPACT ASSESSMENT 124

6.2 SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT EVALUATION CRITERIA 1286.3 SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT IDENTIFICATION 1306.4 ASSESSMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 1356.5 ASSESSMENT OF SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACTS 164

ERM ESIA: KUMAR SINEW DEVELOPERS PROJECT # I8390/ 0138632 MARCH 2012

1

1 INTRODUCTION

ERM India Private Limited has been engaged by M/s Kumar Sinew Urban Developers Limited (hereinafter referred to as ‘KUL’ or ‘the client’) on the behest of the Asian Development Bank (ADB), to update the Environmental Impact Assessment report of the “Nirvana Hills Phase II” Project (hereinafter referred to as ‘Project Nirvana’) located at Survey No. 44/1, Erandwane, Haveli Taluka, Pune district in the state of Maharashtra in accordance to the ADB Safeguards Policy Requirements (2009). The ESIA also conforms to the requirements of the IFC Performance Standards, which was required by another group of Lenders lead by the Netherlands Development Finance Company (FMO). This report is an addendum to the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study (to be renamed as an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment or ESIA) which had been conducted by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd. in February, 2009. The ESIA assesses the aforementioned project on the basis of ADB’s and IFC’s established environmental and social frameworks1 and safeguard policies and standards.

1.1 BACKGROUND

KUL is a leading real estate developer in the state of Maharashtra, India with commercial and residential developments in cities such as Mumbai, Pune and Hyderabad. KUL is also an approved developer by the Slum Rehabilitation Authority (SRA) and has been involved in the implementation of the slum rehabilitation scheme (SRS) (2) of the Government of Maharashtra in Pune and Mumbai under the provisions of the Development Control Rules 33(10), also known as the in-situ rehabilitation scheme. The scheme primarily involves the builder developing the identified and demarcated slum pockets in the city of Pune to provide better accommodation and facilities to the slum dwellers in lieu of Floor Space Index (FSI) and Transferable Development Rights ( TDR) to develop their own property for sale and profit. Project Nirvana, located in Survey no. 44/1, ward 57 Erandwane, in Haveli Taluka of Pune is one such initiative on slum rehabilitation as a part of the SRA scheme3. The project is spread over an area of approximately 79 acres (approximately 320,826 sq. m.) and incorporates six major slum zones (as identified by SRA) of Wadar Vasti, Kelewadi-Indira Park, Rajiv Gandhi Park,

(1) The framework includes ADB’s 2009 Safeguards Policy Statement (SPS), the 1998 Gender and Development Policy, and 2001 Social Protection Strategy

(2) The initiative involves redeveloping a portion of the identified slums to provide improved residential quarters for the eligible residents of the slum while opening up an opportunity for the developers to undertake commercial development of the remaining space. (3) The SRA scheme under consideration for this project is specific to Pune-Pimpri-Chinchwad districts which is different from the SRA scheme of Mumbai


2

Vasant Nagar , Rautwadi and Hanuman Nagar. The demarcation of the slum began in 1982 and development of the site started around 1994. Under the first phase of development carried out in the Wadar Vasti area from 1996 to 2000, the erstwhile M/s Sinew Developers Limited had already shifted approximately 463 slum dwellers and 25 shops into eight rehabilitation towers. KUL took over this scheme from the former builder and have commenced activities after the incorporation of the SRA in Pune since 2005. The client is implementing the second phase of the slum rehabilitation in the Kilewadi and Indira Park area. Demolition is currently underway in the Indira Park area and is being overlooked by the KUL personnel (last assessed demolition number stands at 439 tenements as reported by KUL). KUL has simultaneously commissioned the construction of two transit buildings of approximately 800 units which will be subsequently converted into rehabilitation buildings. Apart from the slum redevelopment, construction activities of the first of the four residential towers developed by KUL are also underway in the free sale land allocated in the Vasti area. ERM understands that ADB is evaluating a potential investment opportunity in KUL through the modalities of project finance. As a part of its environmental and social commitment, ADB is required to assess Project Nirvana against their established safeguard framework which includes the Safeguards Policy Statement (SPS 2009) especially the Special Requirements under Different Financing Modalities, the Gender and Development Policy (1998), and the Social Protection Strategy (2001). ERM also understands that prior to ADB, another group of Lenders, including FMO, have already invested in the project, with a requirement that the project should update the regulatory EIA into an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) to meet the IFC Performance Standards. This ESIA therefore, also meets the IFC Performance Standards as relevant to the project. A detailed reference to the ADB and IFC standards is found in Section 3 on the legal and policy framework for this ESIA.

1.2 OBJECTIVE AND SCOPE OF WORK

The objective of this assessment is to develop an addendum to the government approved EIA which will formulate an Environmental and Social Impact Assessment study to meet the requirements of the ADB and FMO. In addition, the addendum to the EIA will also include the development of Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) to establish certain safeguards mechanisms to mitigate the adverse impacts identified and to enhance the beneficial impacts from Project Nirvana. The Scope of Work for the addendum ESIA entailed: � To undertake a detailed environmental and social assessment of the project as per

the established ADB framework and IFC Performance Standards;


3

� Review of the already established government approved EIA and combining it with the current assessment to formulate one single ESIA document;

� Addressing the environmental and social risks/gaps that were assessed by the due diligence assessment through additional social baseline study i.e. the socio-economic survey; and

� Development of an Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) in conformity to SPS appendix 1 and also address the FMO performance standard requirements as highlighted in the earlier constructed Environmental and Social Action Plan (ESAP).

1.3 APPROACH AND METHODOLOGY

ERM’s approach to develop a comprehensive Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) for Project Nirvana was to build upon the existing social and environmental documentation and studies on the project such as: � An independent environmental and social review that was commissioned by

FMO and DEG (May 2010); � The EIA report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Private Limited

(consultants engaged by client) was submitted to Maharashtra State Level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC) in February 2009 for getting Environmental Clearance for the whole project. Earlier, the client made an application to SEAC for the entire project but since Letter of Intent (LOI) was obtained only for the part of the project State Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) of Maharashtra granted Environmental Clearance (EC) for part of the project confining it to the area for which LOI was obtained (1) ; and

� The Environmental and Social Safeguards Audit for ADB (July 2011). ERM adopted the following methodology to develop the addendum to the EIA. Ongoing Discussions with the Project Proponent

ERM undertook discussions with the project management of KUL that is in charge of developing Project Nirvana. The management included the Planning team, the Engineering and Construction Team, the Environment Health & Safety team as well as the Community Relations team. These discussions also included the key Engineering Procurement and Construction (EPC) contractors, i.e. M/s Man-Infra and M/s Karan Builders who are currently engaged in the construction of the sale component and rehabilitation buildings respectively. Documentation Review and Onsite Monitoring

ERM undertook the review of updated project documentation, such as the household survey, labour welfare documents etc. as a part of the Environmental and Social Safeguards Audit for the ADB. This audit enabled ERM to develop a pragmatic approach towards the ESIA and the ESMP which

(1) Minutes of 31 meeting of the State Level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC) held on 28 July 2010


4

was focused on enhancing existing capacities and systems that were being put in place by KUL. Gap Assessment of the EIA

As per the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) notification S.O. 1533 dated 14 September, 2006 (amended in December, 2009 and April, 2011), any township and area development project which has area � 50 Ha and or has built-up area � 150,000 sq.mt. (Category 8(b) needs to carry out Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) study to obtain Environmental Clearance. KUL undertook the EIA study in February 2009 and the Environmental Clearance (EC) for part of the project development [KUL plans to apply for EC in different stages as and when they get Letter of Intent (LOI) from Slum Rehabilitation Authority (SRA) ] was issued in February, 2011. For the present study, EIA provided by KUL was reviewed and most of the current environmental assessment provided in the baseline chapter is based on it. No additional primary baseline monitoring or data collection was done by ERM. As per Indian governmental regulations, the baseline data is valid for a maximum period of three years. As the proposed project is a building construction project with limited impact on the surroundings, the data collected for the project site is considered to be sufficient to formulate the Environment Management Plan. Regular monitoring of environmental parameters has been recommended as part of ESMP. Socio-Economic survey and Socioeconomic Baseline Data

A socio-economic survey was conducted by a local NGO M/s Vatsalya for the entire slum population on Survey No. 44/1 Erandwane, as a response to one of the key recommendation and action suggested by ERM as part of IFC Performance Standard Review done for FMO. The survey was started in late 2010 and was completed in May, 2011. Subsequently, the on field data was transferred into electronic form, segregated and processed by the client and presented to ERM for use and assessment for identifying key social indicators and parameters which have been used in the subsequent Socio-Economic baseline chapter in this report. Summary information on the socioeconomic survey done for the entire slum area further classified into phase wise information was an outcome of the analysis (refer section 6) ERM also undertook almost 10 focus-group discussions (FGDs) and community consultations with the slum dwellers to provide an independent assessment of the existing baseline conditions. The groups for stakeholder consultations and FGDs on the basis of the KUL feedback and independent professional judgement of ERM while assessing the various categories of impacted groups. The socio- economic data also helped in identifying the various groups to be engaged in consultations.

Stakeholder Consultations

ERM undertook consultations with the key stakeholders of this project including the SRA officials, the Municipal Corporator of the area, key informants (such as community-based organizations, government


5

infrastructure of municipal schools etc.) as well as members of the NGO Vatsalya that undertook the household survey. The consultations provided insights into the entire SRA scheme, the knowledge, understanding and perceptions of the different factions of the project stakeholders to this project as well as allowed ERM to understand the key issues and impacts arising from this Slum Resettlement Scheme (SRS).

1.4 LIMITATIONS

ERM would like to highlight the following limitations to this addendum ESIA document: � Environmental Baseline: ERM has not conducted any primary data

collection and has relied on the environmental baseline data provided in the EIA report submitted to Maharashtra SEAC, supplemented by additional relevant information from secondary sources. The environmental baseline data was collected in the radius of 10 km study area. Hence, ERM cannot validate or prove the authenticity of the data used in the earlier EIA and takes no ownership or responsibility whatsoever;

� Social Baseline: The socio-economic data presented in this document is based on the socio-economic survey carried out by a third party on contractual engagement with the client. Also, the data has been processed and presented to ERM by the client themselves. ERM cannot validate or prove the authenticity of this data nor take responsibility for errors made during the data collection and processing. In addition, at the time of writing of this report, the household survey was not completed and thus it does not include a 100% census of all the slum dwellers;

� Management Plan: The key outcome of the addendum ESIA will be the Environmental and Social Management Plan document, which will ensure that adequate mechanisms are in place to manage/mitigate all the impacts that have been identified. The management plans have detailed out the necessary monitoring requirements in recognition of the existing gaps in site-specific baseline information.

Professional judgements expressed herein are based on facts and information provided. Wherever ERM has not been able to make a judgement or assess any process, it has highlighted that as an information gap and suggested a way forward.

1.4.1 Uses of the Report

ERM is not engaged in consulting or reporting for the purpose of advertising, sales promotion, or endorsement of any client interests, including raising investment capital, recommending investment decisions, or other publicity purposes. Client acknowledges this report has been prepared for their and their clients’ exclusive use and agrees that ERM reports or correspondence will not be used or reproduced in full or in part for such purposes, and may


6

not be used or relied upon in any prospectus or offering circular. Client also agrees that none of its advertising, sales promotion, or other publicity matter containing information obtained from this assessment and report will mention or imply the name of ERM. Nothing contained in this report shall be construed as a warranty or affirmation by ERM that the site and property described in the report are suitable collateral for any loan or that acquisition of such property by any lender through foreclosure proceedings or otherwise will not expose the lender to potential environmental or social liability.

1.5 LAYOUT OF THE REPORT

The layout of this report is as follows: Section 1 (this section) provides an introduction, project background,

objectives, scope of work, deliverables and methodology adopted along with limitations of the ESIA study;

Section 2 provides a description of Project Nirvana and its components as

well as a discussion on the Analysis of Alternatives; Section 3 discusses the applicable environmental and social regulatory

framework and its relevance for Project Nirvana; Section 4 describes the Environmental and Social baseline context of Project

Nirvana; Section 5 assesses the key stakeholders for Project Nirvana and their

expectations as well as influence levels; Section 6 presents our impact assessment methodology and identifies

potential environmental and social impacts from the project; Section 7 provides an Environmental and Social Management Plan for

Project Nirvana; and Section 8 concludes with overall observations and remarks on

implementation of the ESMP

1.6 ANNEXURE

Annexure 1 Ownership related Details of the land Annexure 2 Water Requirement of Different

Building Types


7

Annexure 3 Tree Cutting Permission Annexure 4: Summary Table from socio Economic survey Annexure 5: Rainwater Harvesting System Annexure 6: Site Layout Plan


8

2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION

Project Nirvana (designated by KUL as “45 Nirvana Hills”) is a slum rehabilitation and commercial development project located in the central part of Pune district. As mentioned earlier, the land addressed as survey no. 44/1 Erandwane, municipal ward 57 was declared as a slum area by the SRA back in the year 1982. The demolition and clearing of structures from the slum area started around late 1994 by the erstwhile developers of the slum, M/s A.V.Bhat and Megapolis Developers (now incorporated into the client). During the initial phase of development, 8 multi-storeyed structures were constructed as per the then Phase I of the project in the Vasti area and around 463 eligible households and 25 shops were rehabilitated. The commencement certificate for this phase was obtained in 2000. At present, the project is in its second phase of development (hence the name Nirvana Hills Phase II). As per KUL, under this second phase (and subsequent phases), development would take place in the remaining five blocks of the slum which are Kelewadi-Indira Park, Rajiv Gandhi Park, Rautwadi, Hanuman Nagar and Vasant Nagar. The following table indicates the approximate number of tenements that are being considered for rehabilitation.

Table 2.1 Slum Blocks and Number of Tenements

Name of the Block Number of Tenements Kilewadi and Indira Park 1145 Rajeev Gandhi Park 985 Rautwadi 498 Hanuman Nagar 1145 Vasant Nagar 571 Total 4344 Source: Phase II to Phase V data from KUL Socio-economic Survey, 2011

In all the above blocks, 21 rehabilitation buildings are proposed to be developed by the builder, each having 11 floors with 13 flats on each floor. The net carpet area provided for each of these apartments is equivalent to 25

sq.m. or 269 sq.ft. as per SRA guidelines. In lieu of the rehabilitation, KUL will obtain a Floor Space Index (FSI) of 2.5 which will be used for the construction of 18 sale buildings with residential and commercial units (this includes the ongoing construction of the sale components C1, C2, C4; C4 from the FSI made available through the Wadar Vasti redevelopment). In total, as per the EIA report, the entire development would take place over a plot area of approximately 3,20,826 sq.m. out of which super built up area would be approximately 3,37,170.24 sq.m.. In addition, KUL will also provide amenities as per the SRA guidelines in terms of community halls, recreation centres etc. In accordance to the EIA report (2009), a total of 66,460 sq.m. (20%of the total plot area) will need to be landscaped and is a part of the non-buildable area.


9

The State Level Expert Appraisal Committee (Maharashtra) provided an Environmental Clearance (EC) to M/s Kumar Sinew Developers Private Limited on the 28th of February 2011 for construction of total built-up area of 1,43,734 sq.m which includes a free sale building of 54,493 sq.m. and rehabilitation buildings of 54,997 sq.m.. The Consent to Establish (CTE) by the Maharashtra Pollution Control Board has also been obtained for the same. This EC reportedly includes the present construction of 1600 tenements at Kilewadi. It should be noted that in accordance to local regulatory requirements, the EC and CTE will be applied for and made available in phases on the basis of the Commencement Certificate that is obtained from the municipal authorities as well as the SRA’s Letter of Intent which sanctions the number of tenements for rehabilitation.

2.2 PROJECT SETTING

2.2.1 Site Location

The site of Project Nirvana as per SRA demarcation is located at Survey no. 44/1, Erandwane, Haveli Taluka, in the city of Pune. Geographically, it is located at 18° 30’ 41.82”N and 73° 49’ 21.34”E. It is situated at a prime commercial and residential area of central Pune and is flanked by Karve1 road in the East South direction and the Paud road in the West South direction. Figure 2.1 provides a site location map and Figure 2.2 provides the regional setting of the Project.

Figure 2.1 Site Location Map

Source: EIA Report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., 2009

(1) Karve Road is a prominent road which connects the Deccan area near the Garware Flyover - Lakdi Bridge junction to the densely populated Kothrud and Karve Nagar area in Pune, Maharashtra.

ERM

ES

IA: K

UM

AR

SIN

EW D

EVEL

OPE

RS

PRO

JEC

T #

I839

0/ 0

1386

32

MA

RCH

201

2

10

Figu

re 2

.2

Con

text

set

ting

for t

he P

roje

ct S

ite

in P

une


11

The site is primarily surrounded by commercial and residential structures. In the immediate vicinity, the site is surrounded by SNDT College in the east, Residential colony in the west, Automotive Research Association of India (ARAI) reservation area in the North and the Karve-Paud road in the south. The nearest railway station is the Pune railway station located at around 7 km aerial distance and the nearest interstate corridor that is the Mumbai-Pune expressway is located at an aerial distance of 4 km from the site.

2.2.2 Site Setting and Layout

As mentioned before, the entire site expanse is spread over a plot area of approximately 320,826 sq.mt. or 79 acres. Currently, the slums exist in about one third (1/3) of this area as the remaining area is a no-development zone which comprises of a land classification known as “hilltop-hill slope”. The total super built-up area used for the development would be approximately 337,170.24 sq.mt.An expanse of 66,460 sq.mt. of the total plot will need to be landscaped and will be part of the non-buildable area. The entire development will be having a total of 41 Structures out of which 21 are slum rehabilitation structures, 18 are commercial and residential towers and two are public places (1 community hall and 1 women association hall). The following figure provides a diagrammatic representation of the site layout:

Figure 2.3 Proposed Layout Plan for 45 Nirvana Hills

Source: Adapted from KUL

Wadar Vasti Tenements in 8 rehabilitation buildings

Sale Component of Commercial/ Residential Towers

Buildable Area Proposed for Slum Rehabilitation

Non-buildable Area/No Development Zone

N


12

2.3 SITE HISTORY AND DETAILS ON LAND OWNERSHIP

ERM understands that the land addressed as Survey no. 44/1 Erandwane, Municipal ward 57 has been leased out to M/s Sinew Developers Limited on a long-term lease basis. The land or property amounting to an area of approximately 79.75 acres is under the legal ownership of a public charitable trust by the name of Khwaja Peer Sayed Hisamuddin Kattal-E-Zanjani Chisti (trustees) as per the provisions of the Bombay Public Charitable Trust Act of 1950. The land was unanimously put up for development by the trust itself and was leased out in the year 1982. The Lease documents are attached as Annex 1.

Box 2.1 Brief History of Land lease and transfer

Source: Legal Search Report, “Opinion on Title, SV Erande (Advocate), 4th January 2003”

This same Sinew Developers Limited or the erstwhile Megapolis Developer was merged with Kumar Urban Developers Limited as in 23 of March, 2009 under the name “Kumar Sinew Developers Limited”. Therefore, after the incorporation, the lease hold rights along with the development right automatically passed on to Kumar Sinew Developers Limited or the client. The client, as per the original deed dated 13/05/1982 is currently the lessee up till the year 2032 after which it has an option of an extension of 49 more years. Consultations with the municipal corporator indicate that there were concerns regarding the security of land lease and tenure and accordingly the Slum Rehabilitation Authority (SRA) Pune had asked KUL to get a legal opinion on the same. It is known to ERM that they are in the process of filling for an extension for an additional 999 years or an indefinite lease. The copy of the application for the 999 years was not made available to ERM.

Initially in 1982, the land was leased out as per deed dated 13/5/1982 to M/s A.V. Bhat & Co., a registered partnership firm in the city of Pune for a period of 50 years (with an option of extending the lease by another 49 years at the end of the term). This lease was under the agreement that a certain rent payment had to be paid to the trustee by the lessees and the lessees were authorized to carry out development of the said property and were also further authorized to transfer or assign their leasehold rights and interests acquired by them to any sub-lessees of their choice. On the 21st June1984, this land was declared as a “Slum Area” under section 13 of the Maharashtra Slum Areas (Improvement, Clearance and Redevelopment) Act, 1971 and was put for development under the SRA. The same engaged M/s A.V.Bhat for the work of clearance of the slum area by demolishing old structures standing thereon and rehabilitation of the slum dwellers. After 10 years of declaration of the land as a slum, M/s A.V.Bhat & Co. under a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) dated 30/07/1994 and after consent of the trustees, agreed to assign and entrust the rights and work of development along with the right to get assigned lease hold rights of the property in favour of Megapolis Developers Pvt. Ltd after obtaining the necessary permission from the Charity Commissioner, Pune. Furthermore, as per certificate dated 24th June, 2002 issued by the Registrar of Companies, Pune, Maharashtra, Megapolis Developers were granted permission to change their name to “Sinew Developers Limited”.


13

2.4 PROJECT COMPONENTS

The ongoing construction and development for Project Nirvana has been divided into two components. The first component is the Slum Rehabilitation and Redevelopment and the second is the Free Sale component utilised by KUL to construct its own commercial and residential properties.

Figure 2.4 Two Primary Components of Project Nirvana


The following sections details the various characteristics of these two components.

2.4.1 Component I- Slum Rehabilitation and Redevelopment

The slum rehabilitation and redevelopment for Project Nirvana has been planned by KUL to be carried out over five phases. Under first phase of development, the rehabilitation towers in Vasti zone have been constructed and 463 slum dwellers and 25 commercial establishments have already been rehabilitated in 8 multi storey buildings. The project is currently in its second phase of development in Kelewadi-Indira Nagar and Rajiv Gandhi Park. Subsequently, after the completion of this current phase, the project will move forward towards the next phases. The following table indicates the slum zone, the number of slum tenements on the basis of the socio-economic survey.

Table 2.2 Slum Zone and Number of Tenements

Name of the Zone Number of Tenements Phase of Development Vasti 488 Phase I (completed) Kilewadi and Indira Park 1145 Phase II

Component I

Component II will be planned in this portion of land

N


14

Name of the Zone Number of Tenements Phase of Development Rajeev Gandhi Park 985 Phase II Rautwadi 498 Phase III Hanuman Nagar 1145 Phase IV and V Vasant Nagar 571 Phase V Total 4832 From Phase II to Completion

*Source: Phase II to Phase V data from KUL Socio-economic Survey 2011 As mentioned before, 21 rehabilitation buildings are proposed to be developed by the developer, each having 11 floors with 13 flats on each floor. The net carpet area provided for each of these apartments is equivalent to 269 sq feet as per SRA guidelines. Also, two community halls will also be developed by KUL. Following is the artistic representation of the slum rehabilitation building as shared by the client with ERM.

Figure 2.5 Artistic representation of the Slum Rehabilitation Building (left) and existing slum rehabilitation towers in Wadar Vasti (right)

*Source: KUL and Photo-documentation

Figure 2.6 Sample Flat

*Source: KUL and Photo-documentation Every rehabilitation unit has an independent toilet, bathroom, and specific provisions such as cooking platforms, sinks etc as per the provisions of the


15

SRA norms. Fire fighting provisions will be in each building as discussed in Section 2.5.6. In addition to the above, KUL has also committed to provide the following additional amenities including: � A temple; � Gym/playground; � Library; � Primary school and a secondary school; � A permanent crèche; � Community Hall; and � Aged People’s Space. The client has obtained the Annexure II for Rajeev Gandhi Park which was published by the SRA on the 30th of May 2011 and thus efforts to facilitate eligibility of tenements and the appeal procedure are currently ongoing. In addition, KUL has obtained sanction or commencement certificate for 725 tenements for Rajeev Gandhi Park (KUL is yet to receive a sanction/commencement certificate for the 711 slum dwellers eligible for rehabilitation at Kilewadi and Indira Park). KUL has accordingly commissioned the construction of two transit buildings in this area of approximately 800 units which will be subsequently converted into rehabilitation buildings. These buildings along with two already established transit buildings will initially be used to accommodate displaced people as part of the demolition drive. They would be later converted into slum tenements once all the other towers are completed. KUL has hired a sub-contractor, M/s Karan Builders for the excavation and construction of the transit buildings up till the parking level. Currently the work is underway at full strength with about 40 builders at this site. These buildings are being built as per specifications of the SRA and will provide all amenities and utilities as specified in the scheme.

Box 2.2 Key Specifications for a slum rehabilitation building

Source: SRA Pune Website

The key specifications as per SRA which the developer is required to comply while constructing the rehabilitation towers are: � A Carpet area of 25 sq. m. or 269 sq. ft. including balcony, bath and water closet � A Carpet area of 25 sq m or 269 sq. ft. for displaced shops and commercial establishment � A multi purpose room with size up to 12.5 sq.m and with a minimum width of 2.4 m � The cooking space allowed with a minimum size of 2.4 sq.m with minimum width of 1.2 m � Width of pathway around the buildings to vary from 1.5m to 3m starting from a pathway

length of 20m and incrementing by 0.5 for every increase of 10m � It is not essential to provide flushing cisterns and toilets without this provision can be

supplied. The water closet seat shall be of minimum of 0.46 m (18 inches) in length � The minimum internal dimension for a water closet (if separately provided ) shall be 0.90m

x 1.10m � The minimum internal size of ventilation shaft provided shall be 1.50m x 2.40m � A septic tank shall be provided with capacity of 141.6 liters (five cubic feet) per capita

where the municipal services are likely to be available within four or five years or so. Pour flush water seal latrines (NEERI TYPE) shall be permitted where the municipal sewerage system is not available and the water table in the area is not high.


16

Simultaneous to the construction in Rajiv Gandhi Park, demolition is also underway in the Indira Park area and is being overlooked by the KUL Community Relations personnel. For precaution as well as procedures with respect to voluntary consent from the slum dweller, the KUL team is following a demolition policy which includes signing a consent agreement as well as a demolition checklist before carrying out any work.

Figure 2.7 Demolished Plot in Indira Park

*Source: ERM Photo Documentation KUL has established an office in this area and setup a Community Relations Team (CRT) (along with SRA personnel) consisting of around 10 personnel. These personnel are involved in facilitating slum demolition, land transfer or agreements between the client and the slum dwellers along with maintaining records on rent distribution, facilitating cheque transfers, biometric identification etc. They also address community issues, record grievances and oversee the entire public relation mechanism.

2.4.2 Component II- Free Sale Component

KUL will utilize the FSI and TDR received from construction of component one to construct and develop commercial and residential spaces inside the project zone. Out of the 41 towers, KUL will establish 18 residential and commercial towers in the area allocated as per TDR and FSI by the SRA for their own sale. Commercial will be on ground floor of A 1 to A 8 residential structures; seven floors of A 9 residential structure and five floors of D 1 to D 4 structures. Currently, construction of C1 tower is underway in the commercial area allocated to KUL in the Wadar Vasti area for which the CTE from the MPCB has been received. KUL has contracted a sub-contractor, M/s Man-Infra for construction (up till the first floor), Fusion as a Project Management Consultant for management of all the ongoing activities and some of their own staff to oversee the entire process. Labour camps have been set on site and about 100 labourers are currently being accommodated here. Inflows of about four hundred more labourers are expected during the construction. For


17

the same, KUL is additionally developing a neighbouring site for building additional labour camps so as to accommodate the inflow.

2.5 PROJECT INFRASTRUCTURE AND UTILITIES PLANNED

Certain number of utilities is planned for the entire development in Project Nirvana. Some of the general multipurpose utilities include shopping malls, community centre, kids’ playgrounds, crèche, temples and green zones. The primary utilities required for day to day functioning of the buildings as assessed and studied in details are:

� Parking Arrangements; � Water Supply and Storage system; � Sewage Disposal System, � Solid Waste Management; � Power Supply and Backup system; � Fire Fighting system; and � Rain Water Harvesting

Following sections highlights each of these in detail:

2.5.1 Parking Arrangement

For all the 41 structures to be developed including residential, commercial and slum rehabilitation parts, the client in the development plan have allocated area for parking in each building. Parking Details for the project is as follows:

Table 2.3 Parking Details

Type of Vehicle Parking in Residential Area

Parking in Commercial Area

No. of vehicles No. of vehicles Cars 3739 720 Scooters 9811 963 Cycles 11,159 683 Total 24,709 2,366 *Source: EIA Report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., 2009

2.5.2 Water Supply and Storage System

The area receives water supply from the local municipal corporation PMC (Pune Municipal Corporation). As per the EIA report the total water requirement estimated for both component I and II approximately equals to 4069 m³ per day. Out of this, water consumption for component I is envisaged at 3884 m³ per day and for component II it is approximately 185 m³. A detailed table representing water requirement of different building types is provided in the Annex 2


18

2.5.3 Sewage Water Disposal System

Two sewage plants would be setup for treating sewage water discharged from the developed complexes. As per the EIA, the sewage expected to be generated is approximately 3.25 MLD (Mega Litres per Day). This value is approximately 80% of the water that would be consumed per day. The designed capacity of the sewage treatment plant is 3.30 MLD which is provided in the form of 2 STP s of capacity 1.20 MLD and 2.20 MLD. The treated water will be used for gardening, flushing and HVAC purpose.

Figure 2.8 Routing of Sewage and locations of the Sewage Treatment Plants (STP)


Following represents the key stage involved in processing the sewage.

Box 2.3 Key Stages Involved in processing the Sewage


� Sewage water from Lavatories and that from bathing, cleaning and washing, to be separated at source from each other through separate drainage lines.

� The raw sewage generated will be passed through the BAR SCREEN CHAMBER and the coarse solids will be trapped and removed manually.

� This effluent is then collected in the equalization tank where the wastewater will be collected by gravity and pumped into downstream units.

� It is then pumped into aeration tank wherein the attached, aerobic microbes will utilize the pollutant in presence of oxygen thereby reducing BOD/COD.

� The biomass generated will be separated in the tube settling tank and clear supernatant will flow with gravity.

� The treated wastewater will be dosed with liquid Chlorine and allowed to react in chlorine contact/treated waste water tank for disinfection purpose.

� The treated wastewater will then be disposed off / reuse suitably. � Optionally, the treated wastewater will be pumped through pressure sand filter and

activated carbon filter prior to reuse for gardening / toilet flush or other tertiary requirements.

Locations of STPs

N


19

2.5.4 Solid Waste Management

The waste generated from the construction and demolition (C&D) activities (primarily inert waste) are being used by the project proponent for backfilling purpose at the quarry site. Waste generated form construction and demolition waste would be stored at a designated place within the sight premises itself will be reused to the maximum extent possible before using it for backfilling purpose. Secondary information indicates that about 25 kg of waste is generated per sq ft area of buildings demolished. Assuming 25 kg of C&D waste generation per sqft of building under demolition, about 13200 tons of waste is expected for generation. It should be noted that the there can be potential asbestos containing material especially in roofing which is classified as hazardous waste. This issue is discussed in Section 6.4.2. It should be noted that hazardous wastes is minimal and could be less than 5%. However, any such waste should be disposed off in a secure landfill and should not be used for onsite backfilling. During operational phase of the project, approximately 12.2 tonnes per day of domestic solid waste would be generated; which consists of biodegradable, non biodegradable and recyclable fraction. The domestic solid waste would be managed as per the provisions of Municipal Solid Waste (Management and Handling Rules), 2000. � Storage and Collection: Source segregation of waste would be practised at

household level by using double bin system, green bin for storage of biodegradable fraction and blue bin system for storing non biodegradable fraction of waste. All the waste generated at household level would be collected on daily basis. The waste from households will be transferred to bigger bins of suitable sizes which will be placed on each floor of the residential and commercial towers and at strategic places in the common areas. All the waste from these secondary bins would be transferred to the secondary collection chamber where waste would be further segregated into biodegradable, non biodegradable and recyclable fraction.

� Treatment and Disposal: Biodegradable waste would be treated through

vermi-composting technology and the compost generated would be utilized as manure for the landscaping purpose. The site for this will be identified by KUL. Non biodegradable fraction will be collected by PMC (Pune Municipal Corporation) which will dispose off the waste at the landfill site. Recyclable fraction would be sold off to the local recyclers.

2.5.5 Power Supply and Backup system

As per the EIA, the net power supply required for the proposed buildings is estimated to be around 17.4 MW based on this assumption that approximately 4 watt of power will be required per sq ft. The power will be made available from the Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Company Limited (MSEDCL). The client will put up appropriate transformers in the proposed sub station as required by electricity providers and provide meter rooms for


20

all the residential flats and utility operations. As a power backup system, an alternative source of supply would be provided by the client from a separate sub station. Appropriate change over switch will be provided for provisions that include fire pumps, booster pumps, sprinkler & jockey pumps as well as the staircases/corridor lighting circuits.

2.5.6 Fire Fighting System

The client will provide fire fighting systems and mechanisms to the residential and commercial towers established in Project Nirvana as per the requirements of the National Building Code. The necessary systems and utilities to be provided are:

� Automatic Sprinkler Systems � Underground tanks and reservoirs to provide supply to fire hydrants � Overhead Water Storage Tank to provide supply to wet risers via a

booster pump � Portable Fire Extinguishers � Manual Fire Alarm Systems

Box 2.4 Key specifications and features of some of the above mentioned utilities and

systems

Source: KUL and EIA

2.5.7 Storm Water Drainage and Rain Water Harvesting System

KUL will construct proper storm water drains for collection and disposal of storm water from the entire plot area. RCC trench of 600 mm wide will be laid down covering all sides of the plot boundary. These drains will channel storm water and discharge the same into municipal storm water drains. All the surface drains will be covered with R.C.C gratings. Rain water pipes of 200

� The wet riser of each building will be connected to a fire pump at the ground floor level capable of giving pressure of not less than 3.2 kgs/cm2 at the topmost hydrant

� A booster Pump having a capacity of 15 KW with pressure not less than 3.2 kg/cm2 at the topmost hydrant outlet at the wet riser will be provided at the terrace level of each building. Electric supply will be provided to these pumps on independent circuit. One backup pump will be diesel pump.

� Stand by pump of equal capacity will be provided for each building. � Sprinkler pumps along with jockey pumps will be provided for automatic sprinkler systems. � Appropriate change over switches would be provided for fire pumps, booster pumps,

sprinkler pumps and jockey pumps, staircases/corridor lighting circuit, fire lifts and manual fire alarm system. These will be housed in a separate cabin.

� One dry chemical powder type fire extinguisher of 5 kgs capacity with wall mounting bracket having ISI certification mark and two buckets filled with dry, clean sand would be provided in the Electric Meter Room.

� Dry chemical Powder type fire extinguishers of 5kgs capacity having ISI certification mark and four buckets of dry, clean sand will also be kept in the each car parking area.

� Flat entrance and kitchen doors of each wing will be of solid core having fire resistance of not less than half an hour (solid wood of 45mm thickness).

� Use of electric cable shaft for electric cable guide ways. Electric shafts will be sealed at each floor level with non combustible material such as Vermiculite concrete. Inspection door of the shaft will have two hours fire resistance.

� Electric metering room will be located at the ground level. Adequate ventilation is to be provided.


21

mm will be laid to collect surface water. The water shall flowthrough the RCC NP2 which are connected to channel with slope of 1 in 200. These pipes will discharge the water into storm water drains of the municipal corporation. The storm water drains of the municipal corporation will eventually lead to nearby Mutha river. The client is in the process of setting up a rain water harvesting system for Project Nirvana. As Pune receives a considerable amount of rainfall every year from June to September, the water collected will minimize the net water consumption from the local municipality and will help saving the resource. It will also highlight the client’s commitment to environment friendly practice and will also assist them in their application for an “Eco Housing” certificates for the project.

Figure 2.9 Storm Water Drainage and Rain Water harvesting system


As per the EIA, the plot receives approximately13200 cum/hr of rainfall per year and the peak rain fall rate will be 55 mm/hr. The rain water would be collected via pits and discharged into collection chambers that are located in the planned utilities area towards the north west of the site. It could be further filtered for converting into potable water or used for maintenance of green zones.

2.5.8 Amenities and Public Spaces

A key feature of the slum rehabilitation project will be the amenities and public spaces provided to residents. It is reported that all such features are to be designed and built with attention to indoor air quality, ventilations etc. For instance, internal hallways are 1.8 mt and will be as per Appendix T of Development Control Rules under Town Planning Act. 1966Adequate access roads, recreation areas and green spaces are also to be provided as per the landscaping plan. Note that the commercial units in the rehabilitation components will be provided for commercial tenements existing in the erstwhile slums. Cleaning of public spaces will be undertaken by the Pune

Storm Water Drainage Line

N


22

Municipal Corporation. INR 560 will be deposited as infrastructural Improvement charges in which 90% part will go to concerned Municipal and 10 % will go with SRA, for which required Service Charge will be paid to PMC through SRA. Building amenities such as elevators, lights, hallways and fire equipment will be maintained by the housing society by engaging housekeeping subcontractors.

2.6 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

This section documents the alternative options that were considered during project conception and planning phase. KUL’s QE &OHS policy commits to sustainable development of all its building construction projects by striving to prevent environmental pollution and depletion of natural resources by using latest technology and training. In line with its policy statement, KUL has integrated practical and feasible sustainable options in the project planning and design. Though there are many sustainable options that were considered along with conventional/ traditional options for implementing Project Nirvana, the critical ones are highlighted here and discussed under following heads: � No project scenario � Project Location � Layout planning � Rehab flat design � Construction technology � Construction materials � Sustainable resource use options � Phasing Plan � Transit arrangements

2.6.1 No-Project Scenario

The slum colonies settled on the land parcel located on the rolling hill slope and foot hills at cadastral survey no. 44/1 in Erandwane comes under Municipal ward 57. The following slum colonies which settled at Erandwane since 1940s were recognised as slum areas and legally declared by SRA way back in the year 1982: � Vasti � Kelewadi � Indira Park � Rajiv Gandhi Park � Rautwadi � Hanuman Nagar and � Vasant Nagar. Consultations with local community reveal that slums started sprouting at this location as stone quarry sites were operating then at the site. The remnants of the abandoned quarry site could be seen even now which now falls well within the project boundary. The workers who were employed in the stone


23

quarry wanted to stay closer and hence put up slum colonies in the nearby vacant lands. In fact the name “Wadar vasti” – one of the slum colony located inside project site - has come to existence because “Wadar”refers to workers of quarry site and “vasti” refers to informally developed colony in the local language – Marathi. Hence, Wadar Vasti refers to informally developed colony comprising of stone worker families. Project Nirvana – Failure is not an option

Today, the slum colonies that began as stone worker colonies have grown beyond its original purpose and has grown in size to become one of the major slum colonies in Pune City with about 4500 slum tenements. Significantly, almost all stakeholders who have direct stakes in the project such as KUL, slum community and regulators (PMC, SRA) want Project Nirvana to be successful as it can trigger more interest in similar slum rehabilitation projects promoted by SRA among private developers and other slum settlements in Pune City. This huge expectation on Project Nirvana is not surprising considering the fact that nearly 32.5 per cent of the population of Pune lives in slums as per the 'Slum Atlas of Pune City’ prepared by NGO Mashal in 2008. The study found that there are 477 slum pockets in the city housing 1,150,000 people belonging to 211,423 slum families in the city. Today, the slum population estimates have gone up to 40-45% of City population occupying less than 6 percent of the city's area. This is paradoxical as 40-45% population use 6% of city area while the rest half of the population uses almost 80-90% of the geographical area. This is an unjust and in-equitable distribution of resources. In such a scenario the slum houses end up lacking the most basic facilities and inhabitants has to manage with a poor quality of life for many generations to come, till the time rehabilitation interventions such as the current project comes through. It has been well documented through various NGO sponsored and government funded studies that slum rehabilitation projects that are executed in full compliance to government guidelines and NBC 2005 have improved the quality of life of many slum families across India, leave alone Pune city. Some basic testimonies gathered during survey such as this one coming from a mother of rehabilitated slum family saying that her daughters can get a better bridegroom because they are no longer living in the slums underline the importance of such slum rehabilitation projects. Slum situation is worsening

In the no-project scenario, the situation in the City is expected to get worse as it has been happening over the last two decades. According to Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC) estimates, some 88,000 people migrated to the city in 2006, of which 45,000 settled in the slums. Every year, the number of people migrating to the city continues to multiply due to economic and


24

livelihood opportunities the City offers. Pune’s slum population has grown by 176 per cent since 1991 owing to constant migration. Though the City has distinctions such as IT hub of the State and a centre of learning (Pune is called Oxford of the East), it is also fast gaining another epithet, that of a city of slums. The Town and Country Planning Organisation (TCPO), the technical arm of the ministry of urban development, government of India, ranks Pune third in the cities with the largest number of slums in India. Mumbai stands first with 55 per cent of its total population in slums, followed by Meerut with a slum population of 44 per cent. Of the 244 sq km which come under the PMC limits, about 15 sq km, i.e. six per cent of the total land, is encroached upon by slums1.

2.6.2 Project Nirvana – in tune with Government Vision

In this context, rehabilitating 4500 slum families out of 211,423 slum families in the City under Project Nirvana constitutes rehabilitating only 2.1% of the slum population but is a critical step forward in making the City slum free by the year 2015 as enunciated by Chief Secretary in the Government of Maharashtra. In order to make the Pune city slum free in three years, Government of Maharashtra has outlined three avenues available for slum reconstruction which is listed below: � Under the provisions of the Basic Services for Urban Poor (BSUP)

programme of the Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission, (JNNURM) – a Government of India initiative, about INR 300 crore has been earmarked for relocating shanties.

� The second avenue under JNNURM is what is called ‘in-situ' development where proper dwellings are constructed on the existing slum site using 10% contribution from slum dwellers and remaining shared between Municipal, State and Central Government funds.

� The third option for slum reconstruction is under the Slum Rehabilitation Authority schemes established in 2003.

Project Nirvana being an SRA approved scheme falls under the third avenue outlined by Government of Maharashtra. In SRA, currently there are 132 slum rehabilitation proposals being examined and 32 schemes, covering 5,800 dwellings have been sanctioned. Nearly 42,000 dwellings will be built if all the proposals were to go through thus covering almost 20% of slum population in the City. It can be inferred that within SRA, Project Nirvana is one of the largest single site rehabilitation project and hence its successful execution is critical to the Government’s vision of making Pune a slum free city in the next three years. An alternative without the project is obviously undesirable, as it would worsen the slum scenario in Pune City and would be a major constraint on the

(1) 1 Adapted from http://escapefromindia.wordpress.com/2007/12/19/55-mumbai-44-meerut-40-of-pune-indias-top-

list-on-slum-population/


25

economic growth; moreover in the long run more public funds will be spent on providing basic amenities such as water supply, education and health of ever growing slum communities. Project Location

The site of Project Nirvana as per SRA demarcation is located at survey no. 44/1, Erandwane, Haveli Taluka, in the city of Pune. As the project has been conceived as “in-situ” development project on a private owned land in lieu of the FSI incentives offered by SRA, there is no alternative option for the project to locate the slum rehabilitation buildings elsewhere in the City. Slum communities, especially those that have resided in a particular location for many decades such as the current ones in Project Nirvana, refuse to accept alternate rehabilitation site due to various social and economic reasons. Slum redevelopment proposals at alternate locations from the original slum locations have always faced problems due to R&R aspect as there will be unanimous opposition from affected slum communities. Very few projects have been successful provided they are implemented by Government departments or authorities (e.g slum resettlement undertaken by World Bank funded Mumbai Urban Transport Project between 2001 and 2008). It will be difficult for a private developer to propose an alternate location for executing a slum redevelopment project in Indian conditions. Hence, no alternative locations were analysed and the project utilised the in-situ slum redevelopment schemes available with SRA for moving forward. Layout Planning

Considering the prevailing topography within the project site, the rehab building layout has been laid largely in north to south direction along the contour lines to the extent feasible. The current layout provides for ample ventilation and lighting as each of the rehabilitation flat will either face east or west direction. Planning the layout along available hill slope contours reduces the significant amount of excavation work that would have been necessitated if the layout is perpendicular or angular to the contours. The amount of excavated debris is reduced significantly and also with it the associated problem of its disposal. Rehab Flat Design

As per SRA rules, rehab tenements with a net carpet area of 25 sq.mt. or 269 sq.ft. is to be provided. Conventionally, the rehab flats were made with a 1 room, hall and kitchen (RHK) or simply a hall and kitchen with attached toilets and bathroom. Exploring beyond the conventional design and SRA guideline requirements, KUL has proposed to build a 2 RHK i.e. two rooms, one hall, one kitchen with


26

attached toilets and bathroom in the same carpet area by intelligently using the space and flat layout. KUL also proposes to provide empty space before the main door of each flat – a sort of individual portico – giving due consideration to slum community living habits especially the womenfolk who like to sit in front of their house to do their daily chores. The model flat currently on display at Project Nirvana site is designed with this configuration along with arrangement of furniture’s to inform the slum community about its feasibility. KUL also wishes to provide the slum community with modular kitchen amenities and basic minimum furniture in each of the rehab flats and is currently exploring with low cost suppliers in India, China and South East Asia. These initiatives are well above the SRA guidelines and regulatory requirements and a positive step forward to convince the slum communities to co-operate in successful execution of Project Nirvana. As per the consultations with slum community and project authorities, this 2 RHK flat configuration has been well received by slum community members and they have suggested some changes which has been readily accepted by KUL for incorporation in the actual flat. Construction Technology

KUL has proposed to use aluminium form work technology over the conventional wooden scaffold and metal sheet/ply board form work technology in the construction of rehab tenements. Some of the basic benefits of aluminium form work technology as available in the secondary literature is listed below: More seismic resistance: - The box type construction provides more seismic resistance to the structure. � Increased durability: - The durability of a complete concrete structure is

more than conventional brick bat masonry. � Lesser number of joints thereby reducing the leakages and enhancing the

durability. � Higher carpet area- Due to shear walls, the wall thickness is thin thus

increasing the internal carpet area. � Integral and smooth finishing of wall and slab- Smooth finish of

aluminium can be seen vividly on walls. � Uniform quality of construction – Uniform grade of concrete is used. � Negligible maintenance – Strong built up of concrete needs no

maintenance. � Faster completion – Unsurpassed construction speed can be achieved due

to light weight of aluminium forms. � Lesser manual labour- Less labour is required for carrying formworks. � Simplified foundation design due to consistent load distribution. � The natural density of concrete wall result in better sound transmission

coefficient.


27

The relative comparison of aluminium form work technology over conventional technology is listed at Table 2.4.

Table 2.4 Comparison of Form Work Construction Technologies

Factor of Comparison Conventional Formwork Technology

Aluminium Form Work Technology

Remarks

Quality Normal Superior. In – Situ casting of whole structure and transverse walls done in a continuous operation, using controlled concrete mixers obtained from central batching, mixing plants and mechanically placed through concrete buckets using crane and compacted in leak proof moulds using high frequency vibrators

Superior quality in “System housing”

Speed of construction. The pace of construction is slow due to step – by – step completion of different stages of activity the masonry is required to be laid brick by brick. Erection of formwork, concreting and deshuttering forms is a two – week cycle. The plastering and other finishing activities can commence only thereafter.

In this system, the walls and floors are cast together in one continuous operation in matter of few hours and in built accelerated curing overnight enable removal and re-use of forms on daily cycle basis.

System construction is much faster.

Aesthetics. In the case of RCC structural framework of column and beams with partition brick walls is used for construction, the columns and beams show unsightly projections in room interiors.

The Room – Sized wall panels and the ceiling elements cast against steel plates have smooth finishing and the interiors have neat and clean lines without unsightly projections in various corners. The walls and ceilings also have smooth even surfaces, which only need colour/white wash

-

External finishes. Cement plastered brickwork, painted with cement – based

Textured / pattern coloured concrete facia can be provided.

Permanent facia finishes feasible with minor extra initial cost


28

Factor of Comparison Conventional Formwork Technology

Aluminium Form Work Technology

Remarks

paint. Finishing needs painting once in every three years.

This will need no frequent repainting.

Useful carpet area as % of plinth area.

Efficiency around 83.5%

Efficiency around 87.5%

More efficient utilization of land for useful living space.

Consumption of basic raw materials Cement. Reinforcing Steel

Normal Reinforcing steel required is less as compared to the in situ construction as RCC framework uses brick wall as alternative

Consumption somewhat more than that used in conventional structures. It may, however will be slightly more than corresponding load – bearing brick wall construction for which, requirements of IS 456 have to be followed for system housing.

Although greater in consumption, the strength and durability is also more Steel requirement is more, as it is required for the shear wall construction. But shear wall construction increases safety against earthquake.

Maintenance In maintenance cost, the major expenditure is involved due to: - repairs and maintenance of plaster of walls / ceiling etc. - Painting of outer and inner walls. - Leakages due to plumbing and sanitation installation.

The walls and ceiling being smooth and high quality concrete repairs for plastering and leakage’s are not at all required frequently.

It can be concluded that maintenance cost is negligible.

Source: http://www.architectjaved.com/mivan-formwork/comparison_aluminum_formwork_vs_conventional_formwork.html Sustainable resource use options

Project Nirvana has integrated sustainable resource use options over the conventional ones as highlighted under Section 7.4.6. Residential and commercial buildings consume significant amount of resources through their project life cycle. Conventionally designed buildings consume more resources than the modern buildings that incorporate latest sustainable technologies and concepts. Some of the sustainable resource initiatives proposed under the project include the following: � The total water demand of 4.1 Million Litres Daily (MLD) will be partially

met through treated waste water recycle from in-house Sewerage Treatment Plant (STPs) in order to reduce the raw water consumption at site during the rest of project life cycle. Project proposes to recycle at least 50% of treated wastewater for gardening, flushing and heating,


29

ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) purpose from in-house STPs having a total of 3.4 MLD capacity.

� Storm water from the unpaved surface will be allowed to percolate in the ground.

� Project Nirvana has formulated rainwater harvesting (RWH) scheme which will be constructed as part of other project proposals. Rain water is proposed to be injected into the fracture zones under the land. Project is proposing to construct recharge bores and soak pits to aid in recharging ground water resource. Excess water will be drained to Municipal drains. Two RWH tanks of capacity 250 cum and 570 cum each for rooftop rainwater storage has been proposed along with 51 recharge pits/ soak pits all through the plot area.

� The 3.25 MLD sewage generated from proposed project will be treated in-house in about 2 STPs planned at various locations within project site. As highlighted earlier, almost 50% of wastewater received will be recycled back for gardening, flushing and landscape maintenance purposes after treatment and disinfection at STP and excess treated wastewater will be disposed off to PMC sewerage system.

� The project proposes to have energy efficient building services, equipments, public area lighting and exterior lighting systems to reduce the energy demand.

� Four (4) numbers of DG sets will be provided for power back-up for essential services such as fire fighting systems and lift systems.

� Project has extensive plans to use solar energy for achieving energy conservation and the proposals include:

o Solar hot water systems for sale buildings up to top 9 floors o Solar panel lights will be installed for common facilities o Solar street lights are proposed for common areas such as open

spaces, pathways, reserved green (RG) etc. � About 12.2 tonnes per day of solid waste will be generated at the project

site and this will be segregated in-house into wet and dry waste. The dry waste will be disposed off through an authorised contractor and wet waste will be treated by vermi-composting technology and the compost generated will be used as manure in the internal landscaped gardens. Sludge generated from STP too would be used as manure for gardening purpose. A demand-supply analysis of the manure and sludge from the STP has been provided under Section 6.4.2 on Solid Wastes (Box 6.1).

� Some other sustainable measures proposed under the project include: o All rooms are designed with adequate opening to have proper

natural light and ventilation. o All public areas will have CFC or solar lights for lighting. o External aluminium windows with glass which is reflective type to

reduce heat gain. o All masonry work will be done with cement concrete block instead

of burnt brick o All internal brick masonry walls will have gypsum plaster. o The project authorities have applied for Eco-Housing certification

for sale building components of the project. The eco-housing


30

certification program is operated by the Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC). Project hopes to attain four (4) star rating under the program where 5 star rating is the maximum.

Phasing Plan

As discussed under Section 2.4.1, the slum rehabilitation and redevelopment for Project Nirvana has been planned by KUL to be carried out over five phases over a five year period. This prudent phasing plan has been formulated to have least disturbance to existing slum community. The project is currently in its second phases of development in Kelewadi-Indira Nagar and Rajiv Gandhi Park. The slum population rehabilitation (in either transit tenements or in rented houses outside) and demolition of slum structures is currently limited to Kelewadi-Indira Nagar and Rajiv Gandhi Park areas only. The remaining areas which are proposed for redevelopment in successive phases will remain unaffected during the current phase of construction. Subsequently after the completion of this current phase, the project will move forward towards the next phases. The phasing plan is prudent in the sense that the various project teams can focus on limited slum population and area during construction phase. As limited slum areas are opened up for construction, maintaining project schedule and management of manpower and material resources becomes easy. Transit Arrangements

In the ongoing Phase 2 of Project Nirvana, KUL has offered two kinds of transit arrangements for slum families that are disturbed by second phase construction schedule. Slum families can either opt to stay in transit tenements available in-situ or take rental amounts from KUL to stay in rented houses outside the project site. The rented accommodation is identified and selected by slum families themselves and KUL reimburses the rental amount of INR 7000 per month/slum family, and a record pertaining to this maintained and updated on a regular basis. In addition to the available transit tenement buildings, KUL plans to temporarily use the permanent rehab buildings currently under construction phase as transit tenements such that more slum families can be relocated in-situ and the project schedule can be maintained stringently. As highlighted elsewhere, executing the project in time as committed to slum community and SRA is critical to the success of the Project and hence the options worked out by KUL for providing transit accommodation is a positive step forward.


31

3 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL REFERENCE FRAMEWORK

3.1 INTRODUCTION

This section highlights environmental and social regulations applicable to Project Nirvana. All the laws and regulations derive their origin from the constitution of the country. The constitution broadly covers the intent on protecting the environment as mentioned in the Article 48-A of the Constitution which states that the State shall endeavour to protect and improve the environment and to safeguard the forest and wild life of the country. At the same time, it shall be the fundamental duty of every citizen of India under Article 51-A (g) of the Constitution of India, to protect and improve the natural environment including forests, lakes, rivers and wild life, and to have compassion for living creatures. On the social front too the constitution broadly covers the protection of rights of individuals. The fundamental Right to Life is guaranteed under Article 21 that states “No person shall be deprived of his life or except according to the procedure established by law”. Article 21 has been used by the courts in a number of judgements, dealing with a range of social and environmental issues and has constantly progressed to include a number of rights, which interpret the “right to life”. Apart from that there are other legislations which are specifically aimed at protection of environment and rights of the individuals. However, the regulatory framework analysis is limited to specific laws and regulations having implications for the project, which is primarily a housing project. The section broadly focuses on: � Institutional Framework; � Environmental Laws, Regulations and Policy; � Social Laws, Regulations and Policy; � Applicable Permits – Licences, approvals and consents; � Applicable Standards.

3.2 INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK - ENFORCEMENT AGENCIES

3.2.1 Ministry of Environment and Forests

The Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), Government of India is responsible for the environment management at Union of India level. The specific functions of MoEF are as follows: � Environmental policy planning; � Effective implementation of legislation;


32

� Monitoring and control of pollution; � Environmental clearance for industrial and development projects; � Promotion of environmental education, training and awareness; and � Forest conservation, development, and wildlife protection. The MoEF is responsible for the implementation and enforcement of the Environment Protection Act, 1986, and Rules issued under the Act, including the EIA notification, 2006. Under sections 3 and 5 of the EP Act, 1986, it retains enormous powers to issue directions in the interests of environment protection. MoEF is the responsible agency to issue Environmental Clearance (EC) as per the EIA Notification. The environmental clearance process for new construction projects comprises of a maximum of 2 stages i.e. Screening and Appraisal. Screening:

This stage will entail the scrutiny of an application seeking prior environmental clearance made in Form 1 and Form 1A by the concerned State level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC) for determining whether or not the project or activity requires further environmental studies for preparation of an EIA for its appraisal prior to the grant of environmental clearance depending up on the nature and location specificity of the project. The projects requiring an Environmental Impact Assessment report shall be termed Category ‘B1’ and remaining projects shall be termed Category ‘B2’ and will not require an Environment Impact Assessment report. For categorization of projects into B1 or B2 except item 8 (b), the Ministry of Environment and Forests issue appropriate guidelines from time to time. All projects and activities listed as Category ‘B’ in Item 8 of the Schedule (Construction/Township/Commercial Complexes /Housing) shall not require scoping and will be appraised on the basis of Form 1/ Form 1A and the conceptual plan. Appraisal:

� Appraisal means the detailed scrutiny by the Expert Appraisal Committee or State Level Expert Appraisal Committee of the application and other documents like the Final EIA report, submitted by the applicant to the regulatory authority concerned for grant of environmental clearance. This appraisal shall be made by Expert Appraisal Committee or State Level Expert Appraisal Committee concerned in a transparent manner in a proceeding to which the applicant shall be invited for furnishing necessary clarifications in person or through an authorized representative. On conclusion of this proceeding, the Expert Appraisal Committee or State Level Expert Appraisal Committee concerned shall make categorical recommendations to the regulatory authority concerned either for grant of prior environmental clearance on stipulated terms and conditions, or rejection of the application for prior environmental clearance, together with reasons for the same.


33

� The appraisal of all projects or activities which are not required to undergo public consultation shall be carried out on the basis of the prescribed application Form 1 and Form 1A as applicable, any other relevant validated information available and the site visit wherever the same is considered as necessary by the Expert Appraisal Committee or State Level Expert Appraisal Committee concerned.

� The appraisal of an application be shall be completed by the Expert Appraisal Committee or State Level Expert Appraisal Committee concerned within sixty days of the receipt of the final Environment Impact Assessment report and other documents or the receipt of Form 1 and Form 1 A, where public consultation is not necessary and the recommendations of the Expert Appraisal Committee or State Level Expert Appraisal Committee shall be placed before the competent authority for a final decision within the next fifteen days.

3.2.2 Central Pollution Control Board

The Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) has been created for the control of water, air and noise pollution, land degradation and hazardous substances and waste management. The CPCB was established in September 1974, for the purpose of implementing provisions of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974. The executive responsibilities for the industrial pollution prevention and control are primarily executed by the CPCB at the Central level, which is a statutory body, attached to the MoEF. The specific functions of CPCB are as follows: � Prevent pollution of streams and wells; � Advise the Central Government on matters concerning prevention, control

and abatement of water and air pollution; � Co-ordinate the activities of SPCB’s and provide them with technical and

research assistance; � Establish and keep under review quality standards for surface and

groundwater and for air quality; � Planning and execution of national programme for the prevention, control

and abatement of pollution through the Water and Air Acts. CPCB is primarily an advisory body to MoEF and provides technical support to evolve standards and oversee that these are enforced adequately by respective State Pollution Control Boards.

3.2.3 Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB)

Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB) is implementing various environmental legislations in the state of Maharashtra, mainly including � Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, � Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981,


34

� Water (Cess) Act, 1977 and � some of the provisions under Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986 and the

rules framed there under like, Biomedical Waste (M&H) Rules, 1998, Hazardous Waste (M&H) Rules, 2000, Municipal Solid Waste Rules, 2000 etc.

MPCB is functioning under the administrative control of Environment Department of Government of Maharashtra. Some of the important functions of MPCB are: � To plan comprehensive program for the prevention, control or abatement

of pollution and secure executions thereof, � To collect and disseminate information relating to pollution and the

prevention, control or abatement thereof, � To inspect sewage or trade effluent treatment and disposal facilities, and

air pollution control systems and to review plans, specification or any other data relating to the treatment plants, disposal systems and air pollution control systems in connection with the consent granted

� Supporting and encouraging the developments in the fields of pollution control, waste recycle reuse, eco-friendly practices etc.

� To educate and guide the entrepreneurs in improving environment by suggesting appropriate pollution control technologies and techniques

� Creation of public awareness about the clean and healthy environment and attending the public complaints regarding pollution.

MPCB is responsible for implementing the Central Acts and Rules for pollution control and to monitor KUL’s compliance with the same.

3.2.4 Maharashtra State Level Impact Assessment Authority

Government of Maharashtra on 16th July, 2008 declares Maharashtra Pollution Control Board as the agency to act as Secretariat for the State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA), Maharashtra and the State Level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC), Maharashtra to provide all the required support. Thereafter, as per MoEF notification, 21st April 2008, Government of India in MoEF S.O. 898 (E) the Central Government, hereby, constitutes the SEAC, Maharashtra.

3.2.5 Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Company Limited

Maharashtra State Electricity Board was looking after Generation, Transmission & Distribution of Electricity in the State of Maharashtra barring Mumbai. But with enactment of Electricity Act 2003, MSEB was unbundled in to 3 Companies viz. Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Co. Ltd., Maharashtra State Power Generation Co. Ltd. and Maharashtra State Electricity Transmission Co. Ltd. on 6th June 2005. As per the EIA, the net power supply required for the proposed buildings is estimated to be around 17.4 MW based on this assumption that approximately 4 watt of power will be required per sq ft. The power will be made available from the Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Company Limited (MSEDCL). The client will put


35

up appropriate transformers in the proposed sub station as required by electricity providers and provide meter rooms for all the residential flats and utility operations.

3.2.6 Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation, (formerly Department of Explosives) Chief Controller of Explosives, Nagpur

Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation formerly known as Department of Explosives is under the Department of Industrial Policy & Promotion, Ministry of Commerce & Industry, and Government of India. The Chief Controller of Explosives, Nagpur heads the Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation and is responsible to deal with provisions of following rules: � The Explosive Act 1884 and Rules, 1983, � The Petroleum Act 1934 and the Rules 2002, � Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989, as

amended to date.

3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

3.3.1 Environmental Laws and Regulations

In India, there are many laws and regulations directly and indirectly governing environment. However the most important direct legislations relevant to this project are listed in Table 3.1.


36

Table 3.1 Applicable Environmental Laws and Regulations

S.No Issues Applicable Legislation Agency Responsible Applicable Permits and Requirement

Status

1 Protection and improvement of Natural Environmental Resources

Article 51-A Clause (g) of the & Directive Principles of State Policy (Article 47)

Every Citizen of India � Article 51-A of the Constitution of India states that it shall be the duty of every citizen of India to protect and improve the natural environment including forests, lakes, rivers and wildlife and to have compassion for all living creatures.

� Article 47 of the Constitution of India requires not only a Protectionist stance by the state but also compels the state to seek the improvement of polluted environments

Followed

2 Prevention and Control of Water Pollution

The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, amended in 1988

MPCB � Consent for Establishment � Consent to Operate � Compliance under the Act

� Obtained. As the project progresses, the client will apply for additional CTE from the appropriate regulatory agencies

3 Prevention and Control of Air Pollution

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, amended in 1987 and the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Rules 1982, as amended up to 18th Feb 1992.

MPCB � Consent for Establishment � Consent to Operate � Compliance under the Act

� Obtained. As the project progresses, the client will apply for additional CTE from the appropriate regulatory agencies

4 Water Cess Collection (a tax on water use and water pollution caused)

The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Cess Act 1977, been implemented in the state of Maharashtra with effect from 1st April 1983 and amended from 26th Jan 1992 and is further

MPCB � Filing of monthly returns as per prescribed format (Form I under the Act- Form I duly completed before 5th of next month showing water consumed in the previous month)

� Compliance under the Act

Yet to be obtained.


37


Status

amended w.e.f. 5/3/03. � 5 Environmental

Protection

The Environment (Protection) Act 1986, as amended in April 2003; EPA Rules 1986, as amended in 2002;

MPCB Ministry of Environment and Forests Central Pollution Control Board

� Compliance under the rules to maintain stipulated standards and environmental management through various supporting rules promulgated under the Act.

�

�

6 Environmental Protection – EIA related

a) Environmental Impact Assessment Notification 1994(for project initiated prior to 14 September 2006) b) Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, September 2006

Ministry of Environment and Forests through SEIAA, Maharashtra

� Requirement of Environmental Clearance

� Environmental Impact Assessment for environmental appraisal of a project by SEIAA, Maharashtra

EC for the construction of first phase has been obtained on 28th of February 2011 for construction of total built-up area of 1,43,734 m2 and which includes a free sale building of 54,493 m2 and rehabilitation buildings of 54,997 m2 . As the project progresses, the client will apply for additional EC in phases from the appropriate regulatory agencies. This is contingent to receipt of commencement certificate.

7. Felling of Trees Permission for felling of trees (non forest land), Revenue Act

Revenue Department � Number of Trees Felled to be enumerated under joint verification

Tree felling permit has been obtained.

8 Public Consultation Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, September 2006

MPCB � Projects exempted from public consultation and the public consultation procedure covered in EIA notification.

� Project undertook the Public Consultation process as suggested by MoEF.


38


Status

� All building/construction projects/area development projects and townships are exempt from public consultation and therefore the project would not require public consultation.

9 Noise Emissions The Noise (Regulation & Control) Rules, 2000 as amended in January 2010

MPCB � Compliance under the rules to maintain stipulated standards

� To be monitored.

10 Environmental statement

EPA Rules 1992 and 1993 - Environmental Statement

MPCB � Filing of annual environment Statement under prescribed format under Rule 14 by 30 September of every year

� To be monitored.

11 Hazardous material Storage Handling & Transport

Manufacture Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals 1989 and amendment Rules 2000 under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, and Rules framed there under

MPCB Central Pollution Control Board Ministry of Environment and Forests Chief Inspector of Factories District Collector, Chief Controller of Explosives.

� Identification of Major Accident Hazard under Rule 4

� Filing of Safety Report under Rule 10

� Preparation of Onsite and Offsite Emergency Control Plan under Rules 13 & 14

� Collection, Development and Dissemination of information including Do’s and Don’ts and labelling for hazardous substances handled onsite under Rule 17

� Notification of accident to authorities under Schedule 5 and Rules 2b and 3.

Construction Chemical usage like solvents, paints, oil, etc should be recorded and the MSDS need to be maintained.

12 Hazardous Wastes Management

Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008 and as amended in October, 2010

MPCB Central Pollution Control Board

� Authorisation for collection, reception, storage, transportation and disposal of hazardous wastes

� Filing of annual return under Form 4 to the rules

� Other compliance under the rules � Authorisation by Central Pollution

Control Boards to vendors accepting waste/used oil

� Yet to be obtained.


39


Status

� Labelling of vehicles carrying hazardous substances (Transport Emergency - TREM card as per Form 11).

� Liability of the occupier, transporter and operator of a facility:

� The occupier, transporter and operator of a facility shall be liable for damages caused to the environment resulting due to improper handling and disposal of hazardous waste listed in schedule 1, 2 and 3 to the Rules;

� The occupier and operator of a facility shall also be liable to reinstate or restore damaged or destroyed elements of the environment;

� The occupier and operator of a facility shall be liable to pay a fine as levied by the State Pollution Control Board with the approval of the Central Pollution Control Board for any violation of the provisions under these rules.

13 Medical & infected waste

The Bio-Medical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules 1998, as amended in September 2003;

MPCB � Authorisation as per form 1 under the Rule 8 for generation, collection, reception, storage, transportation, treatment and disposal and any other form of handling of bio-medical wastes

� Annual report as per Rule 10 � Other compliance including

reporting, labelling etc.

� The first aid centre at the construction site should maintain a waste register-during construction phase.

14 Regulation on Use of ODS

The Ozone Depleting Substances (Regulation)

Ministry of Environment and

� Regulation on consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances on

� Yet to be done during construction phase.


40


Status

Rules 2000, as amended through 26th September 2005;

Forests Director General of Foreign Trade Other relevant agencies like Small Industrial Development Organisation.

end use basis (Year 2010 for Group I, III, IV & V ODS; Year 2015 for Group VII and Year 2040 for Group VI);

� Annual reporting of ODS � Regulation on import/export

/sale/purchase of ODS � Regulation on manufacture, import

and export and sale of compressors 15 Safety and Other

related regulations The Gas Cylinders Rules 2004

Chief Inspector of Factories Chief Controller of Explosives

� Licence for possession of gas cylinders containing 100 kg of more of pressurised gas;

� Safe storage and Labelling of Gas cylinders

� Annual returns � Compliance under the rules

� Yet to be done during construction phase.

16 Storage of Petroleum products

The Petroleum Act 1934, as amended in August 197 The Petroleum Rules 1976, as amended in March 2002.

Chief Controller of Explosives

� Licence for possession of petroleum products (for Class A with flash point less than 23 ºC above 30 litres; Class B with flash point from 23 to 65ºC above 2500 litres; and Class C with flash point from 65 to 93ºC above 45000 litres)

� Provision of enclosure and safety measures for safe storage

� Labelling of vessels containing petroleum products;

� Compliance under the rules and as stipulated in the licence


17 Power Generation Electricity Act 2003, as amended in May 2007 and Electricity Rules 2005

State electricity department

� A prior certificate of power generation is required.


18 Slum Rehabilitation Policy 1995

Under section 37 (1-B) of the Maharashtra Regional And Town Planning Act 1966

Slum Rehabilitation Authority-Maharashtra

� To provide free houses to slum dwellers by using incentive development rights.

� Ongoing


41

3.4 APPLICABLE ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS

The Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) has also stipulated industry specific discharge of liquid effluents and general air emission standards. CPCB has also specified National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) for residential, commercial, industrial and sensitive zones for the country as a whole. Standards for ambient noise quality are also to be followed up depending upon land use of the area. The stipulated general wastewater discharge standards and general emission standards are to be followed together with specific requirements of MPCB. These standards limit the concentration and volumes of the effluents and emissions released to the atmosphere. These standards could be made more stringent by the MPCB based on the environmental sensitivity of a specific location. The environmental standards relevant for proposed facility (in this case housing project) would be as per Environment Protection Rules, 1986 and amendments. The standards can be stricter as per notifications by State Pollution Control Boards depending upon location and other sensitivities in the area of industrial emissions.

3.4.1 Emission Standards

Different emission standards are notified from time to time for different set of industries. In case of non-specific standards, General Emissions Standards are as given in the Table 3.2 .

Table 3.2 General Emission Standards

S.N. Parameter Standard mg/Nm3 1 Particulate matter (PM) 150 2 Carbon monoxide 1% max. (v/v) Source: Schedule VI Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986 General Emission Standards Part D: Concentration based standards

3.4.2 Ambient Air Quality

The national ambient air quality standards, as notified under Environment Protection Rules, 1986 and revised through Environment (Protection) Seventh Amendment Rules, 2009 is presented in the Table 3.3.

Table 3.3 National Ambient Air Quality Standards

Pollutant Time Weighted Avg

Concentration in Ambient Air

Industrial, Residential, Rural & Other Areas

Ecologically Sensitive Areas (notified by Central Government)

Sulphur dioxide (�g/m3) Annual Average*

50 20

24 Hours** 80 80


42

Pollutant Time Weighted Avg

Concentration in Ambient Air

Industrial, Residential, Rural & Other Areas

Ecologically Sensitive Areas (notified by Central Government)

Oxides of Nitrogen (�g/m3) Annual Average*

40 30

24 Hours** 80 80 Particulate matter (PM10) (�g/m3) Annual

Average* 60 60

24 Hours** 100 100 Particulate matter (PM2.5) (μg/m3) Annual

Average* 40 40

24 Hours** 60 60 Lead (Pb) (�g/m3) Annual

Average* 0.5 0.5

24 Hours** 1.0 1.0 Ammonia (�g/m3) Annual

Average* 100 100

24 Hours** 400 400 Carbon monoxide (CO) (�g/m3) 8 Hours 2000 2000 1 Hour** 4000 4000 Arsenic ((ng/m3) Annual

Average* 6 6

Nickel (ng/m3) Annual Average*

20 20

Benzene (�g/m3) Annual Average*

5 5

Benzo-�-pyrene particulate phase (ng/m3)

Annual Average*

1 1

NOTE * Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval. ** 24 hourly/8 hourly values should be met 98% of the time in a year. However 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on

two consecutive days.

As per the EHS guidelines of IFC of April 30, 2007, “the ambient air quality standards are ambient air quality levels established and published through National legislative and regulatory processes and ambient quality guidelines refer to ambient quality levels primarily developed through clinical, toxicological, and epidemiological evidence (such as those published by the World Health Organization)”. A reference to the ambient air quality guidelines of World Health Organization (WHO) is included in the following Table 3.4

Table 3.4 World Heath Organization - Ambient Air Quality Guidelines Parameter Averaging Period* Guideline Value (in μg/m3) Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) � 24 hr.

� 10 minute � 20 � 500

Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) � 1 year � 1 hour

� 40 � 200

Particulate Matter (PM10 ) � 1 year � 24 hour

� 20 � 50

Particulate Matter (PM 2.5 ) � 1 year � 24 hour

� 10 � 25

Ozone 8- our daily maximum � 100 * World Health Organization (WHO), Global Update, 2005. PM-24 hour value is the 99th Percentile. Source: IFC EHS Guidelines.


43

3.4.3 Ambient Noise Standards

As this is a residential project, the applicable noise standards to the project are 55 dBA and 45 dBA during day and night time respectively. Ambient noise standards are to be maintained as land use of an area as specified in Table 3.5.

Table 3.5 Ambient Noise Standards

Area Code Category of Area Limits in dB(A) Leq Day time* Night Time A Industrial Area 75 70 B Commercial Area 65 55 C Residential Area 55 45 D Silence Zone** 50 40 Note:*Day time is from 6 am to 10 pm, Night time is10.00 pm to 6.00 am;**Silence zone is defined as area up to 100 meters around premises of hospitals, educational institutions and courts. Use of vehicle horns, loud speakers and bursting of crackers are banned in these zones.

As per the IFC’s EHS guidelines( April 30, 2007), noise impacts should not exceed the levels presented in Table 3.6 below, or result in a maximum increase in background levels of 3 dB at the nearest receptor location off-site

Table 3.6 Noise Level Guidelines for Ambient Noise

One hour Leq (dBA)* Receptor Day time (07:00 to 22:00) Night time (22:00 to 07:00) Residential, Institutional, educational 55 45 *Guideline values are for noise levels measured out of doors. Source: Guidelines for Community Noise, World Health Organization (WHO), 1999

3.4.4 Noise Standards for Occupational Exposure

The proposed project will take utmost care in minimising noise. Where unavoidable, occupational noise exposure as stipulated in the Factory Rules, for workers within the project site will have to be ensured as per the Table 3.7

Table 3.7 Standards for Occupational Noise Exposure

Total Time of Exposure per Day in Hours (Continuous or Short term Exposure)

Sound Pressure Level in dB(A)

8 85 6 92 4 95 3 97 2 100

3/2 102 1 105 ¾ 107 ½ 110 ¼ 115

Never >115 Note:

� No exposure in excess of 115 dB A) is to be permitted. � For any period of exposure falling in between any figure and the next higher or lower figure as indicated in column (1), the

permissible level is to be determined by extrapolation on a proportionate scale. � The above standards are as per Factories Act, 1948


44

As per the IFC EHS Guidelines, no employee should be exposed to a noise level greater than 85 dB(A) for a duration of more than 8 hours per day without hearing protection. In addition, no unprotected ear should be exposed to a peak sound pressure level (instantaneous) of more than 140 dB(C). For every 3 dB(A) increase in sound levels, the ‘allowed’ exposure period or duration should be reduced by 50 percent (1) .

3.4.5 General Standards for Discharge of Effluents

The general standards for discharge are as prescribed under the Environment Protection Rules, 1986 and amendments. The project intends to treat the domestic waste water in STP and re-use the treated wastewater for gardening, flushing and HVAC purposes and thus, aims at Zero wastewater discharge from the project site, therefore the incremental pollution load will be minimum due to waste water.

Table 3.8 General Standards for Discharge of Environmental Pollutants

S N Parameter Standards Inland surface

water Public sewers Land for

Irrigation 1. Colour and odour Refer to Note 1 - Refer to Note 1 2 Suspended solids mg/l, max. 100 600 200 3 Particle size of suspended solids Shall 850 micron

IS sieve - -

4 pH 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0 5.5 to 9.0 5 Temperature Shall not exceed

50 C above the receiving water temperature

- -

6 Oil and grease, mg/l max, 10 20 10 7 Total residual chlorine, mg/l

max 1.0 - -

8 Ammoniacal nitrogen (as N), mg/l max.

50 50 -

9 Total Kjeldahl nitrogen (as N); mg/l max

100 - -

10 Free ammonia (as NH3), mg/l max

5.0 - -

11 Biochemical oxygen demand (3 days at 270 C), mg/l max

30 350 100

12 Chemical oxygen demand, mg/l max

250 - -

13 Arsenic (as As) mg/l, max 0.2 0.2 0.2 14 Mercury (As Hg) mg/l max. 0.01 0.01 - 15 Lead (as Pb) mg/l, max 0.1 1.0 - 16 Cadmium (as Cd) mg/l, max 2.0 1.0 - 17 Hexavalent chromium (as Cr +6)

mg/1 max 0.1 2.0 -

18 Total chromium (as Cr) mg/1 max

2.0 2.0 -

19 Copper (as Cu) mg/1, max 3.0 3.0 -

(1) The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 2006


45

S N Parameter Standards Inland surface

water Public sewers Land for

Irrigation 20 Zinc (as Zn) 5.0 15 - 21 Selenium (as Se) 0.05 0.05 - 22 Nickel (as Ni) mg/1,max 3.0 3.0 - 23 Cyanide (as CN) mg/1,max 0.2 2.0 0.2 24 Fluoride (as F) mg/1,max 2.0 15 - 25 Dissolved phosphates (as P)

mg/1,max 5.0 - -

26 Sulphide (as S) mg/1,max 2.0 - - 27 Phenolic compounds (as

C6H5OH) mg/1,max 1.0 5.0 -

28 Radioactive materials: (a) Alpha emitters micro curie mg/1,max (b) Beta emitters micro curie mg/1

10-7

10-6

10-7

10-6

10-8

10--7 29 Bio-assay test 90% survival of

fish after 96 hours in 100% effluent

90% survival of fish after 96 hours in 100% effluent

90% survival of fish after 96 hours in 100% effluent

30 Manganese 2 mg/1 2 mg/1 - 31 Iron (as Fe) 3mg/1 3mg/1 - 32 Vanadium (as V) 0.2 mg/1 0.2 mg/1 - 33 Nitrate Nitrogen 10 mg/1 - - Note: * as per annexure 6 of the General Standards

3.4.6 Hazardous Waste Management

The Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008 are promulgated under Environment (Protection) Act 1986, which was further amended in July 2009, September 2009, March 2010 and August 2010. The rules define hazardous wastes to be any waste which by reason of any of its physical, chemical, reactive, toxic, flammable, explosive or corrosive characteristics causes danger or is likely to cause danger to health or environment, whether alone or when in contact with other wastes or substances, and will include any of hazardous processes generating wastes (as listed in Schedules 1) or concentration of hazardous contents in such wastes (as listed in Schedule 2) or import or export of hazardous wastes (as listed in Schedule 3). Import and export norms for the hazardous wastes have been provided in conformance with the Basel Convention, to which India is a signatory. With the recent amendment, these rules have become quite comprehensive. The rules define responsibility of hazardous wastes generators, require safe handling practices and maintenance of manifest system during transport of hazardous waste and also describe technological aspects to be followed up by re-refiners and recyclers of hazardous wastes. The rules also cover liabilities of occupier, transporter and operator of a facility for any damages caused due to improper handling and disposal of hazardous wastes by reinstating or restoring environmental damages caused.


46

The categories of wastes as applicable to proposed project operation and as covered under Schedule 1 to the Rules include Used Oil and construction wastes required during building construction.

3.5 REGULATIONS RELATED TO SLUM AND BUILDINGS CONSTRUCTION

A Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework including the definition of eligibility from the standpoint of SRA; and the company project level entitlement policy (e.g. going beyond 1995 cut-off) The regulatory review for the project is being done on the premise that the land for the SRA site was always in the ownership of the project proponent by virtue of lease and was a private land (Please refer to project description section for detailed ownership of the land). However, it was brought under SRA, under the SRS of PCMC. Hence the applicability of the various regulations for the project needs to consider the premise of ownership for the project. Also, it is important to assess the understanding of the slums in the country. The definition of the slums as per Census of India and National Sample survey organisation is being detailed below: Census of India The Census of India, has adopted the definition of slums specified/declared “slums” through State/UT or local government under any act. In additions it also consider the following area as slum : “A compact area of at least 300 population or about 60-70 households of poorly built congested tenements, in unhygienic environment usually with inadequate infrastructure and lacking in proper sanitary and drinking water facilities”. National Sample Survey Organization (58th Round) “A compact settlement with a collection of poorly built tenements, mostly of temporary nature, crowded together usually with inadequate sanitary and drinking water facilities in unhygienic conditions. Such an area, for the purpose of this survey, was considered as “non-notified slum” if at least 20 households lived in that area. Areas notified as slums by the respective municipalities, corporations, local bodies or development authorities are treated as “notified slums”. Possible land tenure system in Indian Slums fall in the categories mentioned in Table 3.9

Table 3.9 Form of Tenure in Slums

Sl.No Forms of tenure Characteristics 1 Freehold (Individual) Ownership in Perpetuity 2 Delayed Freehold

(Individual)

Conditional Ownership. Title is granted on completion of payments or when developments have been completed.


47

Sl.No Forms of tenure Characteristics 3 Registered Leasehold

(individual or community based)

The right to hold or use property for a fixed period at a given price, without transfer of ownership, on the basis of a lease contract. Leasehold is a fixed asset. The Ownership for specified period.

4 Co-operative ownership Ownership is vested in the co-operative or group of which residents are co-owner

5 Public Rental Rental Occupation of publicly owned land or house 6 Private Rental Rental of privately owned land or property 7 Shared equity Combination of delayed freehold and rental in which

residents purchase a stake in their property (often 50%) and pay rent on the remainder to the other stakeholder

8 Community based tenure This can take several forms for eg. Rental by a community of generally private land for an agreed period. At the end of the period, the community an extension may be agreed of the community is given notice to leave within a agreed period. Other options include Community Area Permits, Community Lease, or community ownership.

9 Religious Tenure Systems (e.g. Islamic)

4main categories within Islamic Societies “Waqf”, ‘ Mulk’, ‘Min’ ‘ Tassuruf’ or usufruct rights, is increasingly common whilst “musha/mushtarak”, is collective/tribal ownership

10 Encroachments on public land

Squatting on public land, prone to eviction as there is no security of tenure but government may relocate.

11 Encroachment on private land

Squatting on private land, prone to forced eviction, the land-owner reserves the land rights.

12 Pavement Dwellers Temporary Encroachment, government/private agencies keep removing them time to time

Source: Risbud N (2010), Typology of Slums and Land Tenure in Indian Cities, Presentation made at National Workshop on Land Tenure Issues in Slum Free Planning, Centre of Urban Equity, CEPT University, Ahmadabad, India.

The laws and regulations relating to housing sector in India have not seen phenomenal changes over the years. More so with the rise of the slums in the cities some of the states have made acts to deal with the issue of slums in the cities. Maharashtra is one of the states, which on account of having limited avenues for expansion at the core, has seen proliferation of slums inside the city, also because the city grew over a period of time taking these slums in its fold, in some cases presently termed as prime areas of the city. With the requirement for affordable housing for the people living in slums and the opportunity cost for area covered by these horizontal slums led to evolution of schemes like SRS. The section tries to capture the laws the regulations which will be applicable for slums and in particular to SRS in Pune in Maharashtra.

3.5.1 MRTP Act, 1966: for preparation of Development Plans to designate land for public purposes

(As Modified up to the 31st December 2005): While this Act does not explicitly mention the urban poor / slum dwellers, it deals with a number of planning issues related to the allocation and use of land for development that could affect them. Some key provisions under the Act are as follows:


48

� Town Planning Schemes are covered under Chapter 5(a): Making of Town Planning Schemes.

� The Sections 59 – 71 of the Act deal with (among other aspects) the preparation and contents of town planning scheme, the power of the planning authority, and the role of the state government in sanctioning the scheme.

� Section 59(1) (a) states that “Subject to the provisions of this act or any other law for the time being in force, a Model Inclusive Zoning & planning authority may for the purpose of implementing the proposals in the final development plan, prepare one or more town planning schemes for the area within its jurisdiction, or any part thereof.”

� Section 125 of this Act states that: “Any land required, reserved or designated in a Regional Plan, a Development or any other plan or town planning scheme, for a public purpose or purposes including plans for any area of comprehensive development or for any new town shall be deemed to be land needed for a public purpose within the meaning of the Land Acquisition Act 1894.”

3.5.2 Maharashtra Slum Areas (Improvement, Clearance & Redevelopment) Act,

1971

The main tenets of the act are: � The District Collector is a competent authority to declare an area as a

slum. � Slum definitions are ambiguous & are subject to interpretation. Slums

are declared & notified by the Housing Department, Government of Maharashtra based on the approval & report containing surveyed data of respective cities received from Additional Collector.

The SRA is primarily an offshoot of this act and draws primarily from this act. Defining Slum The act as per Section 26 (1) describes the process of identifying areas for slum improvement. The aforementioned action states that “26. (1) Where the Board upon report of any of its officers or other information is satisfied that any area is or may be a source of danger to the health, safety or convenience of the public of that area or of its neighbourhood by reason of the area having inadequate or no basic amenities, or being insanitary squalid, overcrowded or otherwise, it shall cause such area to be defined in a map and then it shall by an order published in the Official Gazette declare such area to be a slum improvement area. However, the powers of declaring slums over the years have been vested with the local administration, i.e SRA or other such body at the local level. Establishment of Panchayats for slum Improvement The act keeps the provision of establishment of Panchayats in slum improvement areas.


49

Under SRA schemes, this has been taken forward with the formation of the cooperatives to be registered under the Maharashtra Cooperative Societies Act, 1960.

3.5.3 Development Control (DC) Rules for Pimpri-Chingchwad Municipal Corporation, Pimpri 1985

Development Control Rules for Pimpri-Chingchwad Municipal Corporation, Pimpri 1985, details out the requirement for building activity and development work in the Pimpri-Chinchwad Municipal Corporation area. These rules supersede all Development Control Rules and bye-laws framed and Sanctioned under the Maharashtra Regional and Town Planning Act, 1966 the Bombay Provincial Municipal Corporation Act 1949. However, these rules are not applicable to the lands acquired for Pimpri-Chinchwad New Town Development Authority. The DC regulation for PCMC gives the details on the following aspects:

� Applicability of the Development Control Rules � Building Permission/Commencement Certificate Required � Procedure for obtaining Building Permission/Commencement

Certificate � Procedure during construction � General building requirement � Structural safety and services

In case anything related to the building construction or slum redevelopment is not properly addressed or any other matter not detailed in Special regulations for Pune and Pimpri Chinchwad Slum rehabilitation authority, Pune, Development Control (DC) Rules for Pimpri-Chingchwad Municipal Corporation, shall be applicable along with the subsequent modifications.

3.5.4 The Maharashtra Cooperative Societies Act, 1960

The Act provides for the orderly development of the co-operative movement in the State of Maharashtra in accordance with the relevant directive principles of State policy enunciated in the Constitution of India. All the cooperative societies related to housing, agriculture, dairying etc. are registered under this act. This act lays down the requirement for the registration of societies in the state of Maharashtra. The main tenets covered under the act are as follows:

� Requirements for registration of societies � Members and their rights and liabilities � Incorporation duties and privileges of societies � State aid to societies � Property and funds of societies � Management of societies including power and functions


50

The society of the hutment dwellers to be formed for implementation of SRS needs to be registered under this act and will abide by this act and the modifications.

3.5.5 Special Regulations for Pune and Pimpri Chinchwad, Slum Rehabilitation Authority

SRS in all the cities of Maharashtra is guided by the SRA act. However the SRS schemes of the various cities have maintained their own regulations, as per the needs of the various cities. SRS regulations for Mumbai continue to dominate the scene with early beginning and the immenseness of the issues that it had to address due to specificity of the slums in various parts of Mumbai. The SRA regulations for Mumbai were further followed by important notifications and guidelines especially in relation to Dharavi and other slums which hovered around the Mumbai coast, especially because of the implications of the Coastal Zone regulations. The SRS Pune regulation was also based on SRS Mumbai, however it was separate. The notification is likely to undergo changes with local administration bringing out a draft and requesting comments and suggestions on the same. However, the same has not been implemented till date.

Box 3.1 Main features of the Pune SRS Scheme.

� Every slum structure existing prior to 01/01/1995 is treated as protected structure. � Every slum dweller whose name appears in the electoral rolls as on 01/01/1995 and who

continues to stay in the slum is eligible for rehabilitation. � Every eligible residential slum structure is provided with an alternative tenement

admeasuring 25.00 sq. mt. preferably at the same site, irrespective of the area of slum structure.

� Every eligible slum structure that is being used for commercial purposes is granted an alternative tenement having area equal to the structure subject to an upper limit of 25.00 sq. mt.

� A minimum of 70% of eligible slum dwellers in a slum pocket come together to form a co-operative housing society for implementation of Slum Rehabilitation Scheme. (SRS)

� The slum dwellers appoint a developer for execution of SRS. � The developer puts in resources in the form of money, men and material for construction of

free houses for the slum dwellers. � The developer is compensated for his efforts in the form of free sale component. � The developers are allowed to construct tenements for sale in the open market. The area

allowed for sale in the open market is equal to the area of tenements constructed for Rehabilitation of slum dwellers.

� Floor Space Index (known as FAR elsewhere) upto 2.5 is allowed for SRS. � The developer is required to construct the rehabilitation tenements on the plot itself. The

balance FSI left is allowed for construction of free sale tenements. � The spill over entitlement to the developer is permissible for sale in the form of transferable

development right in the open market. These transferable rights can be utilised on other non slum pockets subject to the provisions of DC. Regulations.

� Slum Rehabilitation Authority is designated as a local planning authority to provide all the requisite approvals for SRS under one roof. The authority is mandated to act as a facilitating agency for implementation of SRS.

� Along with the free rehabilitation tenements the developers also have to provide space for amenities like a creche (Balwadi), society office, welfare centre


51

3.6 LABOUR RELATED REGULATIONS

The project will involve a main PMC contractor and its sub contractors. Typically the contractors employ the labour for the project and are responsible to ensure they are meeting the labour regulations. However, as the principal; employer, KUL is liable for any non-conformances or compliance. There are several laws and rules that govern labour issues in India. The issues covered include:

3.6.1 Child Labour

The Constitution of India (Part III, Article 24 - Fundamental Rights) describes that no child below the age of fourteen years shall be employed to work in any factory or engaged in any other hazardous employment

3.6.2 The Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986

As per the Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986, a child is defined as a person who has not completed 14years of age. The Act prohibits employment of children in certain occupation and processes (part II, Section 3). The Act also specifies conditions of work for children, if permitted to work. These include a working day of maximum of 6 hours a day (including rest), no work period exceeding 3 hours at a stretch, and no overtime (Section 7). The Act requires maintenance of a register for employed children (Section 11).

3.6.3 Forced Labour

Constitution of India (Part III, Fundamental Rights No 23): Right against Exploitation The Bonded Labour (Abolition) Act 1976: States that all forms of bonded labour stands abolished and every bonded labourer stands freed and discharged from any obligations to render any bonded labour (Ch II, Section 4)

3.6.4 Freedom of Association

The Trade Union Act, 1926: Provides procedures for formation and registration of Trade Unions and lists their rights and liabilities. It encompasses any combination, permanent or temporary, that gets formed to regulate relationship between workmen and their employers.

3.6.5 Wages

Minimum Wages Act, 1948 requires the Government to fix minimum rates of wages and reviews this at an interval of not more than 5 years. The Payment of Wages Act, 1936, amended in 2005. Every employer shall be responsible for


52

the payment to persons employed by him of all wages required to be paid under this Act. As per the Equal Remuneration Act 1976, it is the duty of an employer to pay equal remuneration to men and women workers for same work or work of a similar nature.

3.6.6 Compensation

Workmen's Compensation Act, 1923 requires if personal injury is caused to a workman by accident arising out of and in the course of his employment, his employer shall be liable to pay compensation in accordance with the provisions of this Act.

3.6.7 Welfare and working conditions

As per the Maternity Benefit Act, 1961 no employer shall knowingly employ a woman in any establishment during the six weeks immediately following the day of her delivery or her miscarriage. No pregnant woman shall, on a request being made by her in this behalf, be required by her employer to do during the period any work which is of an arduous nature or which involves long hours of standing, or which in any way is likely to interfere with her pregnancy or the normal development of the foetus, or is likely to cause her miscarriage or otherwise to adversely affect her health.

3.6.8 The Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act, 1970 and Rules

As per the contract labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act, 1970 and Rules, every principle employer is required to get the establishment registered before employing any contract labour. The contractors are also required to provide at minimum amenities like canteen, urinals, restrooms or alternate accommodation (if night halting labour), first aid, safe drinking water, etc. in case of contractor’s failure to provide these amenities, the principle employer is liable to provide such amenities at its cost. The key one is building and other construction workers legislation. It sets the standards for construction workers and labour camps.

3.6.9 Other Legislations

Other labour related legislations applicable for the Project include the following: � The E.P.F. and Miscellaneous Provisions act, 1952 � Payment of Bonus Act, 1965 and Amendment Act No.43 of 1977 and No.48 of

1978 and amendments � Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 � Public Provident Fund Act, 1968 � ESI Act , 1948 (Employees State Insurance Act, 1948) � Employer's Liability Act, 1938 (as amended). � The Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946 (as amended).


53

� The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 (as amended). � The Personal Injuries (Compensation Insurance) Act, 1963 (as amended). � Factories Act 1948. � Shops and Establishment Act � Interstate Migrant Workers Act 1979 � Building and Other Construction Workers Act 1996

Rules include: � Industrial Disputes (Central) Rules, 1957 � Minimum Wages (Central) Rules, 1950 � Payment of Bonus Rules, 1975 � The Personal Injuries (Compensation Insurance) Rules � Standing Orders Rules 1946.

3.7 ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURAL HERITAGE RELATED REGULATIONS

These regulations are important not only from the perspective of saving ancient archaeological findings, but also from the perspective of social, religious or sentimental value it may possess for the various communities. It is important, that in case such findings are reported, identified, and conserved not only for academic purposes but also for the importance they may have for certain communities.

3.7.1 Indian Treasure Trove Act, 1878 (as modified upto September 1949)

The act defines ‘treasure’ as anything of any value, hidden in soil or anything affixed to soil and treasure handing over procedure. As per section 4 of the said act, whenever any treasure exceeding in amount or value ten rupees is found, the finder shall, as soon as practicable, give to the Collector notice in writing— (a) Of the nature and amount or approximate value of such treasure; (b) Of the place in which it was found; (c) Of the date of the finding: and either deposit the treasure in the nearest Government Treasury, or give the Collector such security as the Collector thinks fit, to produce the treasure at such time and place as be may from time to time require

3.7.2 The Antiquities and Art Treasures Act, 1972

This is an act which regulates trade in ‘antiquities’ and ‘art treasures’, and provides for prevention of smuggling and fraudulent dealing in antiquities and art treasures. Both of above regulations will be applicable to KUL, in case it undertakes the construction of the project and comes across any artefact of archaeological importance during any excavation or earth work.


54

3.8 CONSULTATION AND DISCLOSURE RELATED LEGISLATIONS

Right to Information Act, 2005

The Right to Information1 Act applies to the whole of India (except the State of Jammu and Kashmir). The Act includes the right to: � Inspects works, documents, records; � Take notes, extracts or certified copies of documents or records; � Take certified samples of materials; and � Obtain information in the form of printouts, diskettes, floppies, tapes, video

cassettes or in any other electronic mode. The Act does not include information including commercial confidence, trade secrets or intellectual property, the disclosure of which would harm the competitive position of a third party, unless the competent authority is satisfied that larger public interest warrants the disclosure of such information. RTI act covers only govt institutions and departments. A company, shop or establishment is not obliged to give out information under this regulation However, there is an indirect implication in case a citizen wants to get information about any aspect of the project, s/he may approach the relevant govt official through a process outlined in the above regulation. The govt official/department may then seek the same information from company, shop or establishment if required. As a good practice, KUL should pre-empt such scenarios and be as transparent as possible and engage with the local community through appropriate and timely disclosure of relevant information, having procedures in place to receive and respond to community interest, information request, grievances and concerns and through CSR or other activities.

The SRA disclosure process

Stakeholder engagement and regular public consultations are also in-built into the SRA Guidelines. These responsibilities are shared by the Builder and the SRA as follows: � Disclosure requirements of (a) Letter of Intent with the Builder and Society

Members; Intimation and Notice of the SRA Annexure II Survey; and Results of the SRA Annexure II Survey;

� Compulsory Consent of at least 70% of the tenement owners/occupiers to the builder’s development proposal;

� Verification of the cooperative housing society by the SRA through a public meeting and subsequently a public hearing for general community grievances; and

(1) 1 ‘Information’ means any material in any form including records, documents, memos, e-mails, opinions, advice,

press releases, circulars, orders, logbooks, contracts, reports and papers, samples, models, data material held in any electronic form and information relating to any private body which can be accessed by public authority under any other law for the time being in force but does not include ‘file notings’.


55

� The SRA expects the builder to keep the community informed at intervals as desired by the society on the project details, schedules etc.

The EIA public Consultation and Disclosure process

As per the EIA Notification, 2006 “Public Consultation” refers to the process by which the concerns of local affected persons and others who have plausible stake in the environmental impacts of the project or activity are ascertained with a view to taking into account all the material concerns in the project or activity design as appropriate. The categories of projects requiring public consultation is given in the EIA notification. The Public Consultation consists of carrying out a public hearing at the site or in its close proximity (district wise) for ascertaining concerns of local affected persons in a manner as prescribed in the notification and to obtain responses in writing from other concerned persons having a plausible stake in the environmental aspects of the project or activity. The public hearing is required to be conducted by the State Pollution Control Board (SPCB) or the Union territory Pollution Control Committee (UTPCC) concerned in the specified manner and the proceedings are required to be forwarded to the regulatory authority concerned (MoEF/SEIAA). For obtaining responses in writing from other concerned persons having a plausible stake in the environmental aspects of the project or activity, the concerned regulatory authority and the State Pollution Control Board (SPCB) or the Union territory Pollution Control Committee (UTPCC) invites responses from such concerned persons by placing on their website the summary EIA report prepared by the applicant.

3.9 IFC PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

The Performance Standards (PS) established by IFC stipulates that the project shall meet certain requirements throughout the life cycle of an investment by IFC or other relevant financial institution, who are signatory to the Equator Principles, 2006.

3.9.1 Brief on IFC Performance Standards

A brief description of the Performance standards is provided in Table 3.10

Table 3.10 IFC Performance Standards

Performance Standards Specific Areas Performance Standard 1: Social and Environmental Assessment and Management

System Performance Standard 2 Labour and Working Conditions Performance Standard 3 Pollution Prevention and Abatement Performance Standard 4 Community Health, Safety and Security Performance Standard 5 Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement


56

Performance Standards Specific Areas Performance Standard 6 Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Natural Resource

Management Performance Standard 7 Indigenous Peoples Performance Standard 8 Cultural Heritage

The PS 1 establishes the importance of: � Integrated assessment to identify the social and environmental impacts, risks,

and opportunities of a project; � Effective community engagement through disclosure of project-related

information and consultation with local communities on matters that directly affect them ; and

� The project proponents’ management of social and environmental performance throughout the life of the Project.

The potential social and environmental impacts that require particular attentions with the relevant social and environment risks and impacts assessed are described throughout PS 2 through 8. They establish requirements to avoid, reduce, mitigate or compensate for impacts on people and the environment, and to improve conditions where appropriate. These performance standards and guidelines provide ways and means to identify impacts and affected stakeholders and lay down processes for management and mitigation of adverse impacts. A brief on the requirements as laid down in the performance standards is described in the following subsections. More detail on the applicability of the Performance Standards is discussed in Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) in Section 8 of this ESIA report.

3.9.2 Major Tenets of IFC Performance Standards

This sub section tries to provide the requirements of the specific PS, so as to set up the context for matching the requirements of these PS during the various stages of the life cycle of the housing project. PS 1: Social and Environmental Management Principles

The PS-1 requires Social and Environmental Assessment and Management Systems for managing social and environmental performance throughout the life cycle of this Project and runs through all subsequent PSs. The main elements of PS - 1 include: � A Social and Environmental Assessment to understand the social and

environmental impacts and risks; � A Management Program for mitigating the impacts and minimizing the risks

identified in the assessment; � Establishing and ensuring organizational capacity and requisite trainings to the

staff to implement the Management Programme; � Engagement with the community to ensure free prior informed consultation

(FPIC), community grievance redress constructive relationship all through the project life cycle; and


57

� Adequate monitoring and reporting systems to measure and report the effectiveness of the Management Programs.

The social and environmental performance is a continuous process to be initiated by the management and would involve communication between organisation, its workers and local communities directly affected by the Project. The PS requires that Project proponent initiate regular assessment of the potential social and environmental risks and impacts and consistently tries to mitigate and manage strategy on an ongoing basis. PS 2: Labour and Working Conditions

The economic growth through employment creation and income generation is recognised and balanced protecting the basic rights of workers. The PS 2 is guided by the various conventions of International Labour Organization (ILO) and outlines the minimum requirements of working conditions, protection to the workforce (including issues of child and forced labour) and ensuring occupational health and safety of both its ‘employees’ as well as ‘non employees’ working through contractors. The PS requires: � Establishment of a sound worker-management relationship; � Encouraging equal opportunity and fair treatment of workers; � Promoting compliance with national labour and employment laws; and � Promoting healthy and safe working conditions for workers.

PS 2 requires KUL to conduct its activities in a manner consistent with the four core labour standards (child labour, forced labour, non discrimination, and freedom of association and collective bargaining). In addition, PS 2 also addresses other areas such as working conditions and terms of employment, retrenchment, and occupational health and safety issues. Some of these requirements refer to the applicable national law. Whereas national law establishes standards that are less stringent than those in PS 2, or are silent, KUL is expected to meet the requirements of PS 2. PS 3: Pollution Prevention and Abatement

The PS 3 outlines approach to pollution prevention and abatement in line with internationally disseminated technologies and practices with objectives to a) avoid or minimize adverse impacts on human health and the environment by avoiding or minimizing pollution from activities; and b) promote the reduction of emissions that contribute to climate change. The PS 3 requires a project to avoid, minimize, or reduce adverse impacts on human health and environment by adopting pollution preventive and control technologies throughout the Project life cycle. PS 3 outlines a project approach to Pollution Prevention and Abatement (PPA) in line with internationally disseminated technologies and practices. It describes the measures to take into account the potential impact of emissions on the ambient conditions (such as ambient air quality) and seek to avoid or


58

minimise these impacts within the context of the nature and significance of pollutants emitted. PS 4: Community, Health, Safety and Security

The PS 4 concentrates on the responsibility that must be undertaken by the client to avoid or minimize the risks and impacts to the community’s health, safety and security that may arise from project activities. The PS 4 requires a project to evaluate risks and impacts to the health and safety of the affected community during the Project life cycle and establish measures to avoid minimize and reduce risks and impacts from the Project. PS 4 recognises that project activities, equipment, and infrastructure often bring benefits to communities including employment, services, and opportunities for economic development. However, projects can also increase the potential for community exposure to risks and impacts arising from equipment accidents, structural failures, and releases of hazardous materials. The performance standard details out KUL’s responsibility to avoid or minimise the possible risks and impacts to community health, safety and security that may arise from project activities. PS 5: Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement

The objectives of this PS are to: � Avoid or at least minimize the involuntary resettlement wherever feasible by

exploring alternative project designs; � Mitigate adverse social and economic impacts from land acquisition or restrictions

on affected persons’ use of land by: � Providing compensation for loss of assets at replacement cost; and � Ensuring that resettlement activities are implemented with appropriate disclosure

of information, consultation, and the informed participation of those affected. � Improve or at least restore the livelihoods and standards of living of displaced

persons; � Improve living conditions among displaced persons through provision of

adequate housing with security of tenure at resettlement sites. The PS 5 requires a project to consider various processes and systems to avoid /minimise social and economic impacts related to land acquisition and resettlement. This PS applies to physical or economic displacement resulting from the following types of land transactions: � Type I: Land rights for a private sector project acquired through expropriation or

other compulsory procedures. � Type II: Land rights for a private sector project acquired through negotiated

settlements with property owners or those with legal rights to land, including customary or traditional rights recognised or recognisable under the laws of the


59

country, if expropriation or other compulsory process would have resulted upon the failure of negotiation.

� This PS does not apply to resettlement resulting from voluntary land transactions (i.e., market transactions in which the seller is not obliged to sell and the buyer cannot resort to expropriation or other compulsory procedures if negotiations fail). The impacts arising from such transactions shall be dealt with as under PS1, though sometimes, when risks are identified, the project proponent may decide to adhere to PS 5 requirements even in willing buyer-seller cases.

PS 6: Biodiversity Conservation & Sustainable Natural Resource Management

The PS 6 aims at protecting and conserving biodiversity, the variety of life in all its forms, including genetic, species and ecosystem diversity and its ability to change and evolve, is fundamental to sustainable development. The components of biodiversity, as defined in the Convention on Biological Diversity, include ecosystems and habitats, species and communities, and genes and genomes, all of which have social, economic, cultural and scientific importance. This PS addresses how clients can avoid or mitigate threats to biodiversity arising from their operations as well as incorporate sustainable management of renewable natural resources. PS 6 recognises that protecting and conserving biodiversity—the variety of life in all its forms, including genetic, species and ecosystem diversity—and its ability to change and evolve, is fundamental to sustainable development. It reflects the objectives of the Convention on Biological Diversity to conserve biological diversity and promote use of renewable natural resources in a sustainable manner. PS 7: Indigenous Peoples

The PS 7 acknowledges the possibility of vulnerability of indigenous people owing to their culture, beliefs, institutions and living standards, and that it may further get compromised by one or other project activity throughout the life cycle of the project. The PS underlines the requirement of avoiding / minimizing adverse impacts on indigenous people in the project area, respecting the local culture and customs, fostering good relationship and ensuring that development benefits are provided to improve their standard of living and livelihoods. PS 7 recognises that Indigenous Peoples, as social groups with identities that are distinct from dominant groups in national societies, are often among the most marginalised and vulnerable segments of the population. The term “indigenous people” is more clearly defined in the IFC Guidance Note for PS 7. Objectives of PS 7 underscore the need to avoid adverse project impacts on Indigenous Peoples’ communities living in the project’s area of influence, or where avoidance is not feasible, to minimise, mitigate or compensate for such impacts through mechanisms that are tailored to their specific cultural


60

characteristics and expressed needs of the Indigenous Peoples, in a manner commensurate with the scale of project risks and impacts. PS 8: Cultural Heritage

The PS 8 aims to protect the irreplaceable cultural heritage and to guide clients on protecting cultural heritage in the course of their business operations. In addition, the requirements of this Performance Standard on a project’s use of cultural heritage are based in part on standards set by the Convention on Biological Diversity. PS 8 recognises the importance of cultural heritage with an objective to: � Protect cultural heritage from the adverse impacts of project activities; � Support its preservation; and � Promote the equitable sharing of benefits from the use of cultural heritage in

business activities. The PS requires the KUL to comply with relevant national law on the protection of cultural heritage, including national law implementing the host country’s obligations under the Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and Natural Heritage and other relevant international law. Note: PS 6, 7, and 8 are not envisaged primarily due to the location and the social profile of the people living in the proposed project area.

3.9.3 Categorization of Projects

As part of its review of a project’s expected social and environmental impacts, IFC uses a system of social and environmental categorisation. This categorisation is used to reflect the size of impacts understood as a result of the client’s social and environmental assessment and to specify IFC’s institutional requirements. The categories used by the IFC are: � Category A Projects: Projects with potential significant adverse social or

environmental impacts that are diverse, irreversible or unprecedented; � Category B Projects: Projects with potential limited adverse social or

environmental impacts that are few in number, generally site-specific, largely reversible and readily addressed through mitigation measures;

� Category C Projects: Projects with minimal or no adverse social or environmental impacts, including certain financial intermediary (FI) projects with minimal or no adverse risks;

� Category FI Projects: All FI projects excluding those that are Category C projects.

IFC therefore categorises project primarily according to the significance and nature of impacts. IFC defines the project's area of influence as the primary project site(s) and related facilities that the client (including its contractors) develops or controls; associated facilities that are not funded as part of the project (funding may be provided separately by a client or a third party including the government), and whose viability and existence depend exclusively on the project and whose goods or services are essential for the


61

successful operation of the project; areas potentially impacted by cumulative impacts from further planned development of the project; and areas potentially affected by impacts from unplanned but predictable developments caused by the project that may occur later or at a different location. The area of influence does not include potential impacts that would occur without the project or independently of the project An independent review of the Nirvana project assessed that the project fell under Category B.

3.9.4 IFC EHS Guidelines

The ADB SPS policy Statement 2009 (SPS) states, "During the design, construction, and operation of the project the borrower/client will apply pollution prevention and control technologies and practices consistent with international good practice, as reflected in internationally recognized standards such as the World Bank Group’s Environment, Health and Safety Guidelines. These standards contain performance levels and measures that are normally acceptable and applicable to projects." For this purpose IFC EHS guidelines are recommended. The Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) General Guidelines (refer to: http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/sustainability.nsf/AttachmentsByTitle/gui_EHSGuidelines2007_GeneralEHS/$FILE/Final+-+General+EHS+Guidelines.pdf will be applicable for this Project.

3.10 ASIAN DEVELOPMENT BANK REQUIREMENTS

The Asian Development Bank is a regional multilateral financial institution established in 1966. Currently it has 66 member countries, 48 of which are Developing Member Countries (DMCs) and 18 non-regional donor countries. The Bank provides loans and grants through its two mechanisms: � low interest money from Asian Development Fund (ADF), and � high interest money through the Ordinary Capital Resources (OCR).

3.10.1 ADB’s Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS)

In July 2009, ADB's Board of Directors approved the new Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS) governing the environmental and social safeguards of ADB's operations. The SPS builds upon ADB's previous safeguard policies on the environment, involuntary resettlement, and Indigenous Peoples, and brings them into one consolidated policy framework with enhanced consistency and coherence, and that more comprehensively addresses environmental and social impacts and risks. The SPS also provides a platform for participation by affected people and other stakeholders in project design and implementation. The SPS applies to all ADB-financed and/or ADB-administered projects and their components, regardless of the source of financing, including investment


62

projects funded by a loan; and/or a grant; and/or other means, such as equity and/or guarantees. ADB works with borrowers/clients to put into practice the requirements of SPS. The SPS supersedes ADB's Involuntary Resettlement Policy (1995), Policy on Indigenous Peoples (1998), and Environment Policy (2002). In accordance with the SPS, these previous policies apply to all projects and tranches of multitranche financing facility projects that were reviewed by ADB’s management before 20 January 2010. The objectives of ADB’s safeguards are to: � avoid adverse impacts of projects on the environment and affected people,

where possible; � minimize, mitigate, and/or compensate for adverse project impacts on the

environment and affected people when avoidance is not possible; and � help borrowers/clients to strengthen their safeguard systems and develop

the capacity to manage environmental and social risks. ADB’s SPS sets out the policy objectives, scope and triggers, and principles for three key safeguard areas: � environmental safeguards, � involuntary resettlement safeguards, and � Indigenous Peoples safeguards. To help borrowers/clients and their projects achieve the desired outcomes, ADB adopts a set of specific safeguard requirements that borrowers/clients are required to meet in addressing environmental and social impacts and risks. These safeguard requirements are as follows: � Safeguard Requirements 1: Environment (Appendix 1 of SPS), � Safeguard Requirements 2: Involuntary Resettlement (Appendix 2 of SPS), � Safeguard Requirements 3: Indigenous Peoples (Appendix 3 of SPS), and � Safeguard Requirements 4: Special Requirements for Different Finance

Modalities (Appendix 4 of SPS). In addition, ADB does not finance activities on the prohibited investment activities list (Appendix 5). Also ADB does not finance projects that do not comply with its safeguard policy statement, nor does it finance projects that do not comply with the host country’s social and environmental laws and regulations, including those laws implementing host country obligations under international law.

3.10.2 ADB Social Protection Strategy (2001)

Social protection strategy is primarily targeted at reducing poverty through key interventions in specific areas, the details of which have been mentioned below:


63

� labor market policies and programs designed to generate employment, improve working conditions and promote the efficient operations;

� social insurance programs to cushion the risks associated with unemployment, ill health, disability, work-related injury and old age;

� social assistance and welfare service programs for the vulnerable groups with inadequate means of support, including single mothers, the homeless, or physically or mentally challenged people;

� micro and area-based schemes to address vulnerability at the community level, including microinsurance, agricultural insurance, social funds and programs to manage natural disasters; and

� child protection to ensure the healthy and productive development of children.

The work on these indicators has already started and is a core component of all the projects it supports in various countries.

3.10.3 Revised ADB's Public Communications Policy (2011)

The revised ADB Public Communications Policy will take effect from 2nd April 2012 and describes the approaches ADB will adopt to make its external relations more proactive and to improve access to information about ADB operations. The policy describes information outreach, information sharing, and feedback from stakeholders; the key audiences ADB is aiming to reach; translation; and the roles of those responsible for implementing the Policy. In the context to the project, it describes requirements on project information that needs to be disclosed and what can be justifiably redacted. The ADB communication policy, 2011 has the following top priorities: � strengthening of in-country communications to give the public more

information about projects and other ADB activities that could affect their lives;

� translation of summary project information into relevant national languages;

� creation of an independent appeals panel with three international experts to review information requests denied by ADB;

� sharing and exchange of development knowledge and lessons learned, so as to provide fresh and innovative perspectives on development issues;

� greater two-way flow of information between ADB and its stakeholders, including project affected people, in order to promote participatory development; and

� transparency and accountability of ADB operations. ADB envisages the implementation of the communications policy in a manner which ensures that the priorities mentioned above are taken care of.


64

3.10.4 Operation Manual (OM) – as published in March, 2010 on EIA Requirements

This Operations Manual (OM) section outlines the procedural requirements through which the Asian Development Bank (ADB) ensures the social and environmental sustainability of the projects it supports. The Operations Manual is applicable to the ADB Safeguards Policy as a whole. The classification of the projects tentatively happens at the project identification stage, when it is classified during the initial screening of anticipated impacts. However, classification is an ongoing process, and the classification can be changed at any time with the concurrence of the CCO as more detailed information becomes available and project processing proceeds. Environment

A project’s environment category is determined by the category of its most environmentally sensitive component, including direct, indirect, induced, and cumulative impacts. Each proposed project is scrutinized as to its type, location, scale, sensitivity and the magnitude of its potential environmental impacts. The level of detail and comprehensiveness of the EIA or IEE are commensurate with the significance of the potential impacts and risks. A proposed project is assigned to one of the following categories depending on the significance of the potential environmental impacts and risks: � Category A. A proposed project is classified as category A if it is likely to

have significant adverse environmental impacts that are irreversible, diverse, or unprecedented. These impacts may affect an area larger than the sites or facilities subject to physical works. An environmental impact assessment (EIA), including an environmental management plan (EMP), is required.

� Category B. A proposed project is classified as category B if its potential adverse environmental impacts are less adverse than those of category A projects. These impacts are site-specific, few if any of them are irreversible, and in most cases mitigation measures can be designed more readily than for category A projects. An initial environmental examination (IEE), including an EMP, is required.

� Category C. A proposed project is classified as category C if it is likely to have minimal or no adverse environmental impacts. An EIA or IEE is not required, although environmental implications need to be reviewed.

� Category FI. A proposed project is classified as category FI if it involves the investment of ADB funds to, or through, a financial intermediary (paras. 53–58).

Involuntary Resettlement

A project’s involuntary resettlement category is determined by the category of its most sensitive component in terms of involuntary resettlement impacts. The involuntary resettlement impacts of an ADB-supported project are considered significant if 200 or more persons will experience major impacts, which are defined as (i) being physically displaced from housing, or (ii) losing 10% or more of their productive assets (income generating). The level of detail


65

and comprehensiveness of the resettlement plan are commensurate with the significance of the potential impacts and risks. A proposed project is assigned to one of the following categories depending on the significance of the probable involuntary resettlement impacts: � Category A: A proposed project is classified as category A if it is likely to

have significant involuntary resettlement impacts. A resettlement plan, including assessment of social impacts, is required.

� Category B: A proposed project is classified as category B if it includes involuntary resettlement impacts that are not deemed significant. A resettlement plan, including assessment of social impacts, is required.

� Category C: A proposed project is classified as category C if it has no involuntary resettlement impacts. No further action is required.

� Category FI: A proposed project is classified as category FI if it involves the investment of ADB funds to, or through, a financial intermediary (paras. 53–58).

The project is also classified on the basis of the impact on the indigenous people, which however is not applicable for this project, and hence not being discussed. Further during the Project Design and Preparation, the need for Environmental impact assessment (EIA) is assessed and reviewed. The project category can change after the EIA study too. ADB has categorised the project as Category “B” project for Environment and as Category “A” for involuntary resettlement.

ADB’s Disclosure Policy

ADB’s safeguard policy imply the need for prior and informed consultation with affected persons and communities in the context of safeguard planning and for continued consultation during project implementation to identify and help address safeguard issues that may arise. ADB requires the borrower/client to carry out meaningful consultation with affected persons and communities in the implementation of safeguard policies. For ADB “meaningful consultation” for policy application refers to a process that : � begins early in the project preparation stage and � is carried out on an ongoing basis throughout the project cycle; � provides timely disclosure of relevant and adequate information that is

understandable and readily accessible to affected people; � is undertaken in an atmosphere free of intimidation or coercion; � is gender inclusive and responsive, and tailored to the needs of

disadvantaged and vulnerable groups; and � enables the incorporation of all relevant views of affected people and other

stakeholders into decision making, such as project design, mitigation measures, the sharing of development benefits and opportunities, and implementation issues.


66

In line with ADB’s Public Communications Policy, ADB is committed to working with the borrower/client to ensure that relevant information (whether positive or negative) about social and environmental safeguard issues is made available in a timely manner, in an accessible place, and in a form and language(s) understandable to affected people and to other stakeholders, including the general public, so they can provide meaningful inputs into project design and implementation. ADB will post the following safeguard documents on its website: � for environment category A projects, draft environmental impact

assessment reports at least 120 days before Board consideration; � draft environmental assessment and review framework, draft resettlement

frameworks and/or plans, and draft Indigenous Peoples planning frameworks and/or plans before project appraisal;

� final or updated environmental impact assessments and/or initial environmental examinations, resettlement plans, and Indigenous Peoples plans upon receipt;

� environmental, involuntary resettlement and indigenous Peoples monitoring reports submitted by borrowers/clients during project implementation upon receipt.


67

4 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL BASELINE

This section describes the environmental and socio economic baseline status of Project Nirvana and the study area (defined as an area of 10 km radius from the Project Site). Establishing environmental and social baseline is an integral part of ESIA process as it helps in understanding the prevailing environmental and socio economic status of the study area and prediction of the future environmental and social characteristics of the area based on the construction and operation of any new project. It also helps in environmental and social management, planning and strategising to minimise any potential adverse impacts.

4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE

4.1.1 Site Setting and its Surroundings

The Project Site is located at Survey No. 44/1, Erandwane, Haveli Taluka, Pune District, in the state of Maharashtra. Site coordinates noted approximately at middle of the Project Site are 18° 30’ 41.82”N and 73° 49’ 21.34”E. It is located at heart of Pune City between densely developed regions such as Kothrud (on the west), Deccan Gymkana (on the north east), Sadashiv Peth and SNDT College (on the east), Erandwane (on the south east) and Dattawadi (on the south). On its north and north-west, a large institutional campus belonging to Automotive Research Association of India (ARAI) is located along with hill top–hill slope regions which are prohibited for development and declared as No-Development zones (NDZ) as per local development rules. It is accessible by the busy 26 m wide Karve (1)road in South. It is situated at a prime commercial and residential area of central Pune and The site is primarily surrounded by commercial and residential structures The site setting is such that it is surrounded by dense settlements and developed regions or regions falling into NDZ. The nearest railway station is Pune railway station located at around 7 km aerial distance and the nearest interstate corridor that is the Mumbai-Pune expressway is located at an aerial distance of 4kms from the Site. Pashan lake is situated at a distance of approximately 4.6 km from the middle of the Project Site in WNW direction. Mutha River is flowing at a distance of 1.75 km in east direction and in SE direction Mutha River is at a distance of 2.8

(1) Karve Road is a prominent road which connects the Deccan area near the Garware Flyover - Lakdi Bridge junction to the densely populated Kothrud and Karve Nagar area in Pune, Maharashtra


68

km. The slope indicates that the storm water might eventually join river Mutha in SE direction. The confluence of river Mula and river Mutha is at a distance of approximately 5 kms in ENE direction from the middle of the project Site.

4.1.2 Methodology

The environmental baseline is based on primary data collected by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd. as a part of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study. The data was collected for one season (November 2008 to February 2009). Available secondary data has been assessed covering an area of 10 km radius (referred to as the study area) from the Project Site.

4.1.3 Analysis of Primary Baseline Data

As per the available information M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd. had engaged a laboratory (Name of the laboratory engaged is not disclosed in the report) for collection of baseline information on micrometeorology, ambient air quality, water quality (groundwater quality), soil quality, ambient noise quality and traffic volume counts. Ecological survey was not undertaken in the study area (10 km radius). The details of aspects for which primary baseline data was collected are detailed out in Table 4.1. The inputs are based on the EIA Report submitted by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd

Table 4.1 Primary Baseline Data

S. N Environmental Attribute No. of Locations

Frequency Remarks

Meteorology � Wind Speed � Wind Direction � Temperature � Humidity

1.

� Rainfall

1

Hourly for 3 months (November 2008 to January 2009)

Site specific Meteorological data was collected by installing continuous meteorological station.

Ambient Air Quality Suspended Particulate Matter Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) Sulphur dioxide (SO2)

2.

Carbon monoxide (CO)

5 24 hourly, twice a week for 12 weeks

Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) monitoring was carried out at Site and for 5 locations in the study area.

3. Groundwater Quality: Physical parameters: pH, temperature, colour, odour, turbidity. Chemical parameters: Alkalinity, total dissolved solids, total suspended solids, oil and grease, chlorides, sulphates, nitrate, fluorides, Total Ammoniacal nitrogen, Free Ammonia, Boron, iron, copper, zinc, lead,

1 Once during the study period

1 Ground water sample was collected from the Project Site


69

S. N Environmental Attribute No. of Locations

Frequency Remarks

cadmium, Total chromium, Hexavalent Chromium, Phenolic compounds. Biological parameters: Total coliform and faecal coliform.

4. Soil Quality: Parameters: Particle size distribution, pH, moisture, organic carbon, available nitrogen as N, available phosphorous as P2O5, available sulphur, Copper, Zinc.

1

Once during the study period

Soil sample was collected from Project Site.

5. Ambient Noise Quality 5 Once during the study period

Noise levels were monitored on hourly basis for 24 hours.

6. Traffic Count 3 Once during the study period

Traffic movement was monitored on hourly basis for 24 hours (to and from directions).


4.1.4 Secondary Baseline Data Collection

Secondary baseline data collection involved identification and collection of data from existing published materials and documents. Secondary data was collected for following attributes:

Table 4.2 Secondary Baseline Data

S. No Environmental Attribute Source of Data Collection 1. Long term meteorological data India Meteorological Department 2. Geology, geomorphology and

hydrogeology Geological Survey of India, Central Ground Water Board, District Environmental Atlas of Pune, Maharashtra prepared by Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (M PCB), 2006. District Resource Map of Pune District

3. Land use National Atlas and Thematic Mapping Organization

4. Forest area Pune District Gazetteer 5. Natural Hazards � Building Materials and Technology

Promotion Council of India � Meteorological Department � Vulnerability Atlas � District Environmental Atlas of Pune, Maharashtra prepared by Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (M PCB), 2006

6. Socio-economic Socio Economic Survey report of NGO Vatsalya

4.2 TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE

The Project Site is located at an elevation of approximately 590 m above mean sea level (amsl).


70

The northern portion of the Site is at higher elevation and the slope of the Site is from NW and NNW towards S and SSE. The difference in elevation at the Site is 30 m. Following the slope, natural drainage of the region is from N and NNW towards South and SSE and SE. On the north and north-west, a large institutional campus belonging to Automotive Research Association of India (ARAI) is located along with hill top – hill slope regions which are prohibited for development and declared as No-Development zones (NDZ) as per local development rules. Site coordinates noted approximately at middle of the Project Site are 18° 30’ 41.82”N and 73° 49’ 21.34”E.


71

Figure 4.1 Satellite Imagery showing Site and its Immediate Surroundings

N


72

4.3 GEOLOGY AND HYDROGEOLOGY

4.3.1 Pune District Geology

Pune district area is covered by thick pile of Basaltic lava flow of Deccan Trap of Uppercretacious to "Palaeohoe" age. The basaltic flows are of two type viz. compound "pahoehoe" and "aa" flows. The pahoehoe flows contain several units which vary in thickness from less than a metre to several metres. The compound pahoehoe flows generally underlie or overlie a thick succession of aa flows, thereby constituting a regional marker for correlation. The thick lava succession has been grouped into seven formations. The oldest Lower Ratangarh Formation, consisting only of compound pahoehoe flows is restricted to the north-western parts of Ghod valley and in the central part of Bhima valley. A megacryst flow, M3 marks the top of his Formation. Overlying this formation is the Indrayani Formation comprising a thick succession of "aa" flows. This is succeeded by a sequence of "pahoehoe" flows grouped under Karla Formation. These Formations are confined to the north western, central and eastern parts. Further east, the thickness decreases and the flows pinch out. Overlying this is a sequence of sampled and "aa" flows forming the Diveghat Formation which cover the southern part and a part of eastern margin. These flows show characteristics of both "aa" and "pahoehoe" types. The overlying Purandargarh and Mahabaleshwar Formations comprise flows of essentially "aa" types and their occurrence is mainly restricted to the south-western, north-western and central parts. These two Formations are separated by a megacryst basalt floe M4 which forms the top of the Pundagarh Formation. The basalts are essentially tholeiites without any marked variation trending NNE-SSW. The dykes are cut by joints parallel to the walls and at right angles to the walls besides horizontal joints. The dyke rocks are fine to medium grained and shoe spares phenocrysts. (Source: District Resource Map, Pune District, Maharashtra). Geology and Geomorphology of the Project Site is depicted in Figure 4.2 and Figure 4.3

4.3.2 Site Geology

Study area lies on high plateau. On the northern and north western side, there are low hills.


73

Figure 4.2 Map showing Geology

Source: Developed from Geological Map of India, published by Geological Survey of India

Figure 4.3 Geomorphology of the Study Area

Source: Developed from Geological and Mineral Map of Pune district, published by Geological Survey of India

4.3.3 Hydrogeology

Hydrogeology of the city (located on the Deccan Plateau) indicates that basaltic hard rock is the primary geological formation over the entire district. Depending upon the local weathering, fracturing and jointing in the basaltic rock formations, the potential aquifers could be in the shallow range (depth of

Project Site

Project Site


74

20- 22 m bgl) to deep confined aquifers (occurring below the depth of 40 m bgl).

4.4 LAND USE

4.4.1 Pune District Land Use

The landuse distribution of the Pune District according to Maharashtra Remote Sensing Applications Centre (MRSAC, Nagpur) is shown below in Table 4.3 and its percentage in below Figure 4.5

Table 4.3 Land Use Distribution of Pune District

S. No. Landuse Pattern Total Area (in sq.km.)

1. Built-Up Land 401.63 2. Closed Forest 1054.69 3. Degraded forest 2095.77 4. Open Forest 497.53 5. Double crop 1422.57 6. Agricultural Plantation 264.59 7. Single Crop 3092.20 8. Scrub/ Waste land 5995.39 9. Water bodies/ Tanks/ River 815.63 Total 15640 Source: Landuse Map, MRSAC, Nagpur. Based on satellite imagery (2001-2002)

Satellite Imagery of the study area (10 km radius) is provided in Figure 4.4 and graphical representation of the land use is presented in Figure 4.5. Total area of 1597.94 sq. km. falls under reserved forests in Pune district, out of which 80 sq. km. (5%) of reserved forest falls under Haveli Taluka (Source: District Environment Atlas).

4.4.2 Project Specific Land Use

The Site is located amidst densely developed regions in directions other than north and northwest direction. It is located centrally in Pune City between densely developed regions such as Kothrud (on the west), Deccan Gymkana (on the north east), Sadashiv Peth (on the east), Erandwane (on the south east) and Dattawadi (on the south). On its north and north-west, a large institutional campus belonging to Automotive Research Association of India (ARAI) is located along with hill top – hill slope regions which are prohibited for development and declared as No-Development zones (NDZ) as per local development rules. The site setting indicates that due to project development through its life cycle both at regional level and in the immediate vicinity is not possible due to densely developed surrounding regions or regions falling into NDZ. The entire site is spread over a plot area of approximately 320,826 m2 and the slums are currently occupying about 1/3rd of this area (i.e. roughly 120,000 m2).

ERM ESIA: KUMAR SINEW DEVELOPERS PROJECT # I8390/ 0138632 MARCH2012

75

Figure 4.4 Satellite Imagery of Study Area


76

Figure 4.5 Land use of Pune District

Source: Pune District Environment Atlas, 2006.Land Use Map- MSRAC, Nagpur (based on satellite imagery 2001-02)

4.5 NATURAL HAZARDS

4.5.1 Earthquake Hazard

Based on the tectonic features and records of earthquake, a Seismic Zoning map has been developed for the country by Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS). According to Seismic Zone Map of India, Project Site falls in Zone III as presented in Figure 4.6. Zone III is defined as a zone having medium damage risk and vulnerable to earthquakes of intensity MSK VII or less (as defined by Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council). Thus, the Project accordingly is required to have provisions of earthquake resistant construction of Plant structure. Suitable seismic coefficients in horizontal and vertical directions respectively, have to be adopted while designing the structures. Seismic Zoning Map of India is presented in Figure 4.6.


77

Figure 4.6 Seismic Zoning Map of India as per IS 1893(Part -1), 2002, IM4

Source: India Meteorological Department

Project Site


78

4.5.2 Winds and Cyclone

The Project site falls in Moderate Damage Risk Zone B (Vb = 39 m/s) according to Wind and Cyclone Hazard Map of India as presented in Figure 4.7.

Figure 4.7 Wind and Cyclone Hazard Map

Source: Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, Vulnerability Atlas

4.5.3 Flood Risk

As per the information in Pune District Environmental Atlas, 2006, most of the Taluka in the Pune district are flood prone. River Indrayani, and river Pauna are the rivers which are likely to cause flooding in Haveli Taluka and river Mutha in Taluka Mulshi. Loni Kalbhor, Pimpari, Chikali, Ashtapur and Sangaur Haveli are the villages in Haveli Taluka which are affected by flood (1 in 100 years). As per the Natural Hazard Map of Pune District the area where Site is located has low flood frequency, with the last dam overflow having occurred more than 40 years ago.

Project Site


79

4.6 METEOROLOGY The study area has Tropical Wet and Dry climate. The year may broadly be divided into four seasons. � Winter season : December- February � Summer season : March – mid June � Monsoon season : Mid June – September � Post Monsoon : October- November The area receives major parts of its rainfall during monsoon season due to south west monsoon. Owing to the geographical conditions in the district the rainfall is unevenly distributed. The western part to the West coast is a hilly area having forest cover and receives more rainfall than the eastern parts. (Source: District Environmental Atlas) In Haveli sub division, the climate is dry and healthy but varies much in different part of the subdivision, the rainfall increases so rapidly towards the west that in the border villages, rice and nagli take the place of jowar and bajra. (Source: Poona District Gazetteer, 1885). Humidity is considerably low during the summer months and diurnal variations in humidity during this period are high and day time temperatures are high.

4.6.1 Meteorology at Site A micro-meteorological station was installed at the Project Site for continuous recording of data at one-hour interval for 24 -hour period or a period of three months (12 weeks). This station measured hourly data on wind speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity, and rainfall. From the EIA report, the detailed data on the microclimate of the site was collected for a period of three months (November 2008 to January 2009), representing the winter season. Parameters monitored at hourly intervals were Temperature; humidity; wind speed; wind direction and rainfall were the parameters monitored at hourly intervals. The prime requirement of this data will be for dispersion modelling to predict incremental increase in ground level concentrations in the study area. The summary of meteorological data is presented in Table 4.4.

Table 4.4 Meteorological Monitoring Data Summary during Study Period of three months

Monitored Parameter Unit Values Average Wind Speed m/s 1.49 m/s Predominant wind direction From WNW to ESE with Calm winds 65.9% Rainfall mm Nil

Temperature 0C Minimum is 13.5oC;

Maximum is 31oC


80

Relative Humidity Minimum – 42.6%

Minimum – 78.8% Source: Source: EIA Report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., 2009.. Weather monitoring station at Project Site, November 2008 – January 2009

During the study period of three months (November 2008- January 2009), the temperature varied from minimum of 13.5°C to a maximum of 31ºC. Relative humidity during the monitoring period varied from a minimum of 42.6% to a maximum of 78.8%. During monitoring period average wind speed recorded was 1.7 m/s or 1.49 m/s, two different values have been mentioned at two places. No rainfall was recorded during the monitoring period. However, hourly average meteorological data has not been presented in EIA report. In consonance with IMD data predominant wind direction during the monitoring period was from west and northwest. Approximately 65.9% of the winds were recorded to be calm thereby reducing the impact on the Site. 24 hour wind rose diagram is presented in Figures 4.8 below.

Figure 4.8 Site Specific 24 Hours Windrose

Source: EIA Report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., 2009. It was developed based on site specific meteorological data collected during November 2008 – February 2009

Major sources of air pollution near the site vicinity include the following:


81

� Heavy traffic movement through Paud road and Karve road opposite to Project site on its southern side; and

� Dense residential and commercial zones abutting the project site on all three sides barring the northern side.

Besides, the future development proposal of a DP road and HCMTR passing through the Project site bifurcating it into eastern and western halves will add to the ambient air quality load.

4.6.2 Regional Meteorology

The brief meteorology (from 1951-1980) based on data recorded at the nearest India Meteorological Department (IMD) observatory station at Pune (18032’N and 73051’E) is given in Table 4.5.

Table 4.5 Climatological Data, Pune

Temperature (°C) % Relative Humidity

Rainfall (mm) Mean Wind Speed kmph

Months

Highest Max Mean

Min Mean

Low-est

830 hrs

1730 hrs

Monthly Total

Max (24 hourly)

Mean

Jan 32.6 30.3 11.4 7.1 74 31 0.0 22.3 2.5 Feb 35.9 32.8 12.7 8.2 61 23 0.5 16.3 3.4 Mar 38.9 36.0 16.5 11.7 50 21 5.3 35.1 4.4 Apr 41.1 38.1 20.7 16.3 48 26 16.6 51.1 5.7 May 40.8 37.2 22.5 18.9 58 38 40.6 82.5 8.6 Jun 36.9 32.1 22.9 20.8 75 62 116.1 131.9 10.2 Jul 31.8 28.3 22.0 20.7 84 76 187.2 130.4 9.7 Aug 30.2 27.5 21.4 19.8 86 78 122.3 108.7 8.7 Sep 32.8 29.3 20.7 18.2 83 71 120.0 132.3 5.9 Oct 34.1 31.8 18.8 13.8 76 51 77.9 149.1 3.4 Nov 32.8 30.5 14.7 10.0 72 42 30.2 96.8 2.6 Dec 31.9 29.6 12.0 8.0 74 37 4.8 42.4 2.3 Annual Average 32.0 18.0 70 18.7 - 5.6

Total - - - - 721.7 -

Source: Climatological data 1951-80, India Meteorological Department

Predominant wind direction based on long term meteorological data is presented in Table 4.6.

Table 4.6 Wind Pattern

Month Morning Time Predominant Winds (from)

Evening Time Predominant Winds (from)

I II III I II III January CALM W NW/SW/SE/E CALM W E February CALM W NW/SW/SE/E NW N W March CALM W E W NW CALM April CALM W NW W NW CALM May W CALM NW W NW SW June W SW CALM W CALM SW July W SW CALM W SW CALM


82

August W SW CALM W CALM SW September CALM W SW W NW SW October CALM W E CALM W E November CALM E NE CALM E NE December CALM E N/NE/SE/S CALM E W Source: Climatological data 1951-80, India Meteorological Department.

IMD Data Observations Rainfall As per the India Meteorological Department data (1951-1980), Pune receives total annual rainfall of 721.7 mm. The maximum monthly rainfall is in July which is 187.2 mm and minimum monthly rainfall recorded is 0.0 mm in January. Maximum 24 hourly rainfall recorded is 130.4mm in June. The area receives 75% of its rainfall during the months of June, July, August and September. Temperature The minimum mean temperature varies from 11.4º C to 22.90C and the mean maximum fluctuates from 27.5ºC to 38.1ºC. The highest temperature was recorded at 41.100C in the month of April and lowest minimum temperature was recorded at 7.10C in the month of January. Relative Humidity

During morning hours at 0830 hrs, relative humidity is recorded to be highest at 86% in the month of August and lowest at 48% in the month of June. During evening hours at 1730 hrs, relative humidity is recorded to be highest at 78% in the month of March and lowest at 21% in the month of March. Wind Speed Mean wind speed in the region varies from 2.3 km/hr to 10.2 km/hr. Highest wind speed of 10.2 km/hr. is observed to be during the month of June and lowest wind speed of 2.3 km/hr is observed in the month of December. Wind Pattern During morning hours, predominant wind direction is calm during the months of September to April while during monsoon season (May to August) predominant wind direction is west. During evening hours, predominant wind directions is Calm during the months of October to January; while from March to September it is predominantly towards the West.


83

Similar wind pattern was observed for year 1981-1994, as is evident from the Figure 4.9 and Figure 4.10.

Figure 4.9 Wind Rose for 0830 hrs (1981-1994)

Source: Dy. Director- General. Regional Metrological Department, Pune


84

Figure 4.10 Wind Rose for 1730 hrs

Source: Dy. Director- General. Regional Metrological Department, Pune (2001)


85

4.7 AIR QUALITY

As per the data presented in EIA Report the ambient air quality of the study area was monitored at five locations during the study period. The monitoring parameters included Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM), Respiratory Particulate Matter or (size less than 10 micron (PM10), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and Carbon Monoxide (CO). SPM, RSPM, NOx, SO2

were monitored on 24-hourly basis while CO was monitored on eight hourly basis monitored twice a week for a period of 12 weeks during November 2008 to January 2009. Selection of sampling locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality was established through ambient air quality monitoring network and is based on the following considerations: � Meteorological conditions of the area based on IMD data; � Topography of the study area; � Location of sensitive receptors i.e. major settlements; Primary source of air pollution in the study area is vehicular traffic. The monitoring locations within the study area are presented in Table 4.8 and represented in the Figure 4.11. Figure 4.11 also illustrates noise, groundwater and soil monitoring locations. The sampling and analysis of ambient air quality parameters was carried out as per the procedures detailed in relevant Parts of IS-5182 (Indian Standards for Ambient Air Quality Parameters). The applied testing procedures are given in brief in Table 4.7.

Table 4.7 Methodology for Analysis of Ambient Air Quality

S.N. Parameter Instrument Equipment/ Instruments for Analysis

Method & Protocol Followed

1. SPM High Volume Sampler

Balance, Oven and Dessicators

Gravimetric Method, IS 5182 (Part IV);

2. RSPM/ PM10

Respirable Dust Sampler with Cyclone Separator

Balance Gravimetric Method, IS:5182 (Part-IV);

3. SO2 High Volume Sampler

Colorimeter IS:5182 (Part-V), Colorimetric;

4. NOx High Volume Sampler

Colorimeter IS:5182 (Part-V), Colorimetric;



86

Table 4.8 Details of Ambient Air Monitoring Stations

S. No. Sampling Location

Code Distance and Direction from centre of Project Site

Justification for Selection of Location and its setting

1 Project Site

AQ-1 0 km � As per IMD data for 30 years (1951-1980), the stations AAQ data captures the baseline for the Project Site.

2 Shivaji Nagar

AQ-2 3.2 km, NE � As per IMD data for 30 years (1951-1980), this station is upwind of the Project Site in winter season and downwind of the Project Site in monsoon season (June-August).

Further, this station’s AAQ data captures the baseline for residential location located in the study area.

3 Pashan AQ-3 5.6 km, NW � As per IMD data for 30 years (1951-1980), this station is upwind of the Project Site in all seasons.


4 Bavdhan AQ-4 5.0 km, WNW � As per IMD data for 30 years (1951-1980), this station is upwind of the Project Site in all seasons.


5 Khondwa AQ-5 7.7 km, SE � As per IMD data for 30 years (1951-1980), this station is upwind of the Project Site in all months except in the months of March, April and June.

Further, this station’s AAQ data captures the baseline for residential area which is a significant habitation within the study area.


Map showing location of ambient air quality monitoring stations is presented in Figure 4.11.


87

Figure 4.11 Sampling Locations Map for Air, Noise, Soil and Ground Water Monitoring Stations in Study Area

Source: Google image, 2010. Accessed on August 30th 2011 Note: One sample for Air, water, noise and soil monitoring location was collected from Site itself. Additionally, as per the data available in the EIA report for groundwater and soil only one sample was collected in the study area (i.e. Project Site).

Pashan AQ3

AQ4 AQ

AQ2

AQ5

Ambient Noise Monitoring

N1

N33 N2

N4

N5

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Location

LEGEN

Soil Sampling

S1

Groundwater Monitoring Location

GW


88

AAQ results as monitored at various locations are presented in Table 4.9.

Table 4.9 Ambient Air Quality in the Study Area

Parameters Unit Observed AQ1 AQ2 AQ3 AQ4 AQ5 Project

Site Shivaji Nagar

Pashan Bavdhan Khondwa

μg/m3 NAAQS 200 200 200 200 200 Maximum 82.6 96.5 79.8 98.8 78.8 Minimum 56.2 68.7 67.2 80.4 69.8 Average 70.7 82.5 73.8 89.7 74.2

SPM* 24 Hourly

98 percentile 82.5 94.9 79.1 98.1 78.7 μg/m3 NAAQS 100 100 100 100 100 Maximum 30.2 21.4 22.8 38.9 27.5 Minimum 14.7 17.6 16.3 21.8 19.8 Average 22.0 22.7 19.2 31.3 22.4

RSPM 24 Hourly


SO2 24 Hourly


NOx: 24 Hourly

98 percentile 7.8 7.8 14.6 19.6 13.6 mg/m3 NAAQS 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 Maximum 1.00 0.05 0.26 0.26 0.24 Minimum 0.20 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.09 Average 0.60 0.04 0.20 0.20 0.18

CO: 8 hourly

98 percentile 0.94 0.20 0.30 0.30 0.20 NAAQS = Revised National Ambient Air Quality Standard have been adopted for RSPM/PM10, SOx, NOx, CO as notified on 16 November 2009;. *However, since no standards exist for SPM now, the standard prevailing prior to 16 November was adopted. Landuse of AQ 1 to AQ 5 is residential. Source: EIA Report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., 2009

Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM)

The SPM concentration observed during the period ranged from 96.5 μg/m3 to 56.2 μg/m3. AQ-2 (Shivaji Nagar) recorded the maximum concentration of 96.5 μg/m3 while AQ-1 (Site) recorded the minimum concentration of 56.2 μg/m3. Average concentration values ranged from 70.7 μg/m3 to 89.7 μg/m3

while 98 percentile values ranged from 78.7 μg/m3 to 94.9 μg/m3 The SPM values (98 percentile) were observed to be within the NAAQ’s limits at all monitoring locations. Slightly high SPM values were observed well within the prescribed limits for all areas. The graphical representation of SPM concentration in the study area is shown in Figure 4.12.


89

Figure 4.12 SPM Concentrations in Study Area


Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter (RSPM)

The RSPM concentration observed during the period ranged from 14 .7μg/m3 to 38.9μg/m3. AQ-2 (Shivaji Nagar) recorded the maximum concentration of 38.9 μg/m3 while AQ-1 (Site) recorded the minimum concentration of 14.7 μg/m3. Average concentration values ranged from 19.2 μg/m3 to 31.3 μg/m3

while 98 percentile values ranged from 22.5 μg/m3 to 30 μg/m3

As per revised NAAQS the prescribed limit of RSPM/PM10 for 24 hours monitoring is 100μg/m3. The 98 percentile PM10 values were observed to be well within the revised NAAQS limit at all locations. The graphical representation of RSPM concentration in the study area is shown in Figure 4.13.

Figure 4.13 RSPM or PM10 Concentrations in Study Area


Sulphur dioxide (SO2)

The SO2 concentration observed during the period ranged from 0.00 μg/m3 to 16.8 μg/m3. AQ-4 (Bavdhan) recorded the maximum concentration of 16.8 μg/m3 while AQ-1 (Site) recorded the minimum concentration of 0 μg/m3. Average concentration values ranged from 2.1 μg/m3 to 5.8 μg/m3 while 98 percentile values ranged from 3.6 μg/m3 to 14 μg/m3

0.00

50.00

100.00

150.00

200.00

250.00

AQ1 AQ2 AQ3 AQ4 AQ5

Monitoring Locations (SPM)

Con

cnet

ratio

n (μ

g/m

3)

Max. Min. Ave. 98 percentile NAAQS

0.00

20.00

40.00

60.00

80.00

100.00

120.00

AQ1 AQ2 AQ3 AQ4 AQ5Monitoring Locations (RSPM)

Con

cent

rati

on ((

μg/m

3)

Max. Min. Ave. 98 percentile NAAQs


90

As per the revised NAAQS the prescribed limit of SO2 for 24 hours monitoring is 80μg/m3. The 98 percentile SO2 values were observed to be within the NAAQS limit at all locations. The graphical representation of SO2 concentration in the study area is shown in Figure 4.14.

Figure 4.14 SO2 Concentrations in Study Area


Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

The NOx concentration observed during the period ranged from 0.0μg/m3 to 21.5μg/m3. AQ-1 (Site) recorded the maximum concentration of 25.1μg/m3 while AQ-1 (Site) recorded the minimum concentration of 21.5 μg/m3. Average concentration values ranged from 4.7 μg/m3 to 11.5μg/m3 while 98 percentile values ranged from 7.8 μg/m3 to 19.6μg/m3. As per revised NAAQS the prescribed limit of NOx for 24 hours monitoring is 80μg/m3. The 98 percentile NOx values were observed to be within the revised NAAQS limit at all locations. The graphical representation of NOx concentration in the study area is shown in Figure 4.15.

Figure 4.15 Oxides of Nitrogen Concentrations in Study Area


0.0010.0020.0030.0040.0050.0060.0070.0080.0090.00

AQ1 AQ2 AQ3 AQ4 AQ5Monitoring Locations (SO2)

Con

cent

ratio

n (μ

g/m

3)


0.010.020.030.040.050.060.070.080.090.0

AQ1 AQ2 AQ3 AQ4 AQ5

Monitoring Locations (NOx)

Con

cent

ratio

n (μ

g/m

3)



91

Carbon Monoxide (CO)

The CO concentration observed during the period ranged from 0.1 mg/m3 to 1.0 mg/m3. AQ-1 (Site) recorded the maximum concentration of 1.0 mg/m3 while AQ-3 (Pashan) recorded the minimum concentration of 0.1 mg/m3. Average concentration values ranged from 0.04 mg/m3 to 0.6 mg/m3 while 98 percentile values ranged from 0.2 mg/m3 to 0.94 mg/m3 As per revised NAAQS the prescribed limit of CO for 8 hours monitoring is 2 mg/m3. The 98 percentile CO values were observed to be within the revised NAAQS limit at all locations. The graphical representation of CO concentration in the study area is shown in Figure 4.16.

Figure 4.16 Carbon Monoxide Concentrations in the Study Area


4.8 WATER QUALITY

Water environment consists of water resources such as river, ponds, streams, etc. The water quality forms the essential component of EIA that helps to identify and evaluate critical impacts / issues with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for implementation.

4.8.1 Groundwater Quantity

Table 4.10 Ground Water table details in Pune District

Zone Area Location of the District GW Potential sq. km. Less than 5 m below ground level

High 3638.66 Scattered in all taluka of the district. Covers major area of Northern, Central, Eastern and South eastern side of the district. It shows major portion in Taluka Junnar, Pune city, Haveli, Daund, Indapur and Baramati. Small portion scattered in Taluka Purandhar, Shirur, and Ambegaon. Small narrow steps are scattered in Taluka Maval, Khed, Mulshi and

0.00

0.50

1.00

1.50

2.00

2.50

AQ1 AQ2 AQ3 AQ4 AQ5

Monitoring Locations (CO)

Con

cent

ratio

n (m

g/m

3 )



92

Zone Area Location of the District Bhor and small-patched portion in Velhe.

5-15m below ground level

Medium 2964.33 Small patches are scattered in all Taluka of the district. Shows major portion of Taluka Shirur, Indapur.

More than 15m below ground level

Low 8381.11 Major portion of the district is covered by this area. This portion is scattered in all taluka, shows the Major portion of Western seven taluka, Northeastern and Southeastern area of the district

Source: District Environment Atlas, 2006

Figure 4.17 Groundwater Potential (%) in Pune District

Source: Pune District Environmental Atlas

4.8.2 Surface & Groundwater Quality Monitoring

The water quality assessment was done to understand the baseline ground water quality of the study area. The groundwater sample was collected from the Project Site, geographically located at 18° 30' 39.5" N and 73° 49' 19.8”E. Details of water sampling location are presented in Table 4.11 and the location from where the sample was collected is described in Figure 4.11. As per the EIA Report, 2009, water quality of one ground water sample has been sampled. The project will use Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC) supply during construction phase and operational phase. PMC is the main source of drinking water (sensitive use) in the study area.

Table 4.11 Details of Ground Water Sampling Locations

S.N. Sampling Location Distance and Direction from Project Site

Justification for Location of Sample

Low Ground Water Potential

56%Medium Ground water Potential

20%

High Ground water Potential

24%


93

S.N. Sampling Location Distance and Direction from Project Site

Justification for Location of Sample

1 Project site At project site N 18° 30' 39.5" E 73° 49' 19.8”

Representing groundwater quality at the Project Site.


4.8.3 Groundwater Quality Results

All the parameters were found to be well within the desirable limits. Water quality sampling results are given in Table 4.12.

Table 4.12 Ground Water Quality in Study Area

IS: 10500 Limits,

IS: 10500 Limits, S.N. Parameters Unit

Project Site

Desirable Permissible 1 Colour Visual Colorless 5 25 2 pH 7.72 6.5 - 8.5 No Relaxation 3 Odour - Odorless 4 Turbidity NTU Nil 5 10 5 Total Suspended Solids mg/l Nil 6 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 90 500 2000 7 Oil & Grease mg/l Nil -- -- 8 Phenol mg/l Nil 0.001 0.002 9 Total Alkalinity mg/l 60 200 600 10 Total Hardness mg/l Nil 300 600 11 Chlorides mg/l 28.36 250 1000 12 Sulphates mg/l 2 200 400 13 Nitrate mg/l Nil 45 100 14 Fluoride mg/l Nil 1 1.5 15 Sodium (as Na) mg/l Nil - - 16 Potassium (as K) mg/l Nil - - 17 Iron (as Fe) mg/l Nil 0.3 1 18 Copper (as Cu) mg/l Nil 0.05 1.5 19 Lead (as Pb) mg/l Nil 0.05 No Relaxation 20 Zinc (as Zn) mg/l Nil 5 15 21 Cadmium mg/l Nil 0.01 No Relaxation 22 Total Chromium mg/l Nil 0.05 No Relaxation 23 Hexavalent Chromium mg/l Nil 0.05 No Relaxation 24 Calcium mg/l Nil 75 200 25 Magnesium mg/l Nil 30 100 26 Total Nitrogen mg/l Nil 27 Free Ammonia mg/l Nil 28 Boron mg/l Not

detectable 1 5

29 Total Coliforms, Nos./100ml Nil < 2 30 Faecal Coliforms Nos./100ml Absent Absent Source: EIA Report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., 2009

It is recommended that BOD and COD should be analysed to assess if there is any sewage contamination as ground water table is not deep in this area. Surface Water Quality


94

Water samples were not collected from tap water to assess the quality of drinking water in the study area. Further actions on this have been recommended in the ESMP.

4.9 SOIL QUALITY

4.9.1 Regional Soil Characteristics

On the basis of soil depth, drain, soil characteristics, slope etc. following soil types are identified in the district. Table 4.13 shows the soil types and its location in the district.

Table 4.13 Soil Types and its Location in the District

S. N. Soil Type Locations in The District 1 Deep, Moderately Well

drained, strongly calcareous, fine soils on gently sloping plains and valleys with moderate erosion.

Narrow stretches are spread in Taluka Ambegaon, Khed, Maval, Mulshi, Velhe, Haveli, Bhor, Purandhar, Baramati and Indapur along the river banks.

2 Slightly deep, well drained, fine, calcareous soils on very gently sloping lands with measas and buttes with moderate erosion

Except Maval and Mulshi Taluka remaining all Taluka have this soil coverage. Which include major portion of Taluka Indapur, Baramati, Purandhar, Pune-City, Haveli, Daund and Shirur. A narrow stretch on the eastern side are spread in Taluka Junnar, Khed, Ambegaon and Velhe.

3 Very deep, well drained, loamy soils on gently sloping narrow valleys with moderate erosion

Patches are spread in Taluka Mulshi, Bhor and Velhe

4 Shallow well drained, clayey soils on gently sloping lands with mesas and buttes with moderate erosion and slight stoniness

Major portion of the district is covered by this type of soil. This include major portion of Taluka Maval, Khed, Mulshi, Velhe, Bhor, Purandhar Haveli and Daund. Small stretchs are spread in Taluka Pune-City, Indapur, Baramati, Ambegaon, Shirur and Junnar.

5 Shallow, well drained, clayey soils on gently sloping land with moderate erosion.

Stretches are spread in Taluka Junnar, Maval, Shirur, Haveli, Baramati, Daund, Khed and Indapur. Ambegaon, Purandhar,

Source: Pune District Environment Atlas, 2006

4.9.2 Soil Quality at Site

The top layer of the soil at the site is of hard strata and the texture is largely sandy loam with low to moderate erosion potential. The depth of this textured soil layer varies from 1.0m to 2.5m. The area is surrounded by plains containing murrum and soft rock. As per the EIA report, the soil quality was assessed based on primary soil sample collection from Project Site and results are produced in Table 4.14.

Table 4.14 Soil Sampling Location SI.No. Parameters Unit Project Site


95

SI.No. Parameters Unit Project Site 1 pH 8.11 2 Organic Carbon % 0.29 3 Available Nitrogen as N kg/ha 135 4 Available Phosphorous as P205 kg/ha 31.9 5 Available Sulfur as S kg.ha 0.22 6 Copper mg/kg 01.8 7 Zinc mg/kg 2.11


Table 4.15 Soil Remediation Intervention Values as per Dutch Standards

Parameter Intervention Values (mg/kg dry matter)

Zinc 720 Arsenic 76 Lead 530 Cadmium 13 Copper 190 Mercury Mercury (inorganic) 36 Mercury (organic) 4 Source: Soil Remediation Circular 2009, Minister of Housing, Spatial Planning and Environment, Netherlands. Note: Concentrations are shown for standard soil (10% organic matter and 25% clay)

India does not have any specific concentration based soil contamination standards. In absence of any existing standards, Dutch standards have been considered for the purpose of analysis. The observed values for metals namely Zinc and Copper much below the soil remediation intervention values specified in Soil Remediation Circular 2009.

4.10 NOISE LEVEL

Details of noise measurement locations in the study area are given in Table 4.16.

Table 4.16 Description of Noise Sampling Locations

S. No. Sampling Location

Code Distance and Direction from Project Site

Justification for Selection of Location and its setting

1 Project Site N-1 0 km Represents Project site.

2 Shivaji Nagar N-2 3.2 km, NE Represents residential area near the study area.

3 Pashan N-3 5.6 km, NW Represents residential area in north-western part of the study area and is to the Project Site.

4 Bavdhan N-4 5.0 km, WNW Represents residential area in the study area

5 Khondwa N-5 7.7 km, SE Represents residential area in the study area



96

The recorded noise levels in the study area are summarised in Table 4.17.

Table 4.17 Noise Level in the Study Area

Day Time Noise Levels

Night Time Noise Levels S.No

Location Leq day Limit (dBA) Leq night Limit (dBA)

1. N-1 54 55 41 45 2. N-2 51 55 34 45 3. N-3 47 55 39 45 4. N-4 53 55 42 45 5. N-5 49 55 37 45 Note: Day time is considered from 6 am to 10 pm and night time is considered from 10 pm to 6am. CPCB limits for residential area during daytime and night time are 55dB (A) and 45 dB (A) respectively, commercial area during daytime and night time are 65dB (A) and 55 dB (A) respectively and industrial area during daytime and night time are 75dB (A) and 70 dB (A) respectively Source: EIA Report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers Pvt. Ltd., 2009

The equivalent ambient noise level for day time (Leq day) and night time (Leq night) at proposed Project Site were observed to be below the prescribed corresponding limits for residential area. For other sampling locations too the results of day time and night time noise levels are below the prescribed corresponding limits. Noise levels measured at Project site indicates that both day and night time ambient noise levels (ANL)are closer to residential ANL limits of 55 dB(A) and 45 dB(A) respectively. Major source of noise in the baseline environment are the following: � Heavy traffic movement through Paud road and Karve road opposite to


three sides barring the northern side. Besides, the future development proposal of a DP road and HCMTR passing through the Project site bifurcating it into eastern and western halves will further increase the ambient noise levels in the region. Daytime and nightime noise levels recorded at various sampling locations are also presented in Figures 4.18 & 4.19


97

Figure 4.18 Day Time Noise Levels

Note: The applicable noise standards: Leq Day of 55 dB (A) for location N 1 to N5 (Residential Area)

Figure 4.19 Night Time Noise Levels

Note: The applicable noise standards: Leq Night of 45 dB (A) N1 to N5 (Residential Area). These standards must be adhered to as has been stipulated by CPCB for effective implementation by the Project Site and also by the surrounding areas.

4.11 TRAFFIC DENSITY

As per the inputs from EIA Report prepared by M/s Mahabal Enviro Engineers (2009) primary traffic survey was done at 3 locations. The major road in the vicinity of the Project Site is Paud Road. Hence, the traffic survey to ascertain the traffic density in the study area was conducted for a day on this road during the study period. Traffic flow towards following directions was surveyed on the National Highway near the Project Site.

� Traffic flow from Deccan Gymkhana towards Paud Road (Project Site) � Traffic Flow from Paud Road towards Deccan Gymkhana � Traffic flow from S.N.D.T. College towards Law College Road

The traffic survey was carried out at these points in to and fro directions. The hourly counts were carried out for the different type/category of vehicles. The

4244464850525456

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

Monitoring Locations

Noi

se L

evel

in d

B(A

)

Leq Day Permissible Limits, Day time- Residential Area

0

10

20

30

40

50

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

Monitoring Locations

Noi

se L

evel

s in

dB(

A)

Leq Night Permissible Limits, Night Time- Residential Area


98

variations in the traffic flow at all the places along with the number of vehicles are presented in Table 4.18.

Table 4.18 Percentage Composition of Vehicles in Study Area

Type of Vehicles and its Traffic Count Cars Two

Wheeler

Cycles Three Wheeler

LMV HMV

From Deccan Gymkhana towards Paud Road (Project Site)

2245 4172 606 1346 583 296

From Paud Road towards Deccan Gymkhana (Project Site)

1866 1092 331 1076 502 266

From SNDT college toward Law College Road

1742 1020 355 1065 506 267


Observations:

Observations on the traffic flow and its density are given below. Deccan Gymkhana towards Paud Road (Project Site) The total vehicle count at this point was observed to be 9248 during the survey of 13 hours (0700 hrs to 2000hrs). The two wheelers were observed to be plying at maximum with 4172 numbers followed by cars and three wheelers with 2245 and 1346 in numbers respectively. The light motor vehicles were also observed in significant number with total count of 583. The peak hour traffic flow in the morning was observed between 10-11 hrs with 1076 vehicles on the road and in the evening the peak hour observed was between 17-18 hrs with count of 1128 vehicles. Paud Road (Project Site) towards Deccan Gymkhana The total count of vehicles was observed to be 5140 during 13 hours of survey. The cars were plying in maximum with 1866 in number. It was followed by two wheelers and three wheelers whose count was 1092 and 1076 respectively. The light motor vehicles were also observed in significant number with total count of 502. The peak hour traffic flow in the morning was observed between 9-10 hrs with 502 vehicles plying on the road. The peak hour traffic flow in the evening was observed between 18-19 hrs with 434 vehicles plying on the road. S.N.D.T. College towards Law College Road The total count of vehicles was observed to be 4958 during 13 hours of survey. The cars were plying in maximum with 1742 in number. It was followed by three wheelers and two wheelers whose count was 1065 and 1020 respectively. The light motor vehicles were also observed in significant number with total count of 506. The peak hour traffic flow in the morning was observed between


99

8-9 hrs with 445 vehicles plying on the road. The peak hour traffic flow in the evening was observed between 18-19 hrs with 670 vehicles plying on the road. The survey was conducted for 13 hours only and is more than a year old data. During the Operational phase the project it is expected that the traffic flow will increase further. To assess the carrying capacity of the nearby roads, a fresh survey is required.

4.12 ECOLOGY

The project site comprises of dense slum settlements covering almost the entire plot area with limited number of trees and other ecological features. As per EIA report 2009, the observations of field survey has concluded that the site is devoid of tree cover and the plant species observed in the area includes trees, shrubs, climbers and herbs that are common and found in other parts of Maharashtra as well. There are no endangered flora and fauna in the project region. The project proponent has obtained permission for cutting 24 number of trees from Horticulture Department of Municipal Corporation of Pune. Tree cutting permission is attached as Annex 3.

4.13 SOCIAL BASELINE

4.13.1 Context to the Social Baseline

The proliferation of slums in the Kilewadi area of Pune has seen accelerated growth since the last two decades, coinciding with the rapid urbanization of the city. A study undertaken by a Pune-based NGO Mashal indicates that up to March 2011, there were 2.04 Lakh tenements in 477 slum pockets (Mashal, 2011) and that the total number of slum dwellers accounts for nearly 29% of the population of the city. With a boom in the construction industry around prime locations such as Erandwane, the establishment of the Slum Rehabilitation Authority in Pune around 2005 has been channelizing the phase wise redevelopment of over 52,50,197 sq m of land that is currently under slums. It is understood that, the slum erstwhile redevelopment of Wadarwasti and the ongoing redevelopment in Kilewadi is a flagship project of the SRA and represents one of the biggest urban development in the city of Pune.

Table 4.19 Affected Population

Phase (I-V) % of total HH Total Affected as of Yr 1995

Total Affected as of Yr 2000

Total Affected after Yr 2000

Phase II (Kelewadi/IndraPark) 72.03% 3.24% 24.73% Phase III (R.G.P/VasantNagar) 40.42% 7.39% 52.19% Phase IV (HanumanNagar) 61.70% 7.60% 30.70% Phase V (Rautwadi) 49.66% 7.46% 42.88%

Source: Socio Economic Survey, Vatsalya, 2010


100

The socio-economic baseline that is depicted subsequently needs to be seen in the context of the following: � Slum redevelopment in Pune is largely replicating the model that is being

followed in Mumbai along with specific by-laws developed by the SRA Pune and the Jawaharlal Nehru National Urban Renewal Mission;

� The site location (i.e. Survey Number 44/1 Erandwane, Municipal Ward 57) has already seen an initial phase of redevelopment (before the formation of SRA, Pune) which involved the rehabilitation of 463 families;

� A key reason for the development of slums in the project area is attributed to its central location amid prime land and lack of control/supervision by the owners of the Chisti Charitable Trust which allowed its proliferation; and

� Typically, a slum community depicts a heterogeneous mix of community groups which have migrated into an urban area. However, the Wadarvasti and Kilewadi settlement, centrally located in Pune, depicts a more homogeneous characteristic and is dominated by Maharashtrian communities.

The slum rehabilitation is proposed to be done in phases and accordingly the site has been divided into five phases namely: (a) Phase I: Wadar Wasti; (b) Phase II: Kilewadi; (c) Phase III: Rajeev Gandhi Nagar; (d) Phase IV: Hanuman Nagar; and (e) Phase V: Raut Wadi. The subsequent table depicts the current status for the phase-wise development.

Table 4.20 Project Affected Families for 45 Nirvana Hills

Location Number of Eligible Tenements for Rehabilitation

Status

Wadarwasti (rehabilitation building was completed in 2003 as part of Phase I)

463 out of 550 The number of tenements that were declared eligible was as per a previous provision of 1st January 1985 which has been revised to 1/1/1995. SRA verification procedure for the same is not yet completed.

Kilewadi and Indira Park

711 tenements out of 1092 total tenements

Annexure II procedure has been completed and the appeal procedure for eligibility is currently ongoing

Rajeev Gandhi Park 446 eligible tenements out of 973 total tenements

Annexure II was published on the 30th of May 2011 by SRA Pune

*Source: KUL This socio-economic baseline survey has been developed on the basis of information obtained through stakeholder consultations as well as through a household survey that was conducted by an NGO based in Pune on behalf of KUL. The data presented in the subsequent sections needs to be assessed in the context of the following limitations: � The household data has been collected and organized for the entire

settlement at Survey Number 44/1 however it does not bifurcate


101

households according to the specific phase of development, i.e. Phases I to V;

� The survey for the settlement of Wadarvasti (Phase I) is currently ongoing and hence this analysis does not include approximately 463 households;

� Though the actual survey was conducted for all the households in the four concerned phases of the project area, the data represented below takes into account the responses from the valid schedules only. The survey was conducted in a total of 4324 households at the site, but the data has been generated only from the valid responses gathered from 3445 households. However this sample size is adequate to provide data at 95% confidence.

4.13.2 Demographic Indicators

As on March 2011, there were approximately 10 lakh slum dwellers in the city of Pune with an average density of 290 tenements/hectare (Mashal, 2011). At Kilewadi, the total population on site is enumerated to be 13506 people with a much lower habitation density of 55 tenements/hectare. In terms of social classification, consultations indicated that a majority of the households have migrated from different parts of Maharashtra and belong to the general/traditional castes.

Table4.21 Dialects phase wise


The population was mainly constituted by Hindus, with 3308 households reporting they followed Hinduism. It could be also gathered from the data that 42 households reported that they belong to the Muslim community. Among the 3315 households that responded to the question on social category, the percentage distribution of households’ caste wise have been depicted below. It should be noted that there are a few settlements, such as Rautwadi that have a dominance of certain communities (i.e. Marathi and Konkani) as well as Indira Park (predominantly scheduled caste communities of Mahar, Neo-buddha, Mang etc). Other communities also include Other Backward Caste (OBC) such as Mali and the Nomadic Tribe Community of Vadars, the traditional stone cutters.

Dialect/Language Phase II (kelewadi/IndraPark)

Phase III (R.G.P/VasantNagar)

Phase IV (HanumanNagar)

Phase V (Rautwadi)

Marathi 27.07% 30.36% 27.88% 14.69% Hindi 18.39% 24.13% 36.80% 20.68% Others 27.28% 18.22% 36.28% 18.22% non participation 31.27% 47.83% 11.42% 9.48%


102

Figure 4.20 Social Category


It should be noted that the Vadar community (nomadic tribe) depicted as approximately 7% of the total population were one of the earliest settlers in this area and worked in stone cutting and petty quarrying in the area that is currently being backfilled by KUL to accommodate labour camps.

Table4.22 Phase wise distribution of castes

Caste Phase II (kelewadi/IndraPark)



Phase V (Rautwadi)

Scheduled Caste

21.49% 45.87% 19.01% 13.64%

Scheduled Tribe

8.80% 44.00% 33.60% 13.60%

OBC 18.62% 21.89% 33.58% 25.91% GEN 31.88% 29.90% 27.63% 10.60% Others 20.00% 30.00% 12.50% 37.50% non participation

30.56% 49.01% 11.01% 9.42%


Settlement Pattern

The slums in the project area are densely clustered around approximately 70% of the site in largely flat structure with the usual built up being that of one-storied hutments. It is understood that the area within the site which was classified by the Town Planning Authority as “hill-top hill-slope” or a no-development zone has been monitored over the ages and there is no encroachment on this land. The slum has been divided by the most recent slum census into several blocks that are further grouped under the settlements of wasti; Kilewadi; Rajeev Gandhi Nagar; Hanuman Nagar; and Raut Wadi. Each of these settlements is largely homogenous and is not stratified on the basis of caste or communal lines. The average size of the structure is determined to be about 10*12 ft (i.e. 120 sq ft) in dimensions. The structure and layout of these tenements depict a typical slum scenario with narrow lanes and by-lanes, contiguous hutments with

65%7%

4%

24%

General Category SC ST OBC


103

corrugated roofing, and inadequate public sanitation facilities. The availability of infrastructure and other amenities is discussed subsequently in this chapter. Household Size

The household size on site varies from 2 to 7 and is on an average approximately 4 members per household. It was observed that there is a trend towards nuclear/smaller families in the site which is indicated by the number of one-storey expansions above the existing hutment that are occupied by a newly married son/brother within a family. Sex ratio

The sex ratio for the area is determined to be 888. This is much lower compared to the sex ratio of Maharashtra state (922) and even Pune district (917). Maharashtra has been witnessing a sharp decline in sex ratio in the decades since 1991. The project area is also seen to reflect the state trend when it comes to gender selection. Typically, consultations with women groups in the area indicate the availability of adequate health infrastructure in tune with gender sensitivity as one of the main constraints. Dependency Ratio

To obtain an insight onto the dependency ratio prevailing on site, the population was divided into major age groups as provided in Table 4.2. It can be gathered from the data that majority of the site population belong to the working age group of 15-64. The working age group constitutes 70.4 percent which indicates a positively skewed dependency. This is typical of a slum demographic scenario as most of the population would be migrants in their youth relocated from their native place to find gainful employment.

Table4.23 Age groups

Age Group Male Female 0 - 4 4.7 4.6 5-9 6.7 6.7 10-14 9.8 10.0 15- 19 10.5 11.4 20 - 24 10.9 10.2 45 - 64 15.6 15.8 65 - 79 3.4 2.9 80+ 0.4 0.3 No responses 7.3 2.5 Source: Socio Economic Survey, Vatsalya, 2010

For any family the number of dependents is a crucial factor to understand their economic vulnerability. For the purpose of the study, dependents are being defined as senior citizens above 65 years of age and children below 15 years of age. The dependency ratio for the area is estimated to be 0.4 which is significantly lower compared to the national ratio of 0.6. The data indicates that about 15 percent of the households have at least one elderly family member. It is estimated that project site has about 524 senior citizens, 222 of


104

whom being women in a total of 511 households. No separate estimate is available on the number of women-headed households. Duration of Stay

From the primary data, the average duration of stay at the slum area is computed to be around 28 years. A majority (94.4 percent) of the population are native Marathi speakers. A minority of the population (about 88 households) are native Hindi speakers from the states of Uttar Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh. There are also few households who have their origins in Andhra Pradesh and Karnataka. However, it is imperative to note that only 719 households reported at the time of survey that they have a proof of residence and only about 816 households reported having election card. Literacy

Literacy levels on site are reflective of the urban setting of the slum area as well as the availability of municipal as well as private schools. It is of significance that only 34 % of the total site population reported having at least secondary education. 53 % of the total male population at the site reported having at least secondary education and 56 % in the case of total female population at the site. The gender-wise break-up of the highest education received has been presented in the graph below.

Figure 4.21 Literacy Levels


It could be observed that most respondents have secondary education as their highest educational qualification. Only about 2 percent of those having educational qualifications higher than secondary education have reported having postgraduate degrees. From the above graph it can be ascertained that, there is a significant potential for providing vocational training to the people at the project site. Only a minority (1.7 percent) of the population has received any vocational training even though it is apparent that there is a large percentage of population at the site who are below par with respect to educational adequacy.

Literacy levels

1.9

17.6

52.6

25.9

2.02.3

15.4

55.6

25.4

1.30.0

10.0

20.0

30.0

40.0

50.0

60.0

Postgrad Grad Secondary Higher secondary Vocational

Male Female


105

The table below gives the phase wise details for the highest level of education with respect to gender.

Table.4.24 Gender and Education

Education Level

Phase II (kelewadi/ IndraPark)

Phase III (R.G.P/ VasantNagar)

Phase IV (Hanuman Nagar)

Phase V (Rautwadi)

Total

Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female S.S.C 471 302 532 353 567 348 274 170 1844 1173 H.S.C 232 126 220 117 245 151 127 106 824 500 Graduation

146 81 133 72 207 105 115 52 601 310

Post Graduation

12 10 12 9 22 16 11 80 57 115

Vocational

10 5 12 9 27 8 9 4 58 26

Total 871 524 909 560 1068 628 536 412 3384 2124 Source: Socio Economic Survey, Vatsalya, 2010

Another important observation is the presence of two schools in the project site. But, clearly, the two schools alone cannot meet the educational requirements of the 2800 children within the project site. It is also observed that people with advanced qualifications like postgraduates are employed in service jobs like teaching or government offices.

4.13.3 Occupational Profile

Consultations with communities in Indira Park, Wadarvasti and Kilewadi indicate that there is diversity in terms of occupational profile within the slum communities. The common occupations that were cited by the slum residents include rickshaw driver, coolie, security guard and even services like plumbing, parlour work and salesmanship. Some of the respondents even reported their own businesses like repair shops, laundry, general stores etc. Another significant observation is that most of the women in the slum area were engaged as housemaids, while they also took up other occupations like tailoring, scrap business and selling of vegetable, fruits or flowers. Over the years, with a gradual increase in education levels as well as opportunities in the surrounding areas – especially in sectors such as construction, information technology etc, employment levels in the organized and government sector (such as factories, clerks etc) is increasing. This is also indicated by the worker participation ratio which is observed to be quite high in the area with high proportion of youth in the working age category.

Table. 4.25 Phase wise income range

Phase II (kelewadi/IndraPark)



Phase V (Rautwadi) Total Income

Range % % % % No. of HH

5,000 & 24.84% 33.21% 25.29% 16.66% 1518


106




Phase V (Rautwadi) Total Income

Range % % % % No. of HH

Below 5,001 – 10,000

26.49% 31.25% 28.47% 13.79% 1261

10,001 – 15,000

29.06% 23.43% 35.63% 11.88% 320

15,001 – 20,000

24.70% 20.00% 37.64% 17.66% 85

20,000 & Above

20.37% 20.37% 50.01% 9.25% 54


It is also observed that both genders are engaged in economically productive work. It is observed that nearly all the households have reported a source of employment. The average income of the household is coming to about INR 6400 per month wherein the range of income listed being as low as below INR 1000 to INR 20000 a month .The average age of the earning member is estimated to be about 40 years. This indicates that there may still be a significant proportion of people that are employed in the unorganized sector as well as those that are engaged in wage labour. Most of the occupations listed are observed are not seasonal in nature and therefore it is apparent that the population have some source of income flow throughout the year. Moreover, all the households had sought gainful employment within the nearby area with the average distance to work place being only about 6.8 kms.

Box 4.1 Entrepreneurial Ventures in the Slum Area

Source: Primary Consultations

Consultations also indicated that there are approximately 250-300 self-help groups (SHGs) comprising of mostly women that work as savings units to deal with emergencies or urgent requirement for money. Women in the area are looking forward to training on enterprise development and are in the need for “gruh udyog” (household enterprise).

A general visit/reconnaissance of the slum area indicates that there are several entrepreneurial ventures, such as flour mills (aata chakkis), community-based organizations and societies, as well as training centres on beauty, basic information technology and other such initiatives. For women, the Lijjat Enterprise has employed over 400 “sakhis (sisters)” in the slum in an initiative wherein dough to prepare an Indian snack is provided and each member obtains approximately INR 25/kg of snacks (papad in local parlance) that is sold to vending points of the enterprise. Another indication of diversity of livelihood options in the area is the number of commercial tenements, from provision stores to medical shops etc. For instance, the completed rehabilitation in Wadarvasti has seen over 20 shops that have been moved into the ground floor of the redeveloped building. However, it should be noted that there have been certain conflicts owing to the size of the commercial units prior to rehabilitation and after the same. For instance, a garage mechanic, who is currently set shop near the existing labour camp, does not want to be rehabilitated into Wadarvasti because the commercial space is too small for his enterprise.


107

4.13.4 Social Vulnerability

Vulnerability refers to the susceptibility of a person, group, society or system to physical or emotional injury attack and social vulnerability is one dimension of vulnerability to multiple stressors and shocks, including abuse, social exclusion and natural hazards. In the context of the current project, vulnerability can be assessed as arising from (a) demographic factors; (b) economic factors; and (c) physical vulnerability. The table below presents the numbers of vulnerable persons in each phase owing to factors like physical disability or illness.

Table.4.26 Types of vulnerability

Type of Vulnerability Total Phase II Phase III Phase IV Phase V Disability 14 21 19 8 62 Illness 50 39 43 19 151 Old age 105 60 63 26 254 Addiction 131 154 42 36 363 Total 300 274 167 89 830


Physical illness or disability and substance abuse are two established causes of vulnerability pertaining to which enquires were made in the socio-economic survey conducted in the project area. 61 households were found to have members with some level of disability, while 363 households reported addiction and 152 households reported having a person suffering from a long term illness. An important aspect of vulnerability is that the existing socio-economic dynamic within the slum relies on cohesiveness amongst communities and families and thus increasing the ability to adapt and cope from common problems. It is usually the women headed households and those headed by the elderly that takes the maximum brunt in case of any possible hazard or social disturbances. Discussions with women in Indira Park indicates that are several instances wherein husbands have taken more than one wife and are living within the same community on rent in another hutment. In this case, it is reportedly the first wife who would be eligible for rehabilitation and constitutes the maximum cases of women headed households. In the proposed project area about 10 percent (321 households in absolute figures) were found to be headed by an elderly member. 279 households were headed by a male senior citizen and 42 households were headed by a female senior citizen. It is also imperative to note that on an aggregate level, 169 households were women headed households.


108

Figure 4.22 Social Vulnerability


Consultations with community-based organizations in the area indicated that roughly 10% of the households have been classified as below the poverty line, whereas estimates of women headed households as well as those with handicapped members coincides with the data obtained through the household survey. As pointed out above, the average income for a household of four people is Rs.6400. It is also apparent that the slum dwellers in the project premises have found gainful employment in the local area. Therefore any shift in their place of residence would undoubtedly and significantly affect their means of livelihood.

4.13.5 Infrastructure and Amenities

Structure of hutments

The survey also attempted to capture the type of house structure. 1021 of the households reported that their hutments were made of load bearing structure, 906 reported shed as the type of structure and 328 reported RCC as the structure. 127 respondents did not give any response to the question on the type of structure. In terms of salvageable material, the sites of specific hutments which had been demolished indicates that many households had refurbished their interiors with tiles, a sink, granite structures etc. and reportedly, such refurbishments constitute an important aspects of financial compensation expectations.

9.3

4.9

1.8

4.4

10.5

0.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

8.0

10.0

12.0

Senior citizenheaded HH

Women headed HH HH with disability HH with illness HH with addiction


109

Figure 4.23 Type of structure


The phase wise details of slum structures have been presented in the table below:

Table 4.27 Type of structures phase wise

Type of Structure




Phase V (Rautwadi)

RCC 7.3% 41.8% 28.8% 22.1% Load bearing slab

30.5% 25.4% 30.8% 13.3%

Shed 26.5% 35.2% 21.7% 16.6% Others 30.0% 48.8% 12.2% 9.0%


Physical Infrastructure

It was reported that the slums had RCC pavements across the area. In addition, the entire slum has been electrified over the last ten years with specific settlements having electric meters through the Maharashtra State Electricity Board (MSEB). However over 90 percent of the connections are illegal with only very few households having meter facilities for electricity. The power supply in the area is also reported to be quite regular with only 3-4 hours cut on Thursdays. It is significant to note that 1010 households (about one-third) reported that they have inadequate ventilation and about the same proportion (1037 houses) reported that they have inadequate sunlight. The most common cooking fuel reported was LPG with about 90 percent of the household relying on LPG for cooking. About 5 percent reported using ‘chulhas’ or earthen stoves’. Sanitation and Drainage

Municipal water was reported as the main source of water by 99 percent of the households in the primary survey. The water supply of Pune Municipal Corporation was reported to be regular by the client. Apparently, the area also has a storage tank for water in Vasant Nagar phase, with a capacity adequate

Type of Structure

59%

3%10%

28%

Loadbearing Loadbearing RCC Shed


110

for the entire population in the project site. A sewerage system to cover the entire slum area has been installed by the local Municipal Corporator. It was reported by the client that the drainage structures were mostly closed units. In addition, most of the households (99%) reported using public toilets that had been set up by the Pune Municipal Corporation and are also in charge of its maintenance. This figure is however contradictory to the feedback that open defecation is commonly practiced here. Education

Education facilities are readily available in the area with a major municipal school (the school will need to be shifted due to the project) as well as two other private English and Marathi-medium schools. The primary data has also captured the existence of 3 aanganwadi centres. The number of children that are enrolling into higher education, college and vocational courses are gradually increasing with an increase in disposable income and the proximity to institutes such as Bhartiya Vidyapeeth and other colleges in Pune. Health Infrastructure

Availability of health infrastructure in the project area is limited to private clinics and hospitals such as the Jog Hospital with 150 beds and Krishna Hospital with about 70 beds. Results of the survey and discussions with Community Building Organisations (CBOs) in the area indicate low awareness levels on health-related issues. Women in the slum are specifically vulnerable to health issues due to their addiction to “misri” (a local type of tobacco), low education levels, exposure to unsanitary conditions through working as maids or rag pickers as well as unstable marital status. As a result, women generally do not tend to access/frequent hospitals. Community Based Organizations

As mentioned earlier, there were savings schemes organised by women operating in the slum areas, know as ‘bachat gat’ and it was reported to be quite prevalent among the women population. However, these groups were largely known to operate underground with no significant overt identities. About 72 percent of the households reported having a bank account. A significant presence of ‘mandals’ were also reported in this area. These Mandals are apparently active with respect to religious activities and also to some extent for cultural events. A common activity of these mandals is to celebrate festivals such as Ganesh Chaturthi, Dassehra, Mahashivratri etc. The Pune Municipal Corporation is also known to engage non-governmental organizations (NGOs) to initiate and carry out social development in education, health etc. Some of the prominent NGOs that have been active in the project area in the past include Mashaal and Vatsalya.


111

5 STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT, DISCLOSURE AND CONSULTATION

Stakeholder identification and mapping is the first and foremost element of any form of stakeholder analysis of a project. Stakeholder mapping and analysis is one of the biggest challenges faced by any project, and all the more when they have an influence over a large group of entities. Often regarded as one of the most crucial and critical steps of any project’s modus operandi, it is the process of establishing an understanding of the key associates other than the project proponent and the internal stakeholders having any association or bearing on the success or failure of the project. Once these stakeholders are established, their roles and levels of impact on the project can be envisaged. Failure to understand or neglect important stakeholder is likely to result in risk for the project ranging from negative publicity for both the project as well as the proponent to the very existence of the project. In the present context, this identification and analysis of the stakeholders become all the more important as the project involves temporary displacement and rehabilitation of community because of which a large no. of interrelated groups will have some form of direct or indirect stake in this project. These direct and indirect stakeholders can range from the slum dwellers themselves, to the governmental agencies, hired sub-contractors and labourers, local Corporator to NGO/CBO’s and media depending on the degree of interest, influence and control over the project. The next sub section is aimed at identification and preliminary classification of the stakeholders, followed by a brief analysis of these identified stakeholder groups, their perception of the project, and the priority for KUL while dealing with these stakeholder groups. It also describes the systems and process through which ESIA proposes to or will handle these stakeholder groups.

5.1 STAKEHOLDER CLASSIFICATION

The stakeholders for the purpose of stakeholder analysis have been primarily classified as:

� Internal Stakeholders: � External Stakeholders

5.1.1 Internal Stakeholders

The internal stakeholders for the project include: Project Management

� Kumar Sinew Developers Limited and the holding company Kumar Urban Developers Private Limited

� Project specific teams such as EHS cell of KUL, CRT � Employees


112

Contractors and Sub-Contractors

� Present and future contractors and sub-contractors (Man-Infra and Karan Builders presently)

� Labour and other construction workforce engaged by the contractors

5.1.2 External Stakeholder

Lenders, Investors, Financiers and Development Agencies � Development Institutions (ADB and FMO) � Investment Banks and Lead arrangers (Deutsche Bank) Slum Dwellers or the Local Community � Slum Residents including Owners, Tenants and Squatters. This includes

both Eligible as well as Non-Eligible for the rehabilitation as per the SRA � Commercial establishments and small business ventures inside the project

area � Slum Lords (large, medium, marginal and small) with multiple slum

holdings � Key local decision makers in the Slums or informal representatives � Women � Vulnerable population including Old aged, widows and minors � Aanganwadi group workers and School Teachers � Hospitals, medical centres working inside slum area and deployed

personnel � People with linkages to political parties, self proclaimed leaders,

extortionist groups local level � Communities encompassing the site or are located in the immediate

vicinity Regulatory Authorities � SRA Pune, Government of Maharashtra � Maharashtra Housing and Area Development Authority, Government of

Maharashtra � Ministry of Environment and Forest as State level Environmental Impact

Assessment Authority (SEIAA) and State level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC)

� Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB) � District Collector/Magistrate � Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC) � Public Works Department (PWD), Government of Maharashtra Civil Society � NGOs � Religious and other associations � Media � Local MLA, Corporator and other politicians


113

Table 5.1 Stakeholder Analysis

Stakeholder Category

Brief description Expectations/Key Concerns/Interests Overall Influence on the Project

Priority for KUL

CATEGORIZATION OF INTERNAL STAKEHOLDERS Project Management Kumar Sinew developers and holding company Kumar Urban Developers Private Limited

A major real estate developer in Pune, they are the project promoter and primary developers of Project Nirvana. A registered developer with the SRA Pune with buildings rights over unlimited floor space.

� Completion of the project in a timely manner with continued funding from ADB;

� Minimal social and environmental foot print of the project; � Proper addressing of the social and environmental issues as per IFC

and ADB standards; � Acting in compliance to the host country acts, rules and regulations; � Managing the contractors and sub contractors and ensuring

compliances as per the local laws, IFC and ADB SPS standards; and � Minimising impact on the hutment dwellers and providing

optimum rehabilitation package as per the requirements of SRA, ADB and IFC.

High

High

KUL Employees Employees of project developer especially those representing the EHS cell, the technical wing and the Community Relations Team (CRT) currently deployed at Project Nirvana site.

� Concern over proper understanding and clarity over the IFC and ADB requirements with respect to project implementation and delivery;

� Appreciation for their work involving engagement with largely hostile community also triggering personal safety issues;

� Ensuring compliance to the local laws and regulations during the complete project cycle including: � Working conditions � Community engagement, especially the hutment dwellers � Managing sub contractor and their regulatory as well as ADB

and IFC compliance; � Ensuring the project completion with minimal social and

environmental impact Adequate working conditions; and � Consultation, disclosure and reporting requirements;

Medium Medium

Contractors And Sub-Contractors Man-Infra Construction

Sub Contractor hired by KUL to undertake

� Ensuring completion of the project as per the envisaged timeline; � Concern over the fact that the earlier budget was prepared keeping

Low

Medium


114



Priority for KUL

Limited construction of commercial structure C1 at Wadar Vasti free sale land (Component II) upto first level.

Karan Builders Sub Contractor hired by KUL to undertake excavation and construction of two Rehabilitation Buildings in Rajiv Gandhi Park (Component I) till the completion of the parking level.

Low Medium

Fusion India Management Private Limited

Project Management Contractors hired by KUL for managing the construction of Component II.

the local context and requirements in consideration; while presently work is expected to be done as per IFC/ADB standards with likely cost and time escalation not previously anticipated in the tender;

� Additional understanding of the IFC/ ADB requirements on what needs to be done to abide by the standards;

� Working in accordance with the local laws and regulations applicable for local contractors, especially dealing with labourers;

� Ensuring compliance to the special requirements on social and environmental issues as per ADB and IFC guidelines;

� Reporting and process requirements of KUL technical team, community relations team and grievance redressal team (especially for the labourers);

� Provision of labour amenities including safe and hygienic water supply and sanitation, housing, adequate labour camp facilities etc.;

� Ensuring regular payment of wages including PF, medical, health care insurance, and following zero tolerance for child labour, forced labour and wage discrimination;

� Liaison with government authorities for labour and other compliances; and

� Maintaining of records related to labour management, payment, health and safety and regular inspections etc.

Low

Medium

CATEGORIZATION OF EXTERNAL STAKEHOLDERS Project Financiers Banks and Local Financing Agencies

Lead arranger and transaction agency like Deutsche Bank.

High High

Lenders, Investors, Financiers and Development Agencies

Lenders and development institutions like ADB and FMO who are funding Project Nirvana at the corporate level.

� Ensure timely commitments by KUL to delivery of the project; � Ensure compliance of the project to the local applicable rules and

regulations; � To ensure compliance to its existing environmental and social

safeguard policies; � Minimum project risk in the short and long term especially from

social and environmental perspective; � Reporting from KUL on various identified parameters; � Identification of the E&S impacts followed by commitment and

suitable actions on part of the project proponent; and � Regular updates from KUL on E&S impacts and progress on

addressing these impacts.

High High


115



Priority for KUL

� Existing Slum Dwellers/Residents And Local Community Residents including Owners, Tenants and Squatters.

This includes both Eligible as well as Non-Eligible for the rehabilitation as per the SRA and SRS scheme.

� Proper enumeration and benefit to maximum hutment dwellers; � Concerns over eligibility and ineligibility due to the cut-off date of

1995 which makes slum dwellers residing after that date ineligible for rehabilitation;

� Concerns over quality houses and facilities to be provided in the rehabilitation housing;

� Discussion on entitlement and other benefits to be decided through proper consultation followed by disclosure;

� Compensation for temporary displacement in as a form of physical accommodation or rent;

� Completion of the housing scheme as soon as possible; � Compensation for all the structures, likely to be impacted however

not classified for entitlement under SRS; � Access to grievance redressal authority in case of issues related to

SRS implementation or entitlement; Other issues related to public amenities: � Concern over displacement of schools established inside the slum

area; � Displacement of hospitals and medical centres currently functional;

and � Concern over proper reestablishment of these important public

amenities back to their original status quo.

High

High

Hawkers and other commercial entities

Business ventures and small commercial establishment inside the project area (eligible and ineligible).

� Concern over plot for plot re establishment after rehabilitation, because as per SRA, commercial establishment are eligible for same entitlement as are the residential slum dwellers;

� Concern over entitlement for workers and employees of these establishments who come from outside the slums to work here;

� Change in location after rehabilitation which might lead to negative impact on business and revenue; and

� Lack of access to entitlement for hawkers and others who temporarily use the area as a market for selling their goods.

High

High


116



Priority for KUL

Slum Lords (large, medium, marginal and small) with multiple slum holdings

Slum dwellers having stake in form of legal or illegal ownership in multiple slum hutments which they have given for rent and commercial purposes with the returns from them being a livelihood source.

� Expecting additional benefits outside the purview of SRS, from the project proponents;

� Multiple allotment under SRS; � Usurping the rights of the slum dwellers living as tenants much

before the cut off date; and � Getting the names of the people in the survey list through corrupt

practices in lieu of monetary benefits

Low to Medium Medium

Local concerned slum representatives (in good faith) Including the local youth groups

Local informal groups existing in the various slum zones which are self proclaimed local grievance addressing agencies and a source of voice to the slum dwellers. These are also represented by groups like Ganesh Mandals (Religious groups), youth wings, political party units etc.

� Proper implementation of the SRS scheme by both the parties, KUL as well as the SRA;

� Representation in the decision making on entitlements; � Payment of proper dues and remunerations by the developer in

form of rent, one time compensation after signing of individual agreement between the slum dwellers and the developer;

� Quick disposal of the grievances of the hutment dwellers; � Clarity, transparency and accountability in the whole process; � Mandate for construction of community buildings, temples etc in

the proposed SRS scheme; � Due recognition from KUL and from the community; � Some of them could be seeking personal gains; and � Eligibility period to extend beyond 1995 dates.


Anti-social elements and people with extortionist approach

Groups that lack genuine base in the community; however command respect due to fear and control over anti social elements, and their possible linkages in petty crimes

� Additional benefits in form of gratification, outside the purview of SRS, from KUL;

� Improper claims in the SRS housing; � Fear of loosing control over the others due to transparent

engagement process and regular flow of information from KUL; � Lack of scope for negotiation over and above the SRA requirements;

and � Developing mistrust and detestation in the slum dwellers for the

Medium Medium


117



Priority for KUL

etc.

developers by spreading rumours, misnomers regarding the project.

Women Women groups in the community mostly work as domestic help or get engaged in small livelihood opportunity. Rest of them mostly lead the life of housewife. These also include the women SHG groups.

� Ownership of the new housing in the name of both male and female heads of the household;

� Perceived impact on the pre SRS livelihood sue to paucity of space for economic activities;

� Loss of livelihood in the transition period; � Concern over participation of women in bringing their own

grievances into the developers attention; and � Water supply, sanitation, safety and privacy issues during transition

period.

Low to medium Medium

Vulnerable groups Old aged, Widows, Disabled and Minors

� Concern over separate entitlement for housing under SRS; � Location and accessibility issues in the new housing proposed under

SRS; � Special needs of the vulnerable people including the old aged,

widows, disabled, children in the housing scheme; � Transition period issues and the special needs of the vulnerable

people; � Livelihood issues and social security getting affected both during

the transition period and due to proposed housing scheme; and � Special preference and provisions to old aged and disabled while

allocating accommodation in transit building or while allocating flats in the rehabilitation building like allocating the ground floor to these groups.

Low Low

Nearby community Communities encompassing the site or located in the immediate vicinity.

� Disturbance in form of noise, waste loitering, dust from the ongoing construction activities.

Low Low

Regulatory Authorities And Local Administration SRA Pune The SRA is the nodal

authority classified as “planning Authority”

� Successful roll out of the SRS, as per the SRA guidelines; � Verification of the eligible and ineligible hutment dwellers and

finalizing the Annexure II list as per SRA;

High Medium


118



Priority for KUL

for demarcation and declaration of the slum area and for the implementation of the SRS in the city of Pune and PCMC

� Overseeing the activities of the developers during the transition period, and till the completion of the housing scheme;

� Construction of the flats and other public utilities by KUL as per the guidelines under SRA;

� Undertaking the ownership of the slum rehabilitation buildings from the developer, once the construction is complete and possession is given to the hutment dwellers; and

� Supporting the slum dwellers in formation of the housing societies till its formal registration under the Registration of Societies Act.

Ministry of Environment and Forest and State level Environmental Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) and State level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC)

Nodal authority at central and state level for ensuring compliances aimed environmental protection and management. Sanctioning of Environmental and other related Technical clearances as per local acts, rules and regulations.

� Proper EIA and addressing of impacts identified in EIA.

Medium Medium

Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB)

Responsible for sanctioning the Consent to Establish (CTE) and Consent to Operate (CTO) to the project. Establish guidelines for environmental protection during construction and operation activities.

� KUL should work as per the CTE, and CTO; and � Regular submissions on compliances

High High


119



Priority for KUL

Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC)

Primary role in establishing or restoring important public utilities like water supply, electricity, drainage etc one the project is in its operational phase

� Compliances of the local municipal regulations especially relation municipal solid waste rules etc, and other local regulations or requirements as applicable.

Medium Low

Public Works Department (PWD), Government of Maharashtra

Primary role in development of public infrastructure like roads, governmental buildings, drainage lines etc.

� Proper displacement and re setup of public roads and utilities that might interfere in ongoing construction activities; and

� Participation only once the complete project has been established with regards to development of public buildings and infrastructure that might be established later on.

Low Low

Political And Local Groups Local Corporator and Other Political Groups

Highly influential in the project area and is the elected representative of that area. Responsible for propagating PMC activities inside the slum area, including providing proper roads, sanitation facilities and waste disposal

� Completion of SRS scheme; � Continuous commitment from the developer to the project; � Increase in the entitlement and eligibility date of the slum dwellers; � Addressal of key issues of the hutment dwellers by the developer; � Possibility of undue benefits from the project proponent; � Concern over rival political groups becoming more influential; � Gaining Political mileage from project commissioning; and � Garnering compassion from the community.

High Medium


120

5.2 STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT AS PART OF THE PROJECT

KUL has been engaging with the slum community since 2005, but a more structured engagement has been started only recently. The engagement has been in the following formats: � On going consultations and negotiations with individuals and cluster of

households to get the community to agree to the SRA scheme; � Individual consultations and interviews during the socio-economic survey

initiated at the behest of the Lenders through an ESAP. Currently, 3309 households of the 4038 households have been surveyed;

� Frequent interactions for specific purposes, as and when required, primarily related to the scheme; and

� KUL facilitating the formation of the Wada Basti Housing Society election in Phase I.

In addition, during the ESIA process, ERM held some consultations and focus group discussions with a range of stakeholders which has been detailed later in this section. The following Table 5.2presents the key consultations held under the SRS.

Table 5.1 Stakeholder Analysis

Meeting Agenda Location of meeting/ consultation

No. of people attended

Key issues Discussed

Final Outcome

1 Public Address by Chairman and Stakeholders to explain the SRA scheme along with Local Politicians

Kelewadi on dated 7th Feb 2004

600 to 700 People

Introduction of SRA Scheme and Start of work

The community started giving consent

2 Inauguration of Sample flat to explain the advantages after rehabilitation participation with slum dwellers

Kelewadi 2Sept 2010

1500 people visited

Advantages of rehabilitation and seeking feedback on the sample flat

Start of the transit process

3 Discussion with SRA/ Corporater /KUL Chairman with public

Kelewadi 2Sept 2010

150 People To know the reaction of public on sample flat and discussed further plan to start the Transit Building

Two transit building construction started

4 A meeting to discuss the progress of Transit Building SRA and Site In charge

Kelewadi 15 People Progress of Construction of Transit

5 Chairman and Corporator meeting with

Kelewadi 30-50 Develop Model for


121

Meeting Agenda Location of meeting/ consultation

No. of people attended

Key issues Discussed

Final Outcome

working women regarding their work and betterment of business

betterment of their business

7 Participation and in General Body election of Wadar Samaj Co Opp Housing Society Phase 1

Kothrud 31 July 2011

250 hh of Phase 1

Election of executive body of society

Society started function and approval is yet to come from Registrar Co Opp Housing Society

8 Local Corporator meeting with dwellers for their grievances

Kelewadi 100 People Local PMC works

Constructed RCC road in slum

9 SRA addressing document, the list of eligibility annexure II of Rajeev Gandhi Park

Rajeev Gandhi Park

All slum Eligibility declaration

Annexure II declared

10 Public Address by Chairman and Stakeholders to explain the SRA scheme along with Local Politicians

Kelewadi on dated 7th Feb 2004

600 to 700 People

Introduction of SRA Scheme and Start of work

The community started giving consent

Source: KUL documentation

As mentioned above a structured consultation process has begun only recently and there was a gap in systematic consultation process in between owing to the fact the SRA Pune was being rolled out in the meantime and there was no clarity on the provisions of Pune SRA scheme. However, the community relations team had continuous but largely informal interaction with the slum community throughout the period till 2009. It is suggested that based on the issues raised through the grievance redressal mechanism or through informal networks like informal meetings in groups or individuals, should be identified, categorised and taken up during the various consultation process that KUL plans to organise/ hold in future as a part of the stakeholder engagement strategy.

5.2.1 Consultations conducted during the ESIA process

For the purpose of undertaking this assessment, a range of stakeholder consultations were done. These issues from these consultations have informed the impact assessment for the project and the mitigation strategies suggested under ESMP. . Following are some of the Focused Group Discussions and consultations that were carried out during ERM’s visit: � Community consultations at different zones of the slum area: ERM

conducted separate community consultations with people located at different slum zones at Survey No.44/1 including those from Kilewadi, Rajiv Gandhi Park, Vasant Nagar and Indira Park


122

� Consultations with women: ERM conducted Focused Group Discussions with women groups living in the slum area. Specifically, ERM spoke to women who were slum owners, entrepreneurs (carrying out small business out of their residents) and old aged slum residents.

� Consultations with temporary tenements at Transit Camp located at Rajiv Gandhi Park: ERM had consultations with the people who had been temporarily shifted at the transit camps located behind the community relations office of KUL at Rajiv Gandhi Park

� Consultation with the subcontractors responsible for construction at both component I as well at component II construction zone: ERM held discussions with the subcontractor teams responsible for work activities at both the construction site and tried to get an insight on the construction activities, the key risks and concerns with regards to Environmental Impacts and Health and Safety as well as their ongoing relationship status with the immediate slum community.

� Consultations with surrounding communities: ERM held consultations with communities that reside in the vicinity of the project, on the opposite side of the ARAI road that passes around the site. In addition, discussions were also held with representatives of the municipal hospital and school as well as commercial establishments along the approach road to the site;

� Consultation with the laborers at both the construction zones: A consultation was carried out with the laborers of both the components sites and detailed discussions where done to understand key issues, challenges faced by the laborers with respect to housing, food, sanitation, wages etc.

� Consultations with the Community Relations Team: ERM met the CRT both at the project site as well as later at the client’s office. A detailed discussions, documentation and procedural review and technique assessment was carried out by ERM along with a discussion on the key challenges that were being continuously faced by them on a day to day basis;

� Consultation with the SRA representative and the Additional Chief Executive Officer at SRA office Pune and with the local corporator or the local administrative representative

� Consultations with the local NGO: ERM held a detailed discussion with the NGO Vatsalya that carried out the entire socio-economic survey in the slum area. During this discussion ERM tried to assess the method employed for the socio-economic survey, key challenges and opposition faced during the survey as well as the responses and reactions received from the community.


123

Figure 1.1 Stakeholder consultations with the community

Source: Stakeholder consultation in the community


124

6 IMPACT ASSESSMENT

This section discusses the range of potential environmental and social impacts, their extent and severity that are likely to result from different project activities across the lifecycle of Project Nirvana. Potential impacts have been identified based on site walk through surveys, onsite primary monitoring data generated (from an earlier EIA Study done in February 2009), secondary data and literature review pertaining to Project Nirvana area, review of international best practice guidelines and wide-ranging stakeholder consultation. Discussions with Project developers (KUL), Slum Rehabilitation Authority, regulators, urban municipal administration officials, slum representatives, elected local government representative (ward councillor) and other community stakeholders were undertaken along the study area. A mix of quantitative and qualitative methods i.e. sampling, monitoring, interviews, unstructured interviews, oral histories, and indirect and unstructured observations have been used to derive these impacts. Potential impacts have also been predicted based on the understanding of the site and the processes involved in planning, construction and operation of a typical urban slum rehabilitation project.

6.1.1 Summary of Project Activities

As highlighted previously, the development of Nirvana Hills Phase II (Project Nirvana) consists of the slum rehabilitation component, the free sale component and the associated infrastructure and ancillary facilities to support the project: � Under Component I which pertains to slum rehabilitation and

redevelopment, the project is planned to be implemented over five phases. As mentioned before, 21 rehabilitation buildings are proposed to be developed by the developer, each having 11 floors with 13 flats on each floor. The net carpet area provided for each of these apartments is equivalent to 269 sq. ft. as per SRA guidelines;

� Under Component II pertaining to free sale component, KUL will utilize the FSI and TDR received from construction of component one to construct and develop commercial and residential spaces inside the project site. Out of the 41 towers, KUL will establish 18 residential and commercial towers in the area allocated as per TDR and FSI by the SRA for sale in the private market at rates determined by KUL

� Besides the two components, KUL has planned for common infrastructure and utilities for the entire Project Nirvana. Some of the general multipurpose utilities include shopping malls, community centre, kids’ playgrounds, crèche, temples and green zones. As per the previous EIA study report, the primary utilities required for day to day functioning of the housing society as assessed and studied in details are o Parking Arrangements,


125

o Water Supply and Storage system, o Sewage Disposal System, o Solid Waste Management, o Power Supply and Backup system o Fire Fighting system and o Rain Water Harvesting

Discussions with various KUL teams responsible for developing Project Nirvana indicates that a typical slum rehabilitation project under a government approved SRA scheme consists of the following key activities that are summarized from an impact identification perspective under three distinguishable phases:


126

Table 6.1 Summary of Key Project Activities

Planning Phase Construction Phase Operations Phase � Community consent for SRA scheme � Regulatory authority approval of SRA scheme � Initiate Civil engineering surveys:

� Topographical surveys � Cadastral surveys � Geotechnical investigations � Environmental quality monitoring

� Social surveys and consultations � Project planning phase activities

� Master plan preparation covering building layout of both rehab and saleable buildings

� Infrastructure planning and design (such as drinking water storage, treatment and supply systems; wastewater conveyance, treatment and reuse systems; storm water drainage systems (SWD); rainwater harvesting (RWH) systems; Waste management systems; Transport network; Street lights; and other facilities)

� Architectural planning and design of both rehab and saleable buildings

� Structural planning and design of both rehab and saleable buildings

� Mechanical and electrical utilities planning and design � Social infrastructure planning and design (such as

playground; Children and elders (Nana Nani park) park; community halls; Anganwadi/Balwadis; Crèche; Samajik mandir/religious places; gymnasium; Schools; Hospital; other SRA mandated facilities; and project commitments to slum community)

� Preparation of detailed project report (DPR) with other SRA scheme details along ready for construction drawings;

� Building plan approvals and other developmental proposal approvals from various line departments including local municipal corporation (such as Fire NOC; Municipal Utilities capacity and availability related approvals; approvals from lift

� Pre construction and mobilisation phase activities � Setting up site office � Setting up labour camps � Setting up onsite concrete batching plant � Setting up of model rehab flat � Setting up material storage and scrap yards and

transport of materials/scraps � Setting up of onsite material testing laboratory

� Construction of transit tenements in vacant/ SRA allotted space

� Shifting of select slum communities to transit tenements

� Operation and maintenance of transit tenements through project construction phase

� Utility relocation � Demolition of cleared slum areas � Construction of rehabilitation buildings

� Clearing and scrubbing � Foundation excavation and construction � Superstructure construction � Electrical works � Plumbing works � Carpentry works � Tiling works � Painting works

� Shifting of slum communities from transit tenements to permanent rehab buildings

� Provision of one time settlement to those wanting to self relocated

� Payment of transition allowance � Construction of associated infrastructural facilities

and utilities: o Drinking water supply; o Waste water conveyance, treatment

� Residential Society formation and training

� Registration of Residential Society � Allocation of Flats � Handing over physical assets and

society accounts to legally approved Residential Society

� Defect liability period O&M activities and responsibilities of KUL: o Building repair and maintenance o Plumbing repairs o Housekeeping o Electrical repairs o Lift O&M o Carpentry related repairs o Associated infrastructure

utility/facility O&M o Community infrastructure

utility/facility O&M o Address grievances of rehab

community regularly and systematically

o Maintenance of security and order


127

Planning Phase Construction Phase Operations Phase inspectorate etc.)

� Preparation of the EIA report � Environmental Clearance (EC) from State Environmental Impact

Assessment Authority (SEIAA) of Maharashtra and Consent to Establish (CTE) from Maharashtra State Pollution Control Board (MPCB)

� Compliance to permit conditions.

(Sewage treatment plant), reuse and disposal systems;

o Storm water drainage systems; o Rainwater harvesting systems; o Solid waste collection, storage,

treatment and disposal systems; o Landscaping and garden facilities; o Roads and related road furnitures;

� Construction of Community and Social infrastructure facilities: � Schools; � Hospitals; � Playgrounds; � Gymnasium; � Children and elders (Nana Nani park) park; � Community halls; � Anganwadi/Balwadis; � Samajik mandir/religious places; � Other SRA mandated facilities; � Other Project commitments to slum community


128

Understanding these key activities is critical in identifying and assessing E&S impacts through the project life cycle. Based on this understanding, a Leopold type Impact identification matrix has been formulated and presented in Table 6.3.

6.2 SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT EVALUATION CRITERIA

In general, the ESIA of Project Nirvana assesses impacts of a slum rehabilitation project in the context of a dynamic urban environment and wherein a rapid increase in the density of population is likely to occur over approximately 79 acres of area. As a result, types of impacts can be classified as (a) adverse – which can negatively affect the baseline; and (b) beneficial – which can enhance and improve the existing baseline. Further, the criterions that have been used to evaluate impacts on the environmental and social baseline are as follows: Context

The context refers to the spatial and/or geographical extent of impact due to Project Nirvana. For this study, contextual impacts can either be: � Local (low spread): When an impact is site-specific and is restricted within

1 km of the project/project component site; � Medium: When an impact is spread around 3 km of the project site; and � Regional: When an impact is not restricted to the site and its immediate

vicinity but influences an area beyond 3 km. Duration

For the proposed project, impacts were classified based on their existence in temporal scale as follows: � Short-term (low duration): when impacting for a duration of six months;

this will result in the recovery of the effected environmental/social component (other than for ecology) within a year;

� Medium-term (medium duration): when impacting between six months and three years; this will result in the recovery of the effected environmental component (other than for ecology) within 1 to 3 years;

� Long-term (prolonged duration): when impacting beyond 3 years; and will result in recovery of prevailing conditions beyond 3 years.

Intensity

Indicators of intensity of impact, i.e. whether it is insignificant, minor, moderate or major is based on the following criterion: � Insignificant intensity: Insignificant intensity when resulting in changes in

the environmental baseline of less than 20% in regional context or 20 to


129

30% in medium context or up to 30% in local context but for short duration;

� Minor intensity when resulting in changes in the baseline up to 20% in regional context or up to 30% in medium context or more than 30% in local context or for ecology minimal changes in the existing ecology in terms of reproductive capacity, survival or habitat suitability;

� Moderate intensity when resulting in changes in the baseline for up to 30% in regional context or more than 30% in medium context or for ecology changes are expected to be recoverable in terms of medium duration; and

� Major intensity when resulting change in the baseline beyond 30% in regional context or for ecology changes serious impairment to species, productivity or their habitat.

Table 6.2 illustrates the significance assessment matrix to evaluate impacts in accordance to the criterion discussed in this section. It should be noted that the significance of impacts is pre-mitigation and that they can potentially change over the project lifecycle on the basis of mitigation measures.

Table 6.6.2 Evaluation of Impact Significance

Significance of Types of Impacts Impact Evaluation Criterion Adverse Impacts Beneficial

Impacts Context Duration Intensity

Insignificant Insignificant Local Short Low Local Short Moderate Local Medium Low Local Medium Moderate Medium Short Low

Minor Minor

Local Long Low Local Short High Local Long Moderate Medium Short Moderate Medium Medium Low Medium Medium Moderate Medium Long Low Medium Long Moderate Regional Short Low Regional Medium Moderate

Moderate Moderate

Regional Medium Low Local Medium High Local Long High Medium Short High Medium Medium High Medium Long High Regional Short High Regional Medium High Regional Long Low Regional Long Moderate

Major Major

Regional Long High

The subsequent section discusses the impacts identified in the following manner:


130

� For environmental impacts, significance for baseline parameters is discussed over the project lifecycle;

� For social impacts; the discussion is based on issues for Project Nirvana as a whole over its entire lifecycle.

6.3 SOCIAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT IDENTIFICATION

The assessment process is based on available information, including the project description (as provided by KUL), proposed activities, and social and environmental baseline data. The assessment considers all relevant social and environmental impact/risks, including issues identified in IFC Performance Standards 2 through 8, the ADB SPS and the concerns expressed by those who will be affected by such risks and impacts. The potential environmental and social impacts that are anticipated during various phases of the project life cycle are listed at Table 6.3 using the Leopold Matrix approach


131

Social and Environmental aspects/Project Activities Land use

Ambient Air Quality

Soil and Water

Ambient Noise levels Ecology

Sustainable Resource Use

Cultural Visual Socio-Economic

Road network

Health and Safety

Natural disasters

Planning Phase Community consent for SRA scheme

- - - - - - - - � - - -

Regulatory authority approval of SRA scheme

- - - - - - - - � - - -

Initiate Civil engineering surveys:

Topographical surveys - - - - - - - - - - - - Cadastral surveys - - - - - - - - - - - - Geotechnical investigations - - - - - - - - - - - - Environmental quality monitoring

- - - - - - - - - - - -

Social surveys and consultations

- - - - - - - - � - - -

Project planning phase activities

Master plan preparation covering building layout of both rehab and saleable buildings

� - - - � � � � � � - �

Infrastructure planning and design

- � � - � � - � � - - �

Architectural planning and design of both rehab and saleable buildings

� � - - � � � � � - � �

Structural planning and design of both rehab and saleable buildings

- - - - - � - - � - - �

Mechanical and electrical utilities planning and design

- - � - - � - - � - � �

Social infrastructure planning and design

- - - - � � � � � - - -


132


Ambient Air Quality

Soil and Water




Road network

Health and Safety

Natural disasters

Preparation of detailed project report (DPR) with other SRA scheme details along with ready for construction drawings;

- - - - - � - - - - - -

Building plan approvals and other developmental proposal approvals

� - - - - � - - - - - -

Compliance to Permit Conditions

� � � � � � � � � � � �

Environmental Clearance (EC) and Consent to Establish (CTE)

� - - - - � - - - - - -

Construction Phase Pre construction and mobilisation phase activities

Setting up site office � - � - - � - - - - - � Setting up labour camps � � � - � � � � - - � � Setting up onsite concrete batching plant

� � � � � � - � - � � �

Setting up of model flat � - - - - - - - � - - - Setting up and transport of material storage and scrap yards

� � � � � - - - - - � -

Setting up of onsite material testing laboratory

� - � - � - - � - - � -

Construction of transit tenements in vacant/ SRA allotted space

� � � � � � - � � � � �

Shifting of select slum communities to transit tenements

- - - - - - - - � - - -

Provision of One-Time Settlement to those wanting self-relocation

� - - - - - - - � - � -


133


Ambient Air Quality

Soil and Water




Road network

Health and Safety

Natural disasters

Payment of Transition Allowance

- - - - - - - - � - - -

Operation and maintenance of transit tenements through project construction phase

� - � - - � - � � - � �

Utility relocation and demolition of cleared slum areas

� � � � � � � � � � � -

Construction of rehabilitation buildings

� � � � � � � � � � � -

Clearing and scrubbing - � - � � - � � - � � - Foundation excavation and construction

- � � � - - - � - � � -

Superstructure construction - � � � - - - � - - � - Electrical works - - � - - � - - - - � - Plumbing works - - � - - � - - - - � - Carpentry works - - � - - - - - - - � - Tiling works - - � - - - - - - - � - Painting works - - � - - - - - - - � - Shifting of slum communities from transit tenements to permanent rehab buildings

� - - - - - - - � - - -

Construction of associated infrastructural facilities and utilities Drinking water supply � � � � � � - � � � � - Waste water conveyance, treatment (Sewage treatment plant), reuse and disposal systems

� � � � � � - � � � � -

Storm water drainage systems

� � � � � � - � � � � -

Rainwater harvesting systems

� � � � � � - � � � � -

Solid waste collection, storage, treatment and disposal systems

� � � � � � - � � � � -


134


Ambient Air Quality

Soil and Water




Road network

Health and Safety

Natural disasters

Landscaping and garden facilities

� � � � � � - � � � � -

Roads and related road furnitures

� � � � � � - � � � � -

Construction of Community and Social infrastructure facilities

� � � � � � � � � � � -

Operation and Maintenance Residential Society formation and training

- - - - - � - - � - - -

Registration of Residential Society

- - - - - - - - � - - -

Handing over physical assets and society accounts to legally approved Residential Society

- - - - - - - - � - - -

Defect liability period O&M activities and responsibilities

Building repair and maintenance

� - � - - � - � � - � �

Housekeeping � - � - - � - � � - � � Plumbing repairs - - - - - � - - � - - - Electrical repairs - - - - - � - - � - � - Lift O&M - - - - - � - - � - � - Carpentry related repairs - - - - - - - - - - - - Associated infrastructure utility/facility O&M

- � � - � � - � � - � -

Community infrastructure utility/facility O&M

- - - - � � - - � - - -

Address all grievances of rehab community

- - - - - - - - � - - -

Maintenance of Security and Order

- - - - - - - - � - � -


135

6.4 ASSESSMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

6.4.1 Land use

Impacts

Project Nirvana is centrally located in Pune City between densely developed regions such as Kothrud (on the west), Deccan Gymkana (on the north east), Sadashiv Peth (on the east), Erandwane (on the south east) and Dattawadi (on the south). On its north and north-west, a large institutional campus belonging to Automotive Research Association of India (ARAI) is located along with hill top – hill slope regions which are prohibited for development and declared as No-Development zones (NDZ) as per local development rules. The site setting indicates that for Project Nirvana a major land use change due to project development through its life cycle both at regional level and in the immediate vicinity is not possible due to densely developed surrounding regions or regions falling into NDZ. Major change in land use is expected only within the site premises. From a many decades old slum land use area, the project will convert it into a formally developed residential area with positive impact on land values in and around the site. As highlighted earlier, the entire site is spread over a plot area of approximately 320,826 m2 and the slums are currently occupying about 1/3rd of this area (i.e. roughly 120,000 m2). The FSI use statement issued by Project Architects clearly indicates that the following land use features will be kept intact during commercial project development out of the total plot area as shown in Figure 6.1:

Figure .6.1 Proposed Land Use in the Plot Area

*Source: FSI Statement of Project Architects

Existing ARAI road2%

Hill top - hill slope zone

28%

Proposed Residential

and Commercial

Development33%

Park Reservation

Area16%

Proposed Development

Road and Mass Rapid Transport

Route12%

Mandatory Open Space

9%


136

Thus within an equivalent area currently occupied by slum settlements, Project Nirvana will develop all amenities and infrastructure facilities to improve the quality of life along with residential buildings. The project development will also mainstream existing slum settlements into Pune City integrating them with all other development proposals of Pune City which otherwise eluded them for many decades. In this context, during planning phase of the project, following keys impacts are anticipated: � Major positive change in land use from a dense slum cluster to formally

developed high value land; � Rise in land values induces change in land use pattern in the

neighbourhood. As the nearby areas are already well developed, induced impact is less likely to happen;

� State of the art architectural planning (both exterior and interior of rehab/sale buildings) and design adds to positive increase in land values within project site and immediate neighbourhood; and

� Obtaining regulatory approvals and clearances in time reinforces the impacts cited above.

The key impact anticipated on land use aspect both within project premises and in the surrounding regions is the positive appreciation of land values due to positive change in land use, as well as improved environmental hygiene in the area. This key positive impact that sets in during the planning phase of the Project is expected to sustain through the project life cycle, i.e. rehabilitation of slum dwellers into organized housing. During construction phase of the project, typical impacts associated with building construction projects include the following: � Abandoned sites and facilities that are created during construction phase

(such as site office, labour camps, onsite concrete batching plant, model rehab flat, material storage and scrap yards, onsite material testing laboratory, transit tenements etc.) could lead to misuse and encroachment;

� Ancillary sites and facilities that inadvertently develop around construction sites and facilities stays put during post construction phase leading to an adverse impact on land use.

� Good upkeep and maintenance of transit tenements through the construction phase of the slum rehabilitation project reinforces the positive impacts highlighted in the planning phase;

� Possible re-encroachment of vacated slum areas leading to adverse impact on the project and land use aspect;

� Vacated slum dwellers setting up slums elsewhere in City; � Timely shifting of slum communities from transit tenements to permanent

rehab buildings and construction of associated infrastructural facilities and utilities along with Community and Social infrastructure facilities will


137

reinforce the positive change in land values and use highlighted during planning phase of the project.

However, considering the project setting and construction phase proposals, none of the adverse impacts listed above is anticipated. All the sites and facilities that are created during construction phase (such as site office, labour camps, onsite concrete batching plant, model rehab flat, material storage and scrap yards, onsite material testing laboratory, transit tenements etc.) will be located within the proposed development area and hence will be demolished for constructing rehab and saleable buildings or other associated infrastructure facilities and amenities in the later course of project construction phase. Possible re-encroachment of vacated slum areas is not anticipated as only limited space required for constructing buildings in a phased manner is vacated and demolished. Vacated slum dwellers setting up slums elsewhere in City is not anticipated as the Project complying with SRA regulations have made available transit tenements and rental provisions till the permanent rehab buildings are ready. Stakeholder consultations also concur with this opinion. During project operational phase, the level of repair and maintenance sustained through project life cycle will determine the sustenance of positive change in land use and land value. Key impacts are summarised subsequently.

Table .6.3 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on Land Use

Impacts to consider during Planning Phase

Impacts during Construction Phase

Impacts Operational Phase

Positive change in land use pattern from slum cluster to formally developed residential cum commercial zone

Good upkeep and maintenance of transit tenements reinforces the positive impacts highlighted in the planning phase;

Level of repair and maintenance sustained through project life cycle will determine the sustenance of positive change in land use and land value

Positive rise in land value that will remain sustained through project life cycle provided Project meets its goals

Timely execution of project milestones reinforces the positive impacts highlighted in planning phase.

-

Good architectural planning and design adds to positive increase in land values within project site and immediate neighbourhood.

Timely completion of construction of associated infrastructural facilities and utilities will reinforce the positive change in land values and use

-

Timely regulatory approvals and clearances reinforces the impacts cited above

- -


138

Significance of Impact

The overall impact on land use will be beneficial in the medium context and minor intensity for a medium to long term duration. The impact significance assessed is summarised largely as beneficial: Factors Significance – Planning

Phase Significance – Construction Phase

Significance – Operational Phase

Context Local Local Medium Duration Short Medium Long Intensity Insignificant Insignificant Minor Overall Insignificant beneficial Minor beneficial Moderately beneficial

6.4.2 Solid Waste

Significant amount of solid waste will be generated both during the construction and operation phase of the project. Type of waste generated from the construction and demolition activities would be primarily inert and non - biodegradable in nature (construction debris- soil, sand, gravel, concrete, masonry, rubble, metal, pipes, wood scrap etc.); and small quantities of waste oil and rags; and domestic solid waste. Secondary information indicates that about 25 kg of waste is generated per sq ft area of building demolished. Assuming 25 kg of construction and demolition waste generation per sq ft of building under demolition, about 13200 tons of waste is expected for generation. During construction phase of the project, typical impacts/problems related with the solid waste management during building construction projects include the following:

� Stacking or storage of bulky construction waste outside the construction site which can lead to traffic congestion and disruption, choking of drains etc;

� Improper disposal of domestic solid waste generated by labourers engaged in construction leads to unhygienic conditions;

� Soil contamination due to any oil spill, chemical etc. It is noted that during demolition as well as construction, some amounts of hazardous waste which have asbestos containing material will also be generated. It should be noted that approximately 2200 roofing sheets were quantified as having asbestos. The range of asbestos varies from 8 to 20% in such sheets. Such material will fall under Schedule I and II of the Hazardous Waste Act and Rules, 2008 and the Environmental and Social Management Plan provides measures for disposal of the same. It should be noticed that all hazardous waste containing material will need to be disposed off in a secure landfill site. However, hazardous waste is assessed to be minimal due to the residential nature of the site and is likely to be less than 5%.


139

However, the impact caused during the construction phase would be mitigated by adopting good housekeeping and waste management practices. All construction/demolition waste would be stored within the site itself in an earmarked area. Proper screen would be provided so that the waste does not get scattered and does not become an eyesore which will confine the impact to the project area and reducing any impacts on surroundings. Additionally as the project is planned in phases the quantity of construction waste generated would not be too significant. In current situation, construction and demolition waste generated by the ongoing project activities is being used by the Client for the filling of the quarry site where eventually Component II of the project will be developed (residential and commercial towers). Metals, pipes, conduits etc. will be recycled either within site or outside with help of the local authority. The measures like reusing materials on-site and /or donating /selling salvaged items reduces waste, virgin material use and disposal cost. Siting or disposal of construction waste which is likely to entail unaesthetic view, unhygienic condition, choking of near by drains, etc. are short term impacts. By adopting proper management of construction material and mitigation measures such impacts will be marginalized. All the hazardous chemicals and materials would be stored on site with proper secondary containment facility to prevent any potential soil contamination. Domestic solid waste generated from the labour camps and site offices will be stored in secondary collection bins which will be placed at strategic locations at the construction site and near labour camps. The domestic solid waste would be transported and disposed off by PMC. During operational phase, about 12.2 Tonnes per day of domestic solid waste will be generated. Box 6.1 provides a brief demand and supply assessment of STP manure and sludge and indicates that based on the proposed landscaping plan, the manure generated may be inadequate during the operations phase.

Box 6.1 Demand Supply Analysis of STP Manure and Sludge

About 1.5kg/day of manure will be required for every 100 sq ft gardens/landscape area (assuming 1 inch thick manure is applied on the surface every 90 days). 715370 sq ft (66460 sq m) of gardening is proposed as part of the project. Hence, about 10.8 tonnes of compost manure will be required per day. A sludge digestor is proposed for reducing sludge disposal from Sewage Treatment Plants. The digested sludge is planned for disposal only once in a year. Hence, the digested sludge quantity available as manure will be nominal for meeting day to day manure requirements at the Project site. The project has proposed to install composting plant within the site and use the generated compost for internal landscaping purposes. On an average, rate of compost generation from pre-sorted MSW is about 15%. Hence from 12.2 tonnes of total MSW, about 1.83 tons/day of compost can be generated. Overall, both the digested sludge and compost from solid waste generated at Project site during operational phase will not be sufficient to meet the manure demand of about 10 tons per day and may require external sourcing of manure or select use of manure around plant roots instead of manure carpeting.


140


The maximum impact of solid waste will occur during operations phase of the project life cycle and is anticipated to be beneficial with the provisions that adequate treatment measures are undertaken. The impact significance assessed is summarised as: Factors Significance – Planning



Context - Local Local Duration - Short Long term Intensity - Minor Minor Overall - Moderate Adverse Moderate beneficial

6.4.3 Ambient Air Quality

Residential building projects do not contribute much to degradation of ambient air quality (AAQ) levels during its project life cycle. Whatever be the impact, the most air emissions is expected to happen during construction phase of the project. Baseline data and assessment indicates that the predominant wind direction at the site is west, north west or south west. Calm winds prevail for more than 65% of time period which is significant. As sensitive residential and institutional receptors are located on the immediate western side of the project site, any fugitive dust generation could potentially affect these sensitive receptors. Baseline ambient air quality measurement undertaken as part of EIA study in post-monsoon season of 2008 indicates that air quality levels were well within the residential zone limits prescribed by current NAAQS standards published in 2009. Suspended particulate matter (SPM) ranged between 83-56 �g/m3 while Respirable suspended particulate matter (RSPM or PM10) was in the range of 30-15 �g/m3. SO2 and NOx were in the range of 0-4 and 0-8 �g/m3 respectively. CO was observed in the range of 1.0-0.2 mg/m3. Major sources of air pollution near the site vicinity include the following: � Heavy traffic movement through Paud road and Karve road opposite to


three sides barring the northern side. Besides, the future development proposal of a DP road and HCMTR passing through the Project site bifurcating it into eastern and western halves will add to deteriorating ambient air quality levels in the region. In this background, during planning phase, it is necessary to include AAQ as a factor while siting sewage treatment plants (STP), Solid waste segregation centres and Composting yards etc near sensitive receptors within project site and in the immediate neighbourhoods. Locations for solid waste segregation


141

centre and composting yard are currently in planning stage. Regarding STPs, two STPs of 1.2 MLD and 2.2 MLD capacities are being planned near sale and rehab building components respectively. One of the STP planned on the south western side near rehab buildings could be located closer to boundary line abutting which are residential buildings located along the Paud Road which could be sensitive to foul smell emanating from STPs. During construction phase which is critical as far as ambient air quality is concerned, following are the key sources of air emissions: � Use of fire wood for cooking and burning of garbage in labour camp sites;

Indoor air quality issues due to cooking inside shelters in labour camp sites;

� Fugitive dust generation at/due to: vehicular movement on unpaved surfaces; at material handling yards; construction operations such as excavation, loading and unloading of excavated earth material; demolition of existing slum structures; and

� Gaseous emissions from heavy construction equipments, machinery, RMC trucks and vehicular fleet.

During construction phase, project plans to use minimum number of vehicle fleet as there is no space to move around or park inside the construction areas. As construction proceeds in phases after clearing dense slum settlements, project authorities have planned to commission the vehicular fleet as and when required and hence no significant number of vehicles will be deployed so that daily life in surrounding slum colonies are not affected. Construction machinery and equipments will also be deployed in minimum numbers as construction activity will be taken up in phases. Due to staggered construction schedule that allows slum areas to be cleared in time for creating construction space, limited number of machinery and equipments will be deployed. Considering that project is located in the midst of Pune City, gaseous emissions from construction equipments and machinery will not significantly alter the AAQ environment in the region. During operational phase, foul smell emanating from STPs, Solid waste segregation centres, composting yards could be potential sources for local air quality deterioration. However, measures would be taken to reduce odor pollution by maintaining green buffer around the STP. Green house Gas emissions It is expected that during the operational phase of the project major sources contributing towards green house gases emissions are LPG combustion as fuel for households and usage of gasoline in vehicles. It has been estimated that there would be approximately 6924 MT/year of CO2 emissions from vehicles and LPG combustion would contribute 155 MT/year of CO2 emissions. Hence, the project operation would contribute nearly 7079 MT/year of CO2 emissions. These emissions would further degrade the ambient ait quality.


142

Note: KUL has not yet undertaken any additional studies on green house gas emissions or clean development mechanisms. Thus, a more detailed description of impacts/anticipated measures cannot be provided other than what has been discussed.

Table 6.5 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on AAQ




Locating STP, Solid waste segregation centres, Composting yards etc near sensitive receptors

Fugitive dust along access roads, construction sites

Foul smell from STPs, Solid waste segregation centres, composting yards

- Gaseous emission from vehicles, machinery and equipments that use fossil fuel

Indoor air quality issues in individual rehabilitation flats

- Indoor air quality, garbage burning and fire wood use are critical AAQ issues.

Green house gases Emissions from vehicles and LPG combustion.


The maximum impact on AAQ levels will occur during construction phase of the project life cycle and is anticipated to be minor adverse. Else, during operational phase, depending upon the location of STPs and other such facilities and by maintaining green buffer zones, AAQ levels will not be impacted significantly by the project. The impact significance assessed is summarised as: Factors Significance – Planning



Context - Local Local Duration - Short Long term Intensity - Minor Minor Overall - Minor adverse Minor adverse

6.4.4 Soil and Water Environment

The Project Nirvana site is located on a minor hill slope with a rolling to undulating gradient (with gradients of approximately 1:135). The top layer of the soil at the site is of hard strata and the texture is largely sandy loam with low to moderate erosion potential. The depth of this textured soil layer varies from 1.0m to 2.5m. The area is surrounded by plains containing murrum and soft rock. Due to hilly terrain, there is no surface water bodies located within the site premises. Average annual rainfall received by Pune City is around 885mm and the range is from 300mm to 1200mm per year. Hydrogeology of the city (located on the Deccan Plateau) indicates that basaltic hard rock is the primary geological formation over the entire district. Depending upon the local weathering, fracturing and jointing in the basaltic rock formations, the


143

potential aquifers could be in the shallow range (depth of 20- 22 m bgl) to deep confined aquifers (occurring below the depth of 40 m bgl). The project will source water from Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC) as the site is well served by water supply infrastructure developed and maintained by PMC both during construction and operational phase of the project. Water requirement during construction phase for meeting domestic needs (of construction staff and labourers) and construction purpose (primarily curing) will be met from currently available PMC supply. In normal construction, the water demand is roughly 10-20% of the volume of brick and concrete used in construction. To put it simply, about 100 litres of water will be required for every 1 ft2 of building constructed. Considering that the Project will be developing over an FSI of 464537 m2, the construction phase water demand could be conservatively estimated around 500 MLD spread over the entire construction period of 5 years. This roughly translates to 0.3 MLD of water requirement per day (if we assume 300 days of working at construction site barring rainy days). Project has requisite permission to source water from PMC supply lines as development charges and water usage charges are being paid by the Project. According to SRA, PMC checks the capacity of water supply infrastructure before giving permission to draw water from its supply lines. Hence, project will not cause any indirect impact on the immediate residential and institutional neighbourhood causing water shortage to them. The total amount of water required during operational phase is about 4.1 Million Litres per day (MLD) which comprise of water consumption of about 3.9 MLD required by the residential buildings (rehab and sale components) and 0.2 MLD required by the commercial buildings in proposed project. The project has proposals to construct water storage facilities below ground (underground water tank) of 5.6 million litres capacity and elevated storage reservoir (ESR) of 2.2 million litres capacity. In this context, during planning phase, contamination related impacts that will be caused on sub-surface soil and ground water environment should be taken into account while planning for infrastructure facilities over land such as sewage treatment plants, composting yards, sewerage systems and transformer yards. Due to favourable hydro-geological condition, the anticipated contamination related impact is minor to insignificant. Project Nirvana has rain water harvesting component (targeting 200 MLD /year of rainwater received by the site) as part of the project proposal which will have a positive impact on the ground water environment and will be a major sustainable measure along with other water conservation measures proposed (such as recycling of treated wastewater). Planning for meeting long term water demand at an appropriate level of quality will be a critical issue considering the human health impacts that it could pose. As water is sourced from PMC, the project will be impacted if there are quantity or quality issues associated with PMC supply. However, the project will not be isolated in bearing the impact as the whole city will face such a prospect in case PMC fails to deliver water supply at required quantity and quality.


144

Anticipated impacts on soil and water environment during construction phase will be caused at labour camp sites, site office, batching plant, material storage and scrap yards, transit tenement site and active construction sites. The key source of soil and water pollution at these sites could be due to: � Liquid and solid waste disposal such as wastewater, solid wastes,

construction wastes (arising from various works such as earthwork, electrical, plumbing, painting, carpentry etc)

� Transport, handling, storage and use of construction chemicals, paints, solvents, oil, grease, fossil fuel and other hazardous materials used in construction site.

� Erosion at construction material storage sites and choking of downstream drainage lines.

� Soil erosion at construction sites and slum demolition areas. At site office and labour camp sites, soak pits have been provided to dispose off the wastewater generated. At the existing transit tenement site PMC sewer lines have been used to dispose off the waste water. Considering the favourable hydro-geological environment at the site, the soil and water pollution anticipated due to waste water disposal from construction sites is minor to insignificant. During operational phase, surface and subsurface soil and water contamination and resultant polluted storm water runoff from STP areas, sludge storage/drying areas, Compost yards and leaking building and underground sewerage systems are anticipated. Water quality aspects will depend largely on the effective O&M practices adopted for periodical cleaning and up keep of the entire water supply system consisting of supply pipelines (both above ground and below ground), valves and other pipelines fixtures, metering points/pits, storage tanks (both underground and above ground) etc. Meeting the daily water demand during lean months depends on PMC as it regulates the water supply rationing, if any during lean months.

Table 6.6 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on Soil and Water Environment




Soil and water contamination due to sewage treatment plants, composting yards, sewerage systems and transformer yards.

Increase in soil erosion from construction sites/slum demolition sites and choking of drainage lines downstream

Soil and water contamination due to sewage treatment plants, composting yards, sewerage systems and transformer yards.

Meeting long term water demand with appropriate quality levels

Transport, handling, storage and use of construction chemicals, paints, solvents, oil, grease, fossil fuel and other hazardous materials used in construction site

Water quality aspects will depend largely on the effective O&M practices adopted for periodical cleaning and up keep of the entire water supply system

- Change in local drainage pattern

Daily water demand during lean months will depend on PMC regulations on rationing


145




- Liquid and solid waste disposal such as wastewater, solid wastes, construction wastes (arising from various works such as earthwork, electrical, plumbing, painting, carpentry etc)

Water demand during construction phase and conservation measures required


The impact on soil and water environment will be minor adverse during operational phase considering the long term sustained impact. Else, during construction phase, insignificant adverse impact is anticipated.

Table 6.7 Impact Significance – Soil and Water Environment

Factors Significance – Planning Phase

Significance – Construction Phase


Context - Local Local Duration - Short Long Intensity - Insignificant Insignificant Overall - Insignificant adverse Minor adverse

6.4.5 Ambient Noise levels

The background noise levels measured at Project site during the earlier EIA study done in 2008 indicates that the daytime ambient noise levels (ANL) hover around 54 dB(A) while the night time level is around 41 dB(A). Both day and night time ANLs are closer to residential ANL limits of 55 dB(A) and 45 dB(A) respectively which is same for IFC guidelines value. Major source of noise in the baseline environment are the following: � Heavy traffic movement through Paud road and Karve road opposite to


three sides barring the northern side. Besides, the future development proposal of a DP road and HCMTR passing through the Project site bifurcating it into eastern and western halves will add to deteriorating ambient noise levels in the region. In this context, the project is expected to adversely contribute to high ANLs during construction phase essentially due to: � Noise from vehicular fleet deployed for transportation purpose; � Noise generated by construction plants (batching plant, concrete pumps

etc) and equipments (DG sets, pneumatic vibrators etc) during their


146

operation at various construction sites (buildings, ancillary infrastructure facilities, amenities etc);

� Noise generated by earth moving equipments and debris loading operations at slum clearance sites; and

� Noise generated by earth moving equipments and rock breakers at foundation construction sites.

As the site is abutted by dense residential and institutional receptors on all three sides barring the northern side, the ANLs is anticipated to increase around all construction sites. In order to estimate the impact of raised ANL due to construction plant operations (such as batching plant and concrete pumps), an estimate of safe distances for locating such plants was undertaken using Inverse Square Law equation for noise decay over distance. The noise level generated from a source will decrease with distance from source as per the following Inverse Square law. SPL2 = SPL1 – 20 log10 (r2/r1) Where, SPL1, and SPL2 are Sound pressure levels [dB(A)] at distance r1 and r2 metres respectively. Considering the stationary construction equipment as a point source generating 90 dB(A) at a reference distance of 2m, computed distance required to meet the permissible limits during day time for various land use categories is presented subsequently

Table 6.8 Minimum distance required for operating stationary equipments

Land use category Permissible limits in day time, dB(A)

Minimum distance required, m

Silence zone 50 200 Residential 55 113 Commercial 65 36 Industrial 75 11 The minimum distances estimated in the above table, needs to be maintained from the corresponding nearest land use category. As there are residential receptors located closer than 113m specified above, impact on them could be significant whenever the construction activities move closer to western site boundary line. . Construction of rehab buildings will be taken up in phases and appropriate mitigation measures would be adopted to reduce the noise at the source itself by adopting engineering control measures. In line with the IFC guidelines, mufflers will be installed on engine exhausts and compressor unit, and acoustic barriers would be installed to reduce the noise levels and DG sets would be provided with acoustic enclosure Due to planned phase development construction activities and vehicular deployment will be kept to minimal level possible. During operation phase, no major impact on ANLs is anticipated out of the Project activities. Noise could be generated due to traffic movement within


147

the project site and operation of STP and water supply system which is however insignificant.

Table 6.9 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on ANL




NA Noise from vehicular fleet deployed for transportation purpose

Noise from internal traffic movement

NA Noise generated by construction plants (batching plant, concrete pumps etc) and equipments (DG sets, pneumatic vibrators etc)

Future development proposals of DP road and HCMTR corridor passing through Project site

NA Noise generated by earth moving equipments and debris loading operations at slum clearance sites

Operational noise from water pumps and STP

NA Noise generated by earth moving equipments and rock breakers at foundation construction sites.

-


The impact on ANLs will be moderately adverse in the medium context both during construction and operation phases at moderate intensity. During operation phase, however, the impact will be longer during the entire operational phase and hence needs to be managed at receptor locations besides controlling the source. During decommissioning, impact on ANLs is expected to be minor adverse in the local context. Factors Significance – Planning


Significance – Operation

Context - Local Local Duration - Short Long Intensity - Minor Insignificant Overall - Minor adverse Insignificant

6.4.6 Ecological Environment

Impacts

The project site comprises of dense slum settlements covering almost the entire plot area with limited number of trees and other ecological features. The EIA study undertaken in 2008 based on a field survey has concluded that the site is devoid of tree cover and the plant species observed in the area included trees, shrubs, climbers and herbs that are common and found in other parts of Maharashtra as well. There are no endangered flora and fauna in the project region. The list of tree species and their respective numbers proposed for plantation as suggested in the earlier EIA Report is presented at Figure 6.2.


148

Figure 6.6.2 List of Trees suggested in the earlier EIA Report for the Project

Source: EIA report, 2008 prepared for the Project Nirvana During construction phase, project will try to minimise tree felling though there is hardly any tree cover. As part of project development, landscaping and recreational spaces will be constructed over 66,500 sq.m of area (which is 27% of the total plot area). The landscaping plan formulated for the project and presented in the earlier EIA Report prepared in 2008 has proposed to plant about 2000 trees of different species. Key impacts are summarised subsequently.

Table 6.10 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on Ecological Environment




Creating landscaped spaces, parks and gardens to add to poor ecological environment prevailing at the site.

Tree felling which is anticipated to be insignificant considering the poor tree cover at project site

Project proposal to construct landscaped spaces, parks and gardens with variety of tree species will impart positive impact on prevailing poor ecological environment


The impact on ecological environment will be insignificant during construction phase and moderately beneficial during operational phase. Factors Significance – Planning



Context - Local Local Duration - Short Long Intensity - Insignificant Moderate Overall - Insignificant Moderate beneficial


149

6.4.7 Cultural Environment

Impacts

Physical cultural resources are defined as movable or immovable objects, sites, structures, groups of structures, and natural features and landscapes that have archaeological, paleontological, historical, architectural, religious, aesthetic, or other cultural significance. Physical cultural resources may be located in urban or rural settings and may be above or below ground or under water. Their cultural interest may be at the local, provincial, national, or international level. The Project site is devoid of any irreplaceable physical cultural resources as defined under ADB’s Safeguard Policy Statement 2009. Stakeholder consultations especially with local community members reveal that following religious places exist in and around the project site which are of some local significance and cannot be classified as physical cultural resources as defined under ADB’s SPS 2009: � Patan Baba Mandir located on the southern boundary of the project site. � Khwaja Peer Sayed Hisamuddin Kattal-E-Zanjani Chisti Trust owned

religious structure located on the southern boundary of the project site. � Number of temples and religious idols/ symbols located within the slum

settlements inside the project site. � Thulja Mahalakshmi Mandir located outside the Project site at about 2-4

kms from the site on its western side. � Very old Ganesh mandir (temple) located at about 200m from project site

on its southern side. Besides the above tangible forms of heritage, there are about 300 religious groups or associations among slum community (locally known as Ganesh Mitra Mandals) within the project site that primarily organise and celebrate religious festivals and also undertake social development work. As part of project proposal, the local temples, idols and other such religious symbols will be resettled near the rehab buildings to the extent feasible in consultation with concerned community stakeholders. Project proposes to build a larger temple complex within the project site. During the planning phase of the project, based on community consultations covering all religious groups and sections, re-building proposals to the extent feasible for the local temples and religious symbols/idols must be integrated into project design and disclosed with local community. As the project is governed by SRA regulations, re-building all locally significant cultural properties is not feasible and practical. Hence, it is critical to consult communities in time during planning phase and disclose the final plans to placate any misgivings among various religious groups at the early stage of project life cycle.


150

During construction phase, following key issues and impacts must be considered: � Locating labour camps or other such construction facilities/plants/yards

near or next to culturally important sites for local community could violate the sentiments of community;

� Community consultation and prior consent for demolition of locally significant religious structures;

� Respecting local religious customs, traditions, systems and procedures before initiating demolition of locally significant religious structures;

� Chance find procedures; � Respecting local religious customs, traditions, systems and procedures

while handing over re-built religious structures. During operational phase, no major impacts on cultural environment are anticipated as summarized subsequently.

Table 6.11 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on Cultural Environment




Community consultations covering all religious groups and sections over religious structure re-building proposals.

Locating labour camps or other such construction facilities/plants/yards near culturally important sites

-

Disclose religious structure redevelopment plans with local community to placate any misgivings among various religious groups at the early stage of project life cycle.

Community consultation and prior consent for demolition of locally significant religious structures

-

Involve community in the layout and architectural design of religious structures

Respecting local religious customs, traditions, systems and procedures before initiating demolition and during handing over re-built religious structures.

-

Obtain consent for relocation of locally significant religious structures.

Chance find procedures -


In this context, the impact on cultural environment due to Project Nirvana is insignificant through the project life cycle. Factors Significance – Planning



Context Local Local - Duration Short Short - Intensity Minor Minor - Overall Minor adverse Minor adverse -


151

6.4.8 Visual Impacts

Impacts

An analysis of baseline visual environment in the region indicates well developed residential and commercial zones along all three sides of the site in the immediate vicinity: � Kothrud in the west (comprising of Rambaug Colony, Janaki Nagar,

Gujrat Colony, Anand Nagar, Ideal Colony, Mayur Colony); � Deccan Gymkana in the east (comprising of residential and commercial

zones developed along major and minor arterial road networks such as Senapati Bapat Road, Bhandarkar road, Prabhat Road, Law College road, Paud Road) and

� Southern region (comprising of Sadashiv peth, Ganesh Nagar and Dattavadi developed along major road networks such as Canal Road, Bimal Path, GA Kulkarni Path, Gulwant Maharaj Park to name a few)

On the northern side, hill top-hill slope region and ARAI campus marks the visual environment. In the entire regional environment that is located within 500m – 1000m from the site boundaries, visual environment comprises of planned development of residential (multi-storey buildings) and commercial zones along well laid out road network. Paud road and Karve road are the two major road segments in the region to which individual residential and commercial zone road networks connect to form a grid. The slum-like developments at Datta Nagar, Kishkinda Nagar and Sutardada Nagar located on the west of Rambaug Colony are the only eyesores in an otherwise well developed region. The slum settlements located within the Project site is one of the largest in terms of spatial extent and is a major negative input to visual environmental prevailing in the region. In this context, Project Nirvana which proposes to build the largest slum zone in the region into a formally planned development of residential and commercial areas will add positively to the prevailing visual environment. During planning phase, following visual aspects needs to be considered during master planning, infrastructure planning and architectural designs: � Layout planning of the entire project site that integrates well with

background visual environment and hill side rolling topography; � Aesthetically pleasing infrastructure component planning and designing

such as above ground structure that integrates well with background visual environment and hill side rolling topography in terms of form, color, shape and layout etc.

� Aesthetically pleasing architectural planning and design of rehab buildings (on plan, front and side elevation sections) that integrates well with background visual environment and rolling hill side topography in terms of form, color, shape, layout etc.


152

Review of the layout planning proposals (Refer to Figure 2.2) and artistic representation of the slum rehab buildings (Refer to Figure 2.4) indicates that Project Nirvana has attempted to integrate the project into prevailing visual environment on rolling hill side topography. The rehab building layout runs along ground contour lines and due to which minimal ground modification work will be required. During construction phase, following key visual issues and impacts needs to be considered: � Haphazard and indiscriminate location of construction phase facilities

(such as site office, labour camps, batching plants, material storage yards etc) causing visual impact in terms of its location, material, layout, use, upkeep and maintenance etc.

� Visually pleasing design and construction of transit buildings even if it is meant to be temporary structure followed by daily house keeping and maintenance;

� Swift demolition of slum structures and clearing of debris; � Swift completion of clearing and grubbing activity and clearing of grub

debris; and � House keeping and regular debris clearance at all construction sites. At the ongoing rehab construction sites, project authorities have erected painted GI sheets of 3m height all along the perimeter line of work areas. This painted GI sheet fencing avoids adverse visual impacts of a typical construction site from outside. Significantly, Project Nirvana is proposing to use two of the permanent rehab buildings that are currently under construction as temporary transit buildings till all 21 rehab buildings are completed. This avoids the visual impacts associated with temporary transit building construction and its upkeep and maintenance during its occupation. All the construction phase facilities (such as site office, labour camps, batching plants, material storage yards etc) are located within the fenced project site premises avoiding the visual impact anticipated. As these sites are located on areas that are to be developed later as part of the Project, none of these facilities will remain forever through project life cycle and add to adverse visual environment. During operational phase, following aspects and issues will adversely impact on visual environment: � House keeping and facility management services; � Regular painting and whitewashing of buildings and associated

infrastructure components; � Abuse and misuse of building components such as roof area, walls,

sunshades, stair walls, stair wells, parking space etc. Abuse and misuse


153

could be due to spitting, urinating, advertising, scribbling graffiti, pasting posters etc;

� Leaking sanitary pipes and fittings and overflowing underground sewerage systems;

� Maintenance of road infrastructure and road furniture’s; � Up keep and maintenance of project infrastructure (water tanks, STPs,

Compost yards, waste segregation centres, transformer rooms/yards etc) and social infrastructure (such as community halls, anganwadi, women centres etc) without abusing and misusing them;

� Up keep and maintenance of landscaped gardens, parks, recreational spaces, playgrounds etc without abusing and misusing them;

� Regular solid waste and garbage removal from the rehab area; and � Sweeping and regular cleaning of open/public places/spaces.

Table 6.12 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on Visual Environment




Layout planning of the entire project site that integrates well with background visual environment and hill side rolling topography

Haphazard and indiscriminate location of construction phase facilities (such as site office, labour camps, batching plants, material storage yards etc)

House keeping and facility management services

Aesthetically pleasing infrastructure component planning and designing

Visually pleasing design and construction of transit buildings followed by daily house keeping and maintenance

Regular painting and whitewashing of buildings and associated infrastructure components

Aesthetically pleasing architectural planning and design of rehab buildings

Swift demolition of slum structures and clearing of debris

Abuse and misuse of building components

Swift completion of clearing and grubbing activity and clearing of grub debris

Leaking sanitary pipes and fittings and overflowing underground sewerage systems

House keeping and regular debris clearance at all construction sites

Maintenance of road infrastructure and road furniture’s

Up keep and maintenance of project infrastructure and social infrastructure

Up keep and maintenance of landscaped gardens, parks, recreational spaces, playgrounds etc

Regular solid waste and garbage removal

Sweeping and regular cleaning of open/public places/spaces.


The impact on visual environment will be insignificant during construction phase and moderately beneficial during operational phase.


154

Factors Significance – Planning Phase

Significance – Construction Phase


Context - Local Medium Duration - Short Long Intensity - Insignificant Minor Overall - Insignificant Moderate beneficial

6.4.9 Sustainable Resources Management

Impacts

Residential and commercial buildings consume significant amount of resources through their project life cycle. Conventionally designed buildings consume more resources than the modern buildings that incorporate latest sustainable technologies and concepts. This section presents the sustainable resource initiatives proposed under the project and its positive impact in the long run. Water: The total water required during the operational phase of the project is about 4.1 MLD (3.9 MLD for residential buildings and 0.2 MLD for commercial buildings). Project proposes to utilise the available PMC water supply at the site premises and accordingly utility agency permission has been received. In order to reduce the water consumption at site during the rest of project life cycle, Project proposes to recycle at least 50% of treated wastewater from in-house STPs. Storm Water Management: Storm water drains made of 600mm wide RCC trench will be constructed all along the plot area. These drains will carry storm water and discharge it into municipal storm water drains with a design capacity of 1202 cum/hr. All the surface drains will be covered with RCC gratings. The storm water from the unpaved surface will be allowed to percolate in the ground. Rainwater Harvesting: Project Nirvana has formulated rainwater harvesting (RWH) scheme which will be constructed as part of other project proposals. The site receives a peak rain fall rate of 55 mm/hr and the system has been designed to meet the maximum rainfall rate. Rain water is proposed to be injected into the fracture zones under the land. Project is proposing to construct recharge bores and soak pits to aid in recharging ground water resource. Excess water will be drained to Municipal drains. Two RWH tanks of capacity 250 cum and 570 cum each for rooftop rainwater storage has been proposed along with 51 recharge pits/ soak pits all through the plot area. Wastewater: The sewage generated from proposed project will be about 3.25 MLD. About 55% of wastewater will be of sullage (grey water) type and remaining 45% will be of black water type. About 2-4 STPs have been planned to treat the 3.25 MLD of wastewater generated per day. Almost 50% of wastewater received will be recycled back for gardening, flushing and landscape maintenance purposes after treatment and disinfection at STP and excess treated wastewater will be disposed off to PMC sewerage system.


155

Energy: About 17.4 MW of power supply will be required for the project at an estimated rate of 4 watt of power per sq.ft of developed area. The power will be made available from the government power utility company - MSEDCL. As part of sustainable initiatives, the project proposes to have energy efficient building services, equipments, public area lighting and exterior lighting systems. Four numbers of DG sets (of 380 KVA, 320 KVA, 250 KVA and 140 KVA capacities) will be provided for power back-up for essential services such as fire fighting systems and lift systems. Project has extensive plans to use solar energy for achieving energy conservation and the proposals include:

� Solar hot water systems for sale buildings up to top 9 floors � Solar panel lights will be installed for common facilities � Solar street lights are proposed for common areas such as open spaces,

pathways, RG etc Solid waste: About 12.2 tonnes per day of solid waste will be generated at the project site. The project plans to segregate the solid waste into wet (bio-degradable) and dry (non bio-degradable) wastes at source and deal with them accordingly. The non-biodegradable waste will be disposed off through an authorised contractor. The bio-degradable waste will be treated by vermi-composting technology and the compost generated will be used as manure in the internal landscaped gardens. The STP sludge would also be used as manure. Others Some other sustainable measures proposed under the project include: � All rooms are designed with adequate opening to have proper natural

light and ventilation. � All public areas will have CFC or solar lights for lighting. � External aluminium windows with glass which is reflective type to reduce

heat gain. � Fly-ash will be used in concrete work, block masonry work, external and

internal plaster work. � All masonry work will be done with cement concrete block instead of

burnt brick � All internal brick masonry walls will have gypsum plaster. � The project authorities have applied for Eco-Housing certification for sale

building components of the project. The eco-housing certification program is operated by the Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC). Project hopes to attain four (4) star rating under the program where 5 star rating is the maximum.

Key impacts are summarised in Table 6.13.


156

Table 6.13 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on Sustainable Resource Use



Impacts - Operational Phase

Sustainable resource management initiatives to be integrated into project design

Use of sustainable alternate technologies, materials and practices that conserve resources

Monitor the resource consumption and Implement continual improvement measures to sustain resource consumption over the long run.


The impact due to sustainable resource management initiatives integrated in the Project design will be significantly beneficial during project life cycle. Factors Significance – Planning



Context - Local Local Duration - Short Long Intensity - Moderate Major Overall - Minor beneficial Major – beneficial

6.4.10 Traffic and Transport

Impacts

The site can be accessed through Paud Road and Karve road on the western and southern side respectively. In the Pune City Development Plan (DP), as part of future development proposal, a DP road and HCMTR has been proposed. The alignment of both the DP road and HCMTR corridor is passing through the Project site bifurcating it into eastern and western halves. These two transport corridors will add to the transport infrastructure and circulation capacity available in the region. Land values are bound to rise higher as soon as these proposals bear fruition brining economic benefits to slum dwellers resettled at Project Nirvana site. Project Nirvana has integrated provisions for parking of vehicles both in residential and commercial areas. In compliance of National Building Code (NBC) 2005 and SRA regulations in this regard, Project Nirvana has made provisions for parking of vehicles and the details are listed subsequently.

Table 6.14 Provisions for Parking of Vehicles in the Project

Parking Residential areas Commercial areas Cars 3739 720 Scooters 9811 963 Cycles 11159 683 Total 27075 2366 Source: EIA Report for the Project Nirvana, 2008 Besides, traffic management at the entry and exit gates of the site will be manned by Security personnel guarding the gate.


157

In this context, during planning phase, following traffic and transport aspects shall be integrated in layout planning and design: � adequate primary and secondary road network providing access to all

buildings and amenities; � avoiding vehicle-pedestrian conflict through well marked

pedestrian/elderly citizen movement facilities; � road side parking space; � road signs and furniture provisions; � Safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians at crossings/intersections etc. � Road side storm water drainage systems; and � Tree plantation and landscaping along medians, traffic islands, round-

about etc. During construction phase, key traffic and transport related impacts with respect to Project Nirvana site are as below: � increased traffic volume on external network roads such as Paud Road and

Karve road; � incidents and accidents involving construction site bound vehicular fleet; � material transport trucks creating hazardous situations on external

network roads due to material spills and fugitive dust generation; � ensuring safe road network access to existing road users especially the

school going children and surrounding residential community; � increased load on local network roads within the site; � haphazard and indiscriminate road side parking and stopping of vehicles

along external and internal road networks; � avoiding incidents and accident prone spots near entry/exit gates; and � Ensuring free road access through demolition period for existing slum

dwellers. Discussions with project management team of KUL indicates that traffic movement is co-ordinated in consultation with local community and the school-going time for children are avoided to move in transport fleet vehicles and other heavy machineries. The community relationship team consisting of KUL staff and local community members take lead in safe movement of construction site bound traffic, especially within project site. As part of the EIA study done in 2008, traffic survey was conducted near the Project site at Paud Road. The traffic survey results indicate that about 14,381 vehicles ply on Paud road per day on both sides. The EIA study assessed the capacity of Paud road vis-à-vis peak hour traffic volume as per Indian Road Congress (IRC) specifications and found that the 2008 traffic volume levels are at 54.05% and 40.81% of available design capacity of Paud road on each side of the traffic. On the Law college road the 2008 traffic volume was at 34.72% of design capacity of the road. As the main access road still has capacity to bear


158

an increase in traffic volume during the construction phase of the project, congestion is not anticipated. During operational phase, no major impact on traffic and transport infrastructure is anticipated as the existing roads (Paud road and Karve road) and proposed transport infrastructure (DP road and HCMTR corridor) will be adequate enough to meet the increased traffic volume originating from Project Nirvana site. However, up keep and maintenance of road infrastructure including road surface, signs, furniture, islands, round-about, medians, landscaping and plantation is critical to effective and safe functioning of road infrastructure. Key impacts are summarised subsequently.

Table 6.15 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on Traffic and Transport




adequate primary and secondary road network

increased traffic volume on external network roads

Upkeep and maintenance of internal road infrastructure components

avoiding vehicle-pedestrian conflict

incidents and accidents involving construction site bound vehicular fleet

Project Nirvana site adding to traffic volume on existing and proposed road networks

road side parking space material transport trucks creating hazardous situations on external network roads

-

road signs and furniture provisions

ensuring safe road network access to existing road users especially the school going children

-

safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians at crossings/intersections

haphazard and indiscriminate road side parking and stopping of vehicles

-

Road side storm water drainage systems

avoiding incidents and accident prone spots

-

tree plantation and landscaping along medians, traffic islands, round-about

ensuring free road access through demolition period

-


The impact on traffic and transport infrastructure will be insignificant during construction phase and moderately beneficial during operational phase. Factors Significance – Planning



Context - Regional Local Duration - Medium Long Intensity - Minor Minor Overall - Moderate adverse Minor adverse


159

6.4.11 Health and Safety

Impacts

As per ADBs SPS 2009, health and safety aspect comprises of both occupational health and safety aspects and community health and safety aspects. The key requirement under ADBs SPS 2009 on occupational H&S aspect is providing a safe and healthy working environment for the site workers including protection from physical, chemical, biological, and radiological hazards. It warrants that an appropriate H&S management system comprising of following key elements are put in place:

� identifying and minimizing the causes of potential hazards to workers

through expert oversight; � providing preventive and protective measures; � providing appropriate equipment to minimize risks; � training workers; and � documenting and reporting occupational accidents, diseases, and

incidents; emergency prevention, preparedness, and response arrangements

The key requirement under ADBs SPS 2009 on community H&S aspects is to identify and assess the risks and ensure safety of affected communities during the entire project life cycle. Community H&S aspects also include potential exposure to both accidental and natural hazards. SPS 2009 requires project proponent to inform affected communities of significant potential hazards in a culturally appropriate manner and be prepared to respond to accidental and emergency situations. This preparation will include response planning document that addresses the training, resources, responsibilities, communications, procedures, and other aspects required to respond effectively to emergencies associated with project hazards. Appropriate information about emergency preparedness and response activities, resources, and responsibilities will be disclosed to affected communities. Notably, KUL has established an Integrated Management System (IMS) at its corporate office. The IMS incorporates all three certification standards and systems such as ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004 and OHSAS 18001:2007. In line with ISO systems, KUL has promulgated a Quality, Environment and OHS Policy since 1st Jan 2009. The QE&OHS Policy clearly states that KUL strives to prevent injury and occupational related illness to its people by adopting appropriate safety measures with training and latest technology. In this context, during planning phase, the key community H&S aspects that need to be integrated include the following:


160

� Architectural planning and design of both rehab and saleable buildings to integrate adequate sunlight and ventilation requirement to each of the individual flats, indoor air quality issues and noise resonance aspects;

� Mechanical (lifts) and electrical utilities (water pumps, transformer yards, MCB panel and metering rooms etc) planning and design to integrate safety precautions, procedures and fire proof systems.

Project has formulated a comprehensive fire fighting system and the salient features of its design include the following: � Underground fire water storage tank (separate for each building) with

baffle walls � Overhead water storage tank (for each building) and will be connected to

the wet riser through a booster pump with a non return valve and gate � Valve arrangements. � Automatic sprinkler system will be provided in the car parking areas � Fire pump, Booster pump, Sprinkler pump and Jockey pump

arrangements in the fire fighting system with adequate head and pressure � Power supply will be provided to fire fighting pumps on independent

circuit with one pump run on diesel. � Stand by pump of equal capacity will be provided for each building. � A sprinkler pump along with jockey pump will be provided for automatic

sprinkler system. � Alternate source of Power supply will be provided from a separate sub

station DG set. � Portable fire extinguishers such as: one (1) dry chemical powder type fire

extinguisher of 5 kgs capacity with wall mounting bracket having ISI certification mark and two buckets filled with dry, clean sand will be kept in electric meter room;

� 20 dry chemical powder type fire extinguishers of 5 kgs capacity having ISI certification mark and four buckets of dry, clean sand will be kept in the each car parking area.

� Manual fire alarm system will be provided with main control panel at ground floor and pill boxes and hooters at each floor level. The layout of fire alarm will be in accordance to relevant IS specifications

� Access for fire tenders will be through the 18 m wide road on the south of the plot layout

� Car parking will be restricted to stilted areas at ground level � Flat entrance and kitchen doors of each wing will be of solid core having

fire resistance of not less than half an hour (solid wood of 45mm thickness) � Electric cable shafts will not open in the staircase enclosure � Electric meter room will be at ground floor level and adequately

ventilated. Electric shafts will be sealed at each floor level with non combustible material such as vermiculite concrete. Inspection door for the shaft will have two hours fire resistance.

The fire fighting system has been designed is in compliance to Fire Safety guidelines of PMC. The system components will be inspected and certified by


161

Fire Safety Officers from Pune Municipal Corporation after installation after which the building occupancy certificate will be issued which is critical document to move slum dwellers into the new rehab tenements. Hence, fire related incidents and accidents anticipated can be well managed with minimal loss of life and property. During construction phase, the key H&S impacts anticipated include the following: � Health and hygiene issues at labour camp sites. � Occupational H&S issues at batching plant site, material storage and scrap

yards, onsite material testing laboratory, building construction sites (covering all activities such as (Clearing and grubbing, foundation excavation and construction, superstructure construction, electrical works, plumbing works, carpentry works, tiling works, painting works) and construction of infrastructural facilities and utilities.

� Community H&S issues at transit tenement site, utility relocation sites, demolition of cleared slum areas.

� Community H&S issues along road networks used by construction vehicle fleet.

� At demolition sites (of existing slum structures), presence of asbestos wastes (in the form of corrugated asbestos roofing sheets) could be a potential OHS hazard.

The typical occupational H&S risks and associated hazards at construction sites has been identified and presented as part of KULs IMS Manual (Refer OHS/501/Rev-1). The manual identifies about 30 hazard-risk scenarios based on processes and activities. About 20 work instructions have been formulated under KUL’s IMS to guide safe execution of various construction activities. KUL has also instituted auditing, reporting, training and documentation systems as part of its IMS pertaining OHS element. The community H&S issues anticipated during construction phase include the following:

� Health and hygiene issues of residents of transit tenements due to

following aspects: o Leaking sanitary pipes and fittings on buildings o Overflowing underground sewerage systems o Dumping solid waste and floor sweepings into sewerage

system manholes o Indiscriminate dumping of domestic solid waste o Indiscriminate spitting and urinating in open/public spaces o Maintenance of underground and over ground drinking water

tanks and integrity of supply systems including metering pits o Health and hygiene issues (clean drinking water, upkeep and

maintenance of washrooms/bathrooms, safe cooking habits, cleaning floors, washing clothes etc)


162

o Health impacts due to poor indoor air quality such as cooking without adequate ventilation using firewood or kerosene

� Exposure of transit tenement residents to fire hazards (due to electrical short circuiting, LPG cylinder blasts or other such incidents), electrical hazards and mechanical failure of lift machinery.

� Exposure to fugitive dust, electrical hazards, structural failure etc at demolition sites and utility relocation sites.

During operational phase, the key H&S issues could be the following: � Community H&S issues as highlighted above for transit tenements. � Occupational H&S issues during routine building repair and maintenance

such as plumbing works, electrical maintenance, lift maintenance, carpentry works, painting works and associated infrastructure utility/facility O&M activities.

Table 6.16 Summary of Anticipated Impacts on Health and Safety Aspects




Integrate adequate sunlight and ventilation requirement to individual flats, indoor air quality issues and noise resonance aspects;

Health and hygiene issues at labour camp sites

Community H&S issues at rehab buildings.

Mechanical and electrical utilities planning and design to integrate safety precautions and systems.

Occupational H&S issues at construction sites

Occupational H&S issues during routine building repair and maintenance

Community H&S issues at transit tenement site, utility relocation sites, demolition of cleared slum areas

At demolition sites, presence of asbestos wastes


The impact on H&S aspects will be minor adverse during both construction and operational phase. Factors Significance – Planning



Context - Local Local Duration - Medium Long Intensity - Minor Minor Overall - Minor adverse Minor adverse


163

6.4.12 Natural Disasters

Impacts

Among the natural disasters, earthquakes could be the potential disaster that could strike the project region as Pune City falls under Zone III as per seismic zone map for India prepared by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). Zone III is defined as a moderate risk zone having a maximum intensity of around VII on MSK scale. An analysis of historical earthquake incidents in Pune reveals that the city has experienced some moderate to many low-intensity earthquakes. None of the major earthquakes have originated in Pune City. Recent incidents of earthquake of low intensity were observed in the Katraj region near Pune in May, 2004 and another one in July 2008. Earthquake resistant design of building structures have been incorporated into Development Control Rules and SRA regulations. Regulatory permits and building plan approvals are issued only after the structural design satisfies the earthquake resistant design criteria defined in the NBC 2005. Though the project site is located on the foot hills with rolling topography, landslides are uncommon even during heavy monsoon season due to the rocky geological setting. Urban flooding is again not anticipated due to favourable topography of the project site. Fire hazard (due to electrical short circuiting or LPG cylinder blast) is one of the key emergency events anticipated in a typical residential and commercial building project. In this context, during planning phase, the key aspects to be integrated include: � Account for natural disaster and emergency situations probable at the

Project site and integrate them in master plan and infrastructure planning and design.

� Account for natural disaster and emergency situations in the architectural planning and structural design of both rehab and saleable buildings.

� Integrate fire prevention systems in the design of mechanical and electrical utilities.

� Review and integrate disaster management and emergency response guidelines issued by regulatory authorities.

During construction phase, the major emergency event could arise due to fire accidents, electrical short circuits/electrocution at construction sites and transit tenements. At transit tenements, additional emergency situations could arise due to major earthquake events leading to structural failure, LPG gas leak/blast, lift failure and emergency health situations of individual residents. During operation phase, emergency situations cited above for transit tenements will be applicable through the rest of project life cycle. Preventive


164

maintenance of fire systems, lift systems and electrical MCB is key to avoid emergency situations. Awareness programs and mock drills among resident community along with clear division of emergency management responsibilities among the residents’ building society management are critical to manage emergency situations.

Table 6.16 Summary of Anticipated Impacts due to Natural Disasters



Impacts - Operational Phase

Account for natural disaster and emergency situations in master plan and infrastructure planning and design.

fire accidents, electrical short circuits/electrocution at construction sites and transit tenements

fire accidents, electrical short circuits/electrocution

Account for natural disaster and emergency situations in the architectural planning and structural design of buildings.

major earthquake events leading to structural failure of transit buildings

major earthquake events leading to structural failure of buildings

Integrate fire prevention systems in the design of mechanical and electrical utilities.

LPG gas leak/blast, lift failure and emergency health situations of individual residents

LPG gas leak/blast, lift failure and emergency health situations of individual residents

Review and integrate disaster management and emergency response guidelines issued by regulatory authorities.

- -


The impact due to natural disasters and emergency scenarios will be minor adverse during construction phase and insignificant during operational phase. Factors Significance – Planning



Context - Medium Local Duration - Short Short Intensity - Minor Minor Overall - Minor adverse Insignificant

6.5 ASSESSMENT OF SOCIO-ECONOMIC IMPACTS

The proposed slum redevelopment project by KUL involves a multitude of stakeholders, each of whom would be required to co-ordinate and align together for the successful commissioning of the project. This alignment is likely to result in socio-economic impacts of differing magnitudes due to the prevalent nature and context of the area and location as previously discussed in the socio-economic baseline. Key parameters of the socio-economic environment have been merged to indicate the range of potential impacts from project activities. Where relevant, distinction between the construction and operations phase has also been made. Social impacts have been discussed under the following sub-sections:


165

� Physical displacement of ineligible tenements: o Impact on livelihoods, social networks; o Impacts on Vulnerable Households;

� Impact on livelihoods:

o Impacts on Commercial Structures; o Impacts on Income Generating Opportunities;

� Impact of in-situ rehabilitation:

o Shifting/Eviction of Families o Improvement in the Quality of Life; o Upgradation of Local Infrastructure.

� Impacts on Local Demography and Resources:

o Exponential Population Increase in the long-term; o Additional Pressure on Local Infrastructure; o Impact on adjacent land in the construction phase.

� Impact on community health & safety: o Community health & safety during construction; o Demolitions of Households; o Nuisance and Traffic Impacts;

� Local Economic Impacts;

o Creation of employment and procurement opportunities during construction;

o Escalation in land prices; o Income Restoration.

� Community Issues:

o Local Community Development; o Increase Community Dependence.

6.5.1 Physical Displacement of Ineligible Tenements

“Eligibility” of a slum dweller for Project Nirvana is determined by the ownership of the existing structure and his/her domicile in the census slum before or as on January 1st 1995. Those slum dwellers who do not meet this criterion as per the SRS are declared non-eligible and hence not eligible of the benefits under the SRS scheme. At present, the Annexure II survey by the Slum Rehabilitation Authority and the Pune Municipal Corporation is under progress. In addition to the SRA entitlements, KUL is also coming up with an ineligibility policy which would document the approach of dealing with the ineligibles. The subsequent figure discusses the number of tenements that are likely to be ineligible for in-situ rehabilitation under the SRS:


166

Figure 6.3 Estimates of Ineligible Tenements

*Source: KUL Overall, it is likely that approximately 25% of the total number of slum tenements is likely to be declared ineligible for rehabilitation in accordance to the government regulation of cut-off date as January 1st 1995. However, discussions with the SRA officials indicate that KUL is planning the Nirvana Hills Phase 2 project on the basis of a target of 5000 families that will be rehabilitated. Senior officials indicated that even if the Government of Maharashtra increases the eligibility cut-off to 1st January 2000, up to 500 slum dwellers are likely to be declared ineligible. There are plans in place to incorporate these ineligible households for rehabilitation through the Central Government low cost housing scheme of the “Rajeev Awaas Yojana” which is in its inception stage. However, as of now there are no definitive plans to accommodate the ineligibles in the proposed rehabilitation buildings at KUL’s own expense/initiative and individual negotiations or settlements with such households are already in progress.

Box 6.2 Residual Issues at Wadar Vasti

In this context, it should be noted that if families voluntarily agree to move out of the slum on the basis of a negotiated settlement, their physical displacement

0%10%20%30%40%50%60%70%80%90%

100%

Percentage

Wad

arva

sti

Kile

wad

i/In

dira

Park

Raje

ev G

andh

iPa

rk

Raut

wad

i

Han

uman

Nag

ar

Vas

ant N

agar

Tota

l

Name of Block

Non Eligible

Eligible

Under the first phase of the project which was carried out in the Wadar Vasti area, back in 2000, the erstwhile Megapolis Developers had already shifted 463 slum dwellers and 25 shops into eight rehabilitation towers. However as per the SRA scheme, there were about 8-10 non-eligible families who were still residing in slums inside the complex. KUL have over the past month or two managed to reach an agreement with all but three families. Around five (5) families from this area who have given conditional consent for their rehabilitation have been relocated temporarily to the transit building in Rajiv Gandhi park and two (2) families have been successfully rehabilitated into the Wadar Vasti rehabilitation buildings itself.


167

cannot be termed as involuntary. This issue/impact is discussed in further detail in the Rehabilitation Plan. Impact on the Vulnerable Households

Currently there is a lack of system/mechanism in place to trace/track/ monitor the status of the families/households that were rendered ineligible and hence not entitled to tenancy and other benefits. These categories of impacted families are likely to be most adversely impacted with eviction/separation form their established networks and accesses. There needs to be a process/mechanism in place to document/record and monitor these families and provide support in their coping mechanisms, in case they are facing difficulties.


In terms of significance, although physical displacement is likely to lead to other adverse impacts such as temporary disruption of livelihoods and loss of social networks, overall, the impact has been assessed to be moderate due to the existence of mechanisms by which negotiated settlements can be reached with slum dwellers.

Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Moderate Long-term Moderate Moderate

6.5.2 Livelihood Impacts

Consultations with slum dwellers indicate that the occupation and livelihood profile among the habitants and is dependent upon education levels, existing job opportunities in the area and the demand and supply of labour within the unorganized sector.

Impacts on Commercial Structures

It is understood that of the slum tenements awaiting rehabilitation, 78 structures are commercial, of which broad estimates indicate that more than 30-40% of these commercial tenements are likely to be ineligible for rehabilitation. Such a displacement is likely to cause adverse economic impacts on the structure owner as well as his/her dependents. Inspite of negotiated settlement with KUL, there are likely to be short to medium term income losses and potential business interruption risks for structures such as flour mills, tailoring, provision stores which were dependent upon the customer base provided by the slum community. Consultations with owners of commercial structures rehabilitated in Wadarvasti also indicate the following issues during the construction phase: � Commercial owners are given the option of opting for transit

arrangements to set-up shop or a monthly commercial rental allowance. In


168

case of the latter, there are known to be business and profit losses due to shifting/transition;

� For those that avail of rental allowance each month, the amount of rent for commercial structure is the same as that for residential, i.e. INR 7000/month. This is inadequate to rent out similar property in the nearby area and hence the owner prefers to live off the rent, thus leading to business interruption;

� The areas of commercial structures within rehabilitation buildings are generally less than 200 ft2 and depending upon the nature of activity, this area is inadequate to continue the earlier activity. This is the case with garages/mechanics as well as existing institutes that offer training, computer education etc.

During the operations phase, the rehabilitated commercial tenements are likely to experience an increase in their customer base and business due to an improved overall quality of life in the area. For instance, at Wadarvasti, discussions with an erstwhile provisions store owner brought out his expansion into a provision cum medical store thus leading to a direct increase in income and profits post rehabilitation. Significance of Impact

In terms of significance, the impacts on commercial structures can be summarised as follows:

Phase Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Planning Local Long-term Moderate Moderate Construction Local Medium Moderate Moderate Operations Local Long-term Major Major Beneficial

Impact on Income Generating Opportunities

The socio-economic survey indicates that average monthly incomes of households’ ranges from INR 1000 to over INR 20,000. Consultations indicate that the settlement pattern and socio-economic dynamic within the slum also creates the following stream of income-generation which are likely to get disrupted post-rehabilitation: � Loss of income from rent of additional storey or part of hut. This may be

up to the extent of 30 to 40% of all households in any slum society; � Discussions with the corporator indicated that there are approximately 25

individuals who illegally own over 15-20 tenements in the slums onsite and who earn income from the same through rent. These “slum lords” are likely to create a pressure group unless KUL manages to meet/exceed their expectations on the settlement;

� Loss of income for those employed with commercial stalls or galas which have been deemed ineligible.



169


6.5.3 Impacts from In-situ rehabilitation

As discussed in the report, Project Nirvana involves the in-site rehabilitation of approximately 5000 households into vertical buildings with modern amenities and apartments of 269 ft2 as per the guidelines of the Slum Rehabilitation Authority. Such large-scale slum rehabilitation has overall beneficial impacts on the quality of life and livelihoods of the slum dwellers; however, there are several aspects within the same that needs closer consideration. Shifting/Eviction of Families

The SRA scheme has safeguards in terms of provision of transit housing for the people who are likely to be impacted by the proposed development. The transit housing cannot accommodate non-eligible slum dwellers. Typically, the practice of building a transit house (mostly multi-storeyed) either within or close to the site area is practiced by the developers where the eligible households are provided temporary dwelling units and common infrastructure/service facilities (like sanitation, drinking water etc) on the basis of a lottery system. Issue like poor condition/services at these transit accommodation, long period (sometimes as long as 3-4 years) are common resulting in hardships to the impacted families.

However in the case of KUL, they propose to use two of their fully constructed towers as the transit building. People to be evacuated will be accommodated in this building temporarily until they are moved into their allotted apartments. Once a phase is rehabilitated, the next phase of evacuated families will occupy these buildings would be finally reconverted into rehabilitation building for the final phase of evicted households. The eligible households, as has been discussed above, are provided with a secure tenure during the transit/construction phase. However, the SRA scheme lacks provisions for the ineligibles (tenants, those residing after the cut off date, families residing on first and second floors etc) who have no safeguards to mitigate the adverse impact of shifting or physical displacement. Many a times this shifting/eviction results in direct impact on their livelihoods rendering them either vulnerable or exposed to the vulnerability of the situation. The other fall out of these is the adverse impacts on the overall family and their access to education, health care, social networks other support mechanisms.


Phase Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Planning Local Short-term Moderate Moderate Construction Local Medium Moderate Moderate


170

Operations Local Long-term Major Major Beneficial Severance of Community Bond and Impact on Social Networks

The community living within the mosaic of an old slum settlement of mostly Marathi families inherently possesses strong bonds and kinship due to their cohabitation and combined existence within the setting of the slum. The displacement of ineligible families as well as rehabilitation into organized housing may lead to the severance of these networks. In addition, the change in the dynamic from a flat settlement pattern to living behind closed doors is likely to entail adjustment in the social norms and way of life.



Improvement in the Quality of Life

The objective of the slum rehabilitation scheme that is being implemented through Project Nirvana is to bring about an improvement in the quality of life and several other human development indicators by the rehabilitation of slum dwellers living in sub-standard conditions into organized housing with security of tenure. Consultations with the local corporator as well as the local community across Indira Park, Kilewadi etc indicates that the slum dwellers perceive the following benefits: � Improved access to drinking water and sanitation and thus amelioration of

the health & hygiene conditions; � Increased potential of rehabilitated slum dwellers to avail of credit

facilities due to security of tenure; � Addition to existing income generating opportunities due to the parallel

development of the sale component. Significance of Impact

Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Local Long-term High Major Beneficial

Up-gradation of Local Infrastructure

SRA Guidelines make it mandatory for KUL to provide not only basic facilities and utilities required for housing but also amenities, such as community halls, temples, anganwadis etc. which can upgrade common resources. In addition, the key infrastructure benefits perceived by the local community during the operations phase of Project Nirvana are (a) improvement of access due to widening and strengthening of the existing ARAI road and the proposed DP Road; (b) Improved access to health and social infrastructure as the shifting of existing hospitals and municipal schools will also entail expansions in their


171

capacities; and (c) improved availability of water in the immediate vicinity of the site due to the proposed emphasis on rainwater harvesting, reusing treated water etc. Significance of Impact

Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Local Long-term High Major Beneficial

6.5.4 Impacts on Demographic Changes and Local Resources

The socio-economic baseline discusses that the slum tenement density in the project area, i.e. 55 tenements/hectare is significantly lower as compared to the city of Pune. At present, the total population on site (inclusive of the completed rehabilitation at Wadarvasti) is approximately 20,000 people. There will be a directly proportional increase in the population of the project area during the construction and operations phase. Increase in Population Density

Over the next five years, i.e. during the construction phase, it is expected that as KUL has adopted a strategy of in-situ transit arrangement to the extent possible, there will be a short-term increase in population which will include the construction workforce as well as the local community. This population in the operations phase is likely to see an exponential growth due to the sale of residential and commercial property in the open market. At present, there are no reasonable estimates of the total number of people likely to inhabit the project area subsequent to completion of construction activities. However, discussions with the project proponents and local authorities indicate that at least 75,000 people (i.e. a change in the baseline by over 200%) are likely to either reside or access (for commercial establishments) the area. Significance of Impact

In terms of significance, an exponential increase in population can lead to adverse impacts such as stress on local infrastructure but can also create significant economic benefits in the project area.

Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Moderate Long-term Major Major

Pressure on Local Infrastructure

Project Nirvana will need to incorporate a town planning approach in terms of infrastructure planning for key utilities such as power, water (including re-use) and sanitation/drainage networks. As discussed in the baseline, the current utilities onsite have been installed by the Pune Municipal Corporation to meet the requirements of the slum dwellers and have not taken into account long-term development of the area. In case there is no upgradation of existing systems, especially sewerage, power transmission lines etc. the rapidly


172

expanding population density will create significant pressures on the local infrastructure and may become unsustainable in the long-run. Significance of Impact

Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Moderate Long-term Major Major

Impact on Adjacent Land in the Construction Phase

In the absence of adequate management systems, some of the potential impacts on adjacent land include: � Typically, construction activities can temporarily impact the land

immediately adjacent to the existing site area if excavated soil or other material is haphazardly stored;

� There may also be issues of community conflict if private lands of ARAI or even adjacent slums are accessed for temporary storage or usage without formal permission; and

� The prevalence of economic opportunities could attract several businessmen, workers in search of employment and other such community which may lead to encroachment on the existing land in the immediate vicinity.

For Project Nirvana, the significance of such impacts is likely to be minor due to the adequacy of existing land availability to contain any major construction activity. However, adjacent land is likely to be impacted during the construction of the access road as well as transmission lines. Significance of Impact

Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Local Medium-term Low Minor

6.5.5 Community Health & Safety

Influx of Workers during the Construction Phase

The construction phase for Project Nirvana began in March 2011 (with the construction activities near Kilewadi area and continuing construction of the sale component at Wadarvasti) and is likely to carry on up to March 2016. Peak construction period is likely to last for over 3 years which is likely to see around 700 to 1500 construction workers to be deployed project site. Construction workers will be sourced by contractors engaged in foundation, civil works and other jobs and are likely to include requirement for unskilled, semi-skilled and skilled workforce. Labour camps on site are being managed by respective EPC Contractors who are responsible for the construction of temporary labour camps and provide the workers with water supply, electricity, sanitary facilities, medical aid and other basic amenities. Due to the proximity of the site to nearby slum areas, if


173

the contracted labourers are not adequately managed, there may be adverse impacts to the local community. The influx of migrant workers in the short to medium term is likely to have the following risks: � Pressure on key local infrastructure such as water, healthcare, electricity; � Spread of communicable diseases, especially sexually transmitted

diseases, which accompany many major constructions; � Lack of hygiene and adequate sanitation facilities would create health

ailments related to food poisoning or diseases like malaria, viral fever, gastroenteritis which could spread within the community; and

� Risk of labourers (especially migrant) encroaching upon land in the adjoining slum area.


Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Local Short-term Moderate Moderate

In spite of the risks from influx of migrant workers, there are also positive effects which are likely to benefit the local community in the immediate vicinity of the project area: � There would be sub-contractors or casual labourers who are typically

“camp followers” who would find their own accommodation in adjoining and existing slums. This leads to short-term income generating opportunities;

� Short-term petty business opportunities targeted to the labour camps; � Increase in daily wage rates for labour, and an enhancement of local skills

and skill sets through interaction of local labourers with the skilled migrant workers.


Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Medium Short-term Moderate Moderate

Beneficial Demolition of households

As mentioned earlier, KUL plans to rehabilitate the entire area in phases and their plan of operation is to immediately demolish those hutments whose families have signed the agreement. Therefore, the demolition of hutments would take place in rather haphazard manner. This might result in the existence of demolished structures in between the settlement areas. This will pose a significant health and safety risk to the families who are yet to evacuate from that area. The resulting debris will especially be a safety risk especially as roofing sheets are known to contain potential asbestos containing material which in a friable state is extremely dangerous to the respiratory system.


174


Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Medium Medium-term Moderate Moderate

Nuisance Impacts and Traffic Movements

As the construction of transit accommodation as well as rehabilitation buildings are in phases, the construction activity could lead to increased nuisance level from air emissions and noise due to transportation of material and equipment as well as labourers. The construction activity will also result in water logging in mud pockets which will then become the fertile breeding ground for mosquitoes and eventually lead to diseases like malaria. In construction sites, there is an apparent degradation of the water and air quality and therefore greater vigilance have to be maintained by the KUL authorities to prevent any disease outbreaks. There is also likely to be temporary traffic impacts like accidents, loss of property, diversions or blockage of access etc due to narrow roads. Significance of Impact


6.5.6 Impacts to the Local Economy

Creation of employment and procurement opportunities

Project Nirvana is likely to create the following direct and indirect employment opportunities: � Civil works for the rehabilitation buildings may require local

subcontractors and unskilled labour from the local area; � Self- employment options for individuals possessing vocational or

technical training skills like electricians, welders, fitters etc, which are likely to be sourced locally;

� Project Nirvana and associated construction of the sale building will eventually lead to permanent job opportunities in the organized and unorganized sector. There is likely to be increased demand for security, kitchen help, need for drivers etc;

� A multiplier effect will be felt on the creation of indirect employment through the local community establishing small shops like tea stalls, supply of intermediate raw materials, repair outlets, hardware stores etc. However, these are likely to be temporary.


Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Local Medium-term Moderate Moderate


175

Beneficial Escalation of Land Prices

Project Nirvana is being developed in the model of a township project wherein the slum rehabilitation will be integrated with commercial and residential real estate as well as other amenities and welfare facilities. The project area is centrally located amid a neighbourhood comprising of educational institutes and limited industrial development thus making it a prime location. Discussions with the local corporator indicate that there has been a trend in rise of land values in anticipation of the project and associated development in the immediate vicinity. The adjoining slum areas (not included in the scheme) have seen buying and selling of structures as well as increase in rental values, most of which is manipulated by existing slum lords and property brokers. Significance of Impact


Income Restoration

In the long-term, the gradual increase in the occupation of residential and commercial structures is likely to lead to creation of additional income-generation opportunities through potential for markets, vocational centres etc. all of which are particular to a township project. In addition, the local economy is likely to be cushioned by the post-construction boom and bust effect due to the “phased approach in development” and simultaneous construction of the rehabilitation and sale component. The local economy is likely to be strengthened as a result. Significance of Impact


Beneficial

6.5.7 Community Issues and Expectations

Community Dependence

The experience of the rehabilitation of Wadarvasti as well as the ongoing activities at the transit arrangement suggest that the community expects KUL to offer significant support in terms of maintenance in the post-construction phase. Legally, the defect liability period of the builder, in accordance to the SRA guidelines is 3 years, however, the corporator has insisted that KUL commit to at least 10 years of defect liability wherein the cooperative society would need to be managed and the builder would need to provide for a corpus fund per tenement to cover this agreement. Such an agreement is likely


176

to create dependence of the cooperative society on the project proponent and it is not sustainable in the long-run. Significance of Impact

Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Local Medium-term Long-term Moderate

Community Development in the Construction and Operations Phase

The project proponents are likely to undertake community development activities which would aim at improving livelihoods and social infrastructure networks of the local community. NGOs and Community Based Organizations, such as Vatsalya, are likely to be involved in health camps, educational literacy initiatives and even plantation activities in the hill-top hill-slope area. In addition, the amenities that are mandated by the slum dwellers can be used by existing CBOs, mahila mandals to improve community networks and activities. Significance of Impact

Context Duration Intensity Overall Impact Local Medium-term Moderate Moderate

Beneficial


177

Box 6.3 A perspective on the challenges ahead

Subsequent to the construction phase, all eligible families will be rehabilitation into r allotted apartments from the transit buildings. These slum dwellers are then required to register their societies with 11 to 15 members and select a chief promoter. One of the biggest challenges to KUL during the implementation will be to bring about an alignment and integration of formal and informal systems of functioning of the various stakeholder groups. These include but are not limited to: � Informal grievance redressal systems within a slum society; � Strong internal systems within a slum to provide for safeguards to any ineligible

households; � Power dynamics and influence of external agents like the local municipal corporator; � The ways adopted by the industry to deal with or manage the local community issues

historically; � The guidelines as proposed by the Slum Rehabilitation Authority; � KUL’s own systems which have been successfully applied to other SRS projects; and � The required systems by the Lenders. Experience of slum redevelopment projects in other parts of Pune as well as a first-hand observation of the completed buildings at Phase I indicate that there is a tendency of the slum community to carry on the same “habits” and way of living from their earlier settlements into their rehabilitation units. This implies that there may not be a real time change in the overall standard of living in terms of hygiene and sanitation practices. Secondly, there is a risk to the overall upkeep and maintenance of the society. In such a scenario the outcomes and objectives a slum redevelopment scheme, in terms of helping the slum community to avail of indirect opportunities to enhance their living conditions and income generating capacities, are diluted and slum communities can go back to living in their old ways. The slum dwellers will be exposed to a different lifestyle once they are rehabilitated. To ensure a successful orientation to the new lifestyle, it is absolutely essential that KUL arranges the concerned vendors for activities like solid waste management, plumbing and electricity works, lift maintenance, grievance redressal mechanisms etc. Such support is essential to ensure that the rehabilitated population do not slip away into old practices and maintain basic hygiene factors.

Annex 1

Ownership related Details of the land

Delivering sustainable solutions in a more competitive world

Environmental and Social Management Plan for Project Nirvana: Pune, India Final Report

March 2012

www.erm.com


FINAL REPORT


Environmental and Social Management Plan for Project Nirvana: Pune, India

23 March 2012 Reference : I8390

Prepared by:

Rutuja Tendolkar Consultant

Reviewed & Approved by:

Neena Singh Partner

This report has been prepared by ERM India Private Limited, with all reasonable skill, care and diligence within the terms of the Contract with the client, incorporating our General Terms and Conditions of Business and taking account of the resources devoted to it by agreement with the client.

We disclaim any responsibility to the client and others in respect of any matters outside the scope of the above.

This report is confidential to the client and we accept no responsibility of whatsoever nature to third parties to whom this report, or any part thereof, is made known. Any such party relies on the report at their own risk.

ABBREVIATIONS ADB Asian Development Bank ADB SPS Safeguards Policy Statement By ADB ARAI Automotive Research Association Of India BOD Biological Oxygen Demand CAG Community Audit Group CBOs Community Building Organisations CDGR Community Disclosure and Grievance Redressal CLO Community Liasion Officers CO Carbon Monoxide CPCB Central Pollution Control Board CRO Community Relations Officer CRT Community Relations Team CTE The Consent To Establish CTO Consent To Operate DEOC District Emergency Operation Centre EC Environmental Clearance ECC Emergency Control Centre EHS Environmental Health And Safety EP Rules Environment Protection Rules EPC Engineering, Procurement and Construction ERM Environmental Resources Management Pvt Ltd ESIA Environmental And Social Impact Assessment ESMP Environmental And Social Management Plan FSI Floor Space Index GAP Gender Action Plan GRCO Grievance Redressal Consultation Officer GSDA Groundwater Survey and Development Agency HC Hydrocarbons HCMTR High Capacity Mass Transport Route IFC International Finance Corporation KUL Kumar Sinew Urban Developers Limited LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas MIS Management Information Systems MoEF Ministry Of Environment And Forests MPCB Maharashtra Pollution Control Board NAAQS National Air Ambient Air Quality Standards NDZ No-Development Zones NGO Non-Governmental Organisation NOx Oxides Of Nitrogen NSDF National Slum Dwellers Federation O&M Operation And Maintenance OHS Occupation Health And Safety PERT Program Evaluation and Review Technique PMC Pune Municipal Corporation

PPE Personal Protection Equipment PWD Public Works Department RAP Resettlement Action Plan RMP Risk Assessment Plan RSPM Respiratory Suspended Particulate Matter RTI Right to Information SEAC State Level Expert Appraisal Committee SEIAA State Environment Impact Assessment Authority SOx Oxides of Sulphur SPM Suspended Particulate Matter (), SRA Slum Rehabilitation Authority SRS Slum Rehabilitation Scheme STP Sewage Treatment Plants TDR Transferable Development Rights VOCs Volatile Organic Compounds

Contents

1 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 1

1.2 IMPLEMENTATION MECHANISMS FOR THE ESMP 211.2.1 Organizational Roles and Responsibilities 211.2.2 Inspection Monitoring and Audit 231.2.3 Documentation and Record Keeping 241.2.4 Community Disclosure and Grievance Redressal 251.2.5 Capacity Building and Training 251.3 BUDGETARY ALLOCATION AND TIMELINES 26

ERM KUMAR SINEW URBAN DEVELOPERS LIMITED-ESMP PROJECT # I 8390 / 0138632 FEBRUARY 2012

1

1 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

The Nirvana Hills Phase II Project (Project Nirvana); to be developed on Survey Number 44/1, Erandwane in the city of Pune; will be constructed over a 5 year period and will broadly comprise of a rehabilitation component, a sales component as well as associated utilities and infrastructure facilities. In accordance to the ADB SPS 2009 as well as the IFC Performance Standards (2006), the impacts over the project lifecycle need to be adequately mitigated and managed through an Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP). The project proponents will need to work together with their contractors, state government and local bodies as well as the local community to achieve a sustainable housing project. This section illustrates a site-specific ESMP to mitigate significant adverse environmental and social impacts that are identified for the planning, construction and operations phase in the ESIA. The ESMP would help improve the supportive capacity of the impact area and also preserve the assimilative capacity of the impacted environmental and social baseline. KUL is in the process of formulating the critical elements of a Social and Environmental Management System which include the following:

� An EHS and Construction Management Plan and Manual applicable to EPC Contractors;

� A Community Relations set-up to cover the planning, transit and shifting phase for slum dwellers and also to address any grievances;

� A corporate strategy on KUL’s position on slum rehabilitation and maximizing the benefits thereof.

The ESMP illustrated in Table 1.1 covers mitigation measures that are specific to key (major and moderate) social and environmental impacts over the pre-construction, construction and operations phase of the project lifecycle. To illustrate, the ESMP in the construction phase will aim at controlling the pollution at source wherever possible with available and affordable technology. This section also provides linkages to specific management plans (sub-plans):

� Annex A: Demolition Management Plan; � Annex B: Labour Management Plan; � Annex C: Stakeholder Engagement Plan; � Annex D: Grievance Redressal Plan; � Annex E: Gender Action Plan; � Annex F: Risk Management Plan; and � KUL Rehabilitation Plan (separate document).

The ESMP concludes with an outline of the key institutional arrangements, budget, timelines and a monitoring & evaluation plan.

ERM KUMAR SINEW URBAN DEVELOPERS LIMITED-ESMP PROJECT # I 8390 / 0138632 MARCH 2012

2

Table 1.1 Environmental and Social Management Plan for Project Nirvana

S. No Issues Suggested Mitigation Measures Monitoring/Resource and Training Requirements Management Responsibility

1 Planning Phase 1.1 Regulatory approvals

and clearances � Ensure regulatory clearances and approvals (such as SRA,

MPCB, SEIAA, PMC, Fire Office, Lift Inspectorate etc.) are applied and received well in time of planned construction schedule that is planned in five (5) phases.

� Integrate all the regulatory clearances and approvals (covering major to minor ones) schedule in the project PERT chart (a legal register) with flexible deadlines without affecting the overall project schedule;

� Monitor the PERT chart committed dates for applying and obtaining all regulatory clearances and approvals covering major to minor ones and local to national regulators, if any.

� Environmental and Social Manager will need to train a representative on various applicable regulations and clearances; regulatory systems and procedures; supporting documents; timelines; regulatory offices etc. at least once a year.

Project Director/ EHS and Community Relations Team of KUL

1.2 Action Plan for Rehabilitation of Slum Dwellers

� Adopt the Entitlement Framework and Institutional Arrangements indicated in the Rehabilitation Plan to draft an Action Plan for managing the slum rehabilitation process;

� Develop a Corporate Strategy/Policy on Displacement of Non-eligible slum dwellers on the basis of the recommendations suggested in the Rehabilitation Plan.

� KUL Staff dealing with Community Relations to obtain training on the essential elements of the Rehabilitation Plan and for operationalizing the monitoring indicators;

� Outcomes of the rehabilitation process will need to be monitored internally every quarter and externally once every six months over the next 3 years and yearly for the next 2 years.

Project Director/Community Relations Team

1.3 Meet the commitments made to slum community

� Formulate and maintain a Commitment Register that manages to track all the commitments made to individual slum families and collectively to the slum community resettled under the project.

� Commitment Register can be managed through the Stakeholder Engagement and Grievance Redressal Plan

� Subject the commitment register to internal and external auditing systems

Project Director/ EHS and Community Relations Team of KUL

1.4 Displacement of ineligible families

� KUL has committed to rehabilitation of ineligible families into Rajeev Awaas Yojana;

� Ineligible slum dwellers should be compensated as outlined in the Rehabilitation Plan;

� Ineligible slum dwellers should be facilitated with provisions for transit accommodation as well as relocation support.

� Subject the shifting/compensation and relocation and rehabilitation process to internal and external auditing systems

Community Relations Team of KUL

1.5 Locate STPs, Solid waste segregation centres and composting yards away

� Review the locations and designs identified for siting foul smell generating amenities (if not properly maintained) such as STPs, Solid waste segregation centres and composting

� Review the planning and design efforts undertaken to avoid foul smell affecting downwind sensitive receptors;

Project Director/ Project Layout Planners and


3


from sensitive receptors yards vis-à-vis sensitive receptors such as schools, hospitals and residences (both inside and outside project premise).

� Predominant wind direction at the site seems to be towards west (north-west) and any sensitive receptor on western side will be impacted if appropriate mitigation strategies are not integrated in the planning phase.

� Maintaining maximum physical distance possible between the source and the receptor; putting up natural barriers in the form of trees on upwind and down wind sides or plain walls on upwind side; constructing the amenities fully or partially underground etc could be the potential mitigation strategies.

Architects

1.6 Soil and water contamination

� To avoid soil and water contamination issues at STP design the waste water holding tanks and sludge storage rooms leak or seep proof with secondary containment, if possible.

� At compost yard, transformer room and storage room (where chemicals, paints, solvents, oil, grease, fossil fuel and other hazardous materials are to be stored during O&M phase) design the floors to be leak or seep proof with bunds on all sides and secondary containment, if possible.

� Provide effective storm water drains all around such facilities to prevent storm water contamination.

� Review the planning and design efforts undertaken to avoid soil and water contamination at the facilities mentioned here.

� Train the KUL staff responsible for designing these facilities and preparing construction drawings about soil and water contamination issues, once in a year.

Project Director/ EHS Team of KUL

1.7 Rainwater harvesting and ground water recharge

� Project has proposals to implement roof top rainwater harvesting.

� As specified in Environmental Clearance issued by SEIAA, engage with State Groundwater Survey and Development Agency (GSDA) to identify potential groundwater recharge zones and implement recharge measures especially on hill top hill slope areas within the site.

� The Project has a favourable topography and best suited to source rain water and storm water for project purposes.

� Review the planning and design efforts undertaken to enhance water harvesting at site in consultation with GSDA as directed by SEIAA

� Train the KUL designers and architects responsible for designing water harvesting facilities about the latest techniques and site conditions once in a year.

� Train the Housing Societies on maintenance of such structures.


1.8 Enhance ecological environment

� Project has integrated proposals to create landscaped spaces, parks and gardens to add to poor ecological environment prevailing at the site.

� Additionally, plant trees to form dense vegetative screen all along the proposed DP road and HCMTR (which bifurcates the site) on either side to protect the residents from pollution that would emanate from these transport corridors in future.

� Record and document the ecological enhancement measures undertaken by the Project on a monthly or half-yearly basis

� Document the number of trees planted and survival rates. Subject the documentation and implementation to internal and external auditing systems.



4


� In consultation and approval of SRA, PMC and Forest Department, undertake plantation on hill top hill slope areas where no development is permitted.

1.9 Sustainable resource management

� Project has integrated many sustainable resource management initiatives into project design.

� In the rehab buildings, the cost of maintenance of buildings and common utilities per flat owner is the critical factor in sustaining the quality of life. It will be prudent to review and include as many resource conservation measures (water, energy, waste etc) as possible in the rehab building design, construction and operation.

� Subject the rehab building designs to PMCs Eco-housing certification program

� Record and document the sustainable resource management measures undertaken by the Project specifically for rehab buildings.

� Submit the rehab building design, construction and operation proposals under PMC Eco-housing certification program

� Train the KUL designers and architects responsible for sustainable designs about the latest technologies available for resource conservation all through project life cycle and green building certification systems, once in a year

� Train housing societies in basic resource conservation including energy and water. Explore options to incentivise societies on good resource management.

Project Director/ EHS Team of KUL with support form an NGO/consultancy partner.

1.10 Displacement of Cultural Environment

� Undertake slum community consultations covering all religious groups and sections over religious structure re-building proposals.

� Disclose religious structure redevelopment plans with local community to placate any misgivings among various religious groups at the early stage of project life cycle.

� Involve community in the layout and architectural design of religious structures

� Obtain consent for relocation of locally significant religious structures.

� Verify the community consent for each of the religious structure proposed for demolition/relocation.

� As part of internal/external auditing systems, take community stakeholders feedback on the process adopted by KUL

� Train the Community Relationship Team, Project Construction Management Team and Contractors responsible for project implementation about the cultural issues, sensitivities and the methods to deal with them once in a year preferably before construction phase starts.

Project Director/ CR Team of KUL

1.11 Internal road layout � Design internal road layout with following features: � Provide adequate primary and secondary road network

access to all buildings and amenities; � Avoid vehicle-pedestrian conflict through well marked

pedestrian/elderly citizen movement facilities; � Provide road side parking space;

� Verify the internal road designs and drawings and other related proposals for compliance.

Project Director/ Project Layout Planners and Architects


5


� Provide road signs and road furniture; � Plan for safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians at

crossings/intersections etc. � Provide road side storm water drainage systems; and � Undertake tree plantation and landscaping along

medians, traffic islands, round-about etc. 1.12 Community H&S � Architectural planning and design of both rehab and saleable

buildings to integrate: adequate sunlight and cross ventilation requirement to each of the individual flats and noise resonance aspects

� Mechanical (lifts) and electrical utilities (water pumps, transformer yards, MCB panel and metering rooms etc) planning and design to integrate safety precautions, procedures and fire proof systems.

� Verify the architectural designs and drawings of individual rehab buildings

� Verify the safety provisions built into the mechanical and electrical utilities that are to be operated by slum community during O&M phase

� Train the KUL designers and architects responsible for electrical and mechanical utility designs about the latest systems and technologies available for ensuring health and safety of users all through the project life cycle, once in a year


1.13 Disaster Management and Emergency response

� Account for natural disaster (such as earthquakes) and emergency situations (fire accidents) in master plan and infrastructure planning and design.

� Account for natural disaster (such as earthquakes) and emergency situations (fire accidents) in the architectural planning and structural design of each rehab buildings.

� Integrate fire prevention systems in the design of mechanical and electrical utilities.

� Review and integrate disaster management and emergency response guidelines issued by regulatory authorities.

� Verify the disaster management and emergency response systems integrated in the planning and design of entire re-development and individual rehab buildings.

� Train the KUL designers and architects about the disaster management and emergency response issues that needs to be integrated in residential and commercial building design and development, once in a year.


1.14 Community participation

� Regularly engage and consult the slum dwellers and/or their nominated representatives like the Housing Societies on the planning and design aspects of the project;

� Facilitate discussion forums among housing societies and provide periodic training.

� Encourage the formation of a Community Audit Group to regularly meet senior management/inspect site etc.

� Record all consultations and meetings with communities and review actions/commitments through the Commitments Register;


1.15 Livelihood Impacts � Ensure that commercial structures are provided with rental allowance/transitional support in excess of the rate provided to residential structures and adequate to allow them to

� Review income indicators obtained through the socio-economic survey at least once every quarter;

� In case there are families with increased



6


continue their business; � Assist commercial owners in finding transit spaces and

include them to the extent possible in KUL’s local procurement strategy for labour camps etc;

� Encourage women to form Self-Help Groups and assist these groups in undertaking any self-employment activities which can be coordinated during the transition phase.

vulnerabilities due to income disruption, provide priority support for some period. Document and track such support.

1.16 Shifting of Families and Transit Accommodation

� Any families identified as vulnerable should be given first preference for shifting into transit accommodation;

� Transit accommodation should be located in-situ to the extent feasible or within an immediate vicinity of 2-3 km;

� Ensure that the specifications of the Demolition Plan and the Rehabilitation Plan vis-à-vis shifting are adhered to

� Shifting processes should be subjected to the Community Audit Group that has to be constituted;

� Ensure monitoring as suggested in the Demolitions Plan and the Rehabilitation Plan.

EHS and Community Relations Team of KUL

2 Construction Phase 2.1 Demolition of Structures � Dust generated to be arrested within the site through

sprinkling; � All health and safety precautions to be taken prior to

demolition activities; � Workers should be provided with adequate PPE to ensure no

exposure to friable potentially asbestos containing material; � Debris to store carefully for use in backfilling later; � Community to ensure collection of salvageable material from

the site. � Adequate disposal of hazardous wastes such as roofing sheet

with asbestos containing material to a secured landfill site at Ranjangaon near Pune.

� Ensure adequate debris management � Prior information provided � Adequate opportunity to salvage material to the dwelling

owners; � Any damages to neighbouring units avoided.

� Handle complaints efficiently and promptly; � Demolition Procedures to be subject to

Community Audit Group; � Ensure adequate documentation of the demolition

process in terms of consent for demolition, retrieval of salvageable material etc;

� Training of personnel to ensure mitigation of health & safety risks during demolition;

� Maintenance of records for disposal of asbestos containing roofing sheets in prescribed format as provided by the Haz Waste Rules, 2008.

Note: The Maharashtra State Pollution Control Board has designated M/s. Maharashtra Enviro Power Ltd for common haz waste disposal at Ranjangaon near Pune. The site has an area of approximately 30 hectares with a capacity of Sanitary Land Fill of 60,000 MT/year and incineration of 3 tonnes per hour.

EPC Contractor and Community Relations Team of KUL

2.2 Landuse, vegetation and landscaping

� Follow up of overall architecture and landscaping design of the proposed project;

� Transplantation of the existing trees required to be dislocated

� Ensure documentation of number of trees, approvals from PMC etc;

� Consult a local ecologist to assist in the

EHS Team and EPC Contractor


7


for the project in the green areas; � Trees cut felling to be avoided wherever possible; � Prior approval for tree felling to be obtained; � Most of the trees to be transplanted within the project site.

landscaping and botanical garden design.

2.3 Site Clearance, Topography and Drainage Aspects

� Disturbance to land surface contours to be kept to minimum due to sensitivity of hill-top-hill slope land. Site contour levels to be brought to the levels of the surroundings;

� Adequate drains and slopes to be laid across the project area prior to start of excavation work to ensuring adequate cross drainage for quick evacuation of catchment water;

� Construct diversion dykes to channel runoff around the excavated site to avoid surface runoff of excavated materials;

� In areas where grass or any form of vegetation is found, efforts to conserve topsoil shall be undertaken;

� Segregated topsoil shall be stored in stockpiles of 1 to 1.25-m height. The stockpiles shall be located such that disturbance to construction work is minimal.

� Provisions should be clearly described in the contract of the EPC Contractors;

� Monitoring of these provisions on a monthly basis.


2.4 Construction material sourcing, transport and storage

� Sourcing of construction material should be from legally compliant vendors. A copy of currently valid licenses/ permits/ consent issued to construction material supplier should be obtained as part of office records;

� During transportation of construction materials to construction site, vehicles engaged shall not create hazardous condition on the network roads en route to site due to over speeding or material spills. No dust generation from loaded trucks; sand or water spilling all along the network roads will be permitted;

� Fugitive dust generation from transport vehicles will not be allowed. All material transport trucks will be covered effectively with tarpaulin sheets;

� Material storage will be in only designated, least E&S sensitive locations; Material washout during heavy rains; blockage of natural drainage systems; erosion and sedimentation of construction materials downstream will be prevented by taking appropriate control measures.

� Verify the licenses, permits and consents issued to construction material supplier at least once in 6 months;

� Randomly inspect the vehicles used for transporting construction materials to see if they are complying to mitigation measures recommended here;

� Undertake training on E&S aspects covered in the mitigation plan for constructing internal access roads at least once during inception of contract work

EHS Team


8


2.5 Engaging Construction Workers

� Establish a list of all construction workers, identity proof, contact details etc and any other provisions under the Building and Other Construction Workers Act and Inter-state Migrant Workers Act;

� Ensure provisions for local employment and contracting within the slum community to the extent feasible.

� Ensure the training and applicability of such provisions within the contractor’s agreement;

� Ensure adequate compliance of all labour legislations through the PERT Chart that has to be maintained through the project lifecycle

� A regular monitoring of contractors on compliance as well as good practice.

EHS Team and Community Relations Team

2.6 Labour Camp Management

� Camp size kept as small as possible and to be contained within the present quarry location

� Maximum number of unskilled labours to be employed from local areas having their residences in the nearby areas;

� Construction of toilet facilities and sewage collection system for disposal;

� Five septic tanks each catering to 300 users provided at the construction site, as per the specifications given in IS 2470 1995 Part I and Part II.;

� The contractors shall instruct all staff to use the ablution facilities and under no circumstances shall indiscriminate excretion and urinating be allowed other than in the provided facilities;

� Arrangements for first aid; � Arrangement for kitchen waste disposal- identify locations

for establishing humus pits, which can be covered with soil for anaerobic composting;

� Awareness programmes on AIDS etc.; � The site shall be kept visually and aesthetically pleasing,

especially in and around the campsite. The workforce shall also be sensitized about health issues.

� Develop and Monitor a Labour Camp Inspection Checklist at least once a week;

� Labour Camps should be subject to training on health & safety, other aspects at least once a week;

� Ensure adequate training and monitoring as per the Labour Management Plan.


2.7 Concrete Batching Plants � Obtain permits from MPCB regarding installation of batching plant;

� Water sourcing must be in compliance of the regulations; � Procurement of stone aggregates and sand shall be from

licensed/ government authorised sources only; � Wind-borne erosion shall be prevented by sprinkling water

on the surface of stockpiles; � wastewater shall be collected at point and discharged into an

� Obtaining license from concerned authority; � Documentation of air quality, noise barriers etc; � Effective treatment and reuse systems put in place

to achieve zero discharge; � Good Practices and measures adopted near cement

storage and mixing sections; � Provision of PPEs to staff and workers and

training on the use of the same;



9


impermeable settling pond where minimum retention time of 30minutes shall be achieved. The settling pond outlet water shall be reused in process or dust control applications suitably;

� The artificial barriers in the form of plantation, landforms, GI sheet walls, material stockpiles etc around the process machinery will dampen noise generation to greater extent ;

� Where possible waste concrete should be used for construction purposes at the Batching Plant and Casting yard or project site

� Compliant to NAAQS, Noise standards and waste water disposal standards

2.8 Utility Shifting especially power lines, sewer lines and municipal water supply system

� Ensure minimum nuisance/interruption to communities that do not need to be shifted (such as Rautwadi, Hanuman Nagar etc) as they are mostly on hill top-hill slope land;

� Utility services that need to be relocated or shifted from project site shall be estimated and mapped during project preparation stage itself;

� During shifting, drop in service quality shall be monitored by KUL. Eventualities such as water pipeline contamination, sewage wastewater flooding/ponding, electrical cable leaks and associated accidents shall be averted by monitoring the utility shifting work

Utility shifting work contract shall be under the direct supervision and control of concerned service agency and KUL. KUL shall ensure that agreed time schedule is followed and any eventualities if occurs shall be brought to the notice of concerned utility agency.

Planning Team, EHS Team

2.9 Air Quality Impacts � Dust generating activities to be avoided in conditions of high wind (particularly during summer season) and covers to be provided for loose construction material at construction site;

� Trucks/ dumpers to be covered by tarpaulin sheets during off site transportation of friable construction materials and spoil;

� Surfaced roads to be cleaned and un-surfaced roads will be stabilized to reduce offsite transport of soils and avoid dust generation;

� Diesel generators meant for emergency power requirement to be optimally operated and regularly maintained so as to ensure that emissions from fuel combustion remain at design levels. Also to have appropriate stack height as per the MPCB guidelines;

� Machinery to be turned off when not in use;

� Air monitoring shall be taken up time to time by appropriate external monitoring agency;

� Carryout vehicle pollution check programme at regular intervals

� Once a month monitoring (during construction phase) at three locations on the boundary of the premises for SPM, RPM, SO2, NOx, CO & HC

� Daily audit by Construction Supervisors and Weekly audit by internal team of KUL



10


� Housekeeping of the area to be maintained by deputing sweepers to remove dirt/debris from the floors/sites on daily basis;

� Paints, polishes, building fittings and flooring material etc. to be procured carefully to minimize emission of VOCs;

2.10 Surface and Ground Water Quality

� Sufficient and suitable toilet facilities for workers to be maintained for proper standards of hygiene (done during phase I);

� Five septic tanks each catering to 300 users will be provided at the construction site as per the specifications given in IS 2470 1995 Part I and Part II (done during phase I);

� Bund to be provided around excavated soil or loose construction material to prevent runoff to nearly water bodies;

� Storage area to be kept away from the storm water to prevent any wash away;

� All the debris resulting from construction activities to be removed from the site on regular basis to prevent their runoff.

Quarterly monitoring of surface and ground water quality (to check any contamination) for parameters specified under Schedule VI of Environment Protection Rules, 1986. Depending on method of disposal (public sewers or inland water sources), key parameters such as SS, O&G, Ammonical Nitrogen, BOD, SS and heavy metals shall be monitored against Schedule VI of Environment Protection Rules, 1986 standards.


2.11 Groundwater Resources � In case groundwater is to used for construction purposes, ensure approvals from groundwater authority prior to initiation of construction activities;

� Water usage to be optimised by creating awareness among the labour force through construction supervisors;

� Proper storage and internal supply facilities to be developed before undertaking construction activities;

� Installation of temporary rain water collection arrangements at the proposed site

To be discussed and implemented through construction contractors; To be taken up during designing stage with help of plumbing expert; Educate construction contractor and supervisors to help optimising water usage


2.12 Traffic, Transport and Access Issues

� Heavy Vehicle holding areas to be provided for vehicles waiting to deliver loads at work sites so as to avoid queuing outside the site or at other connecting roads;

� Vehicle movement and parking within the premises shall be manned properly to avoid accidents;

� Routes for use by construction traffic to be planned to minimize impact on residential areas and unsuitable parts of the road network;

To be implemented through contractor who in turn would ensure that their suppliers and transporters meet the requirements; Also to be briefed to the contractor before the start of the construction work; Traffic management to be taken up from time to time by KUL management together with construction



11


� Providing dedicated path within the site for entry and exit of the construction vehicles;

� Necessary training to the driver of construction vehicles for speed restrictions and to crewmembers on do’s and don’t during construction vehicles movements;

� Developing Code of Practice for Construction to include traffic for construction phase environmental management;

� Arrangements and routes for abnormal loads to be agreed in advance with the police, emergency services and the roads authority;

� Construction vehicles to be routed only during non- peaking hours i.e. other than during 0800 to 1100 hours and 1600 to 1900 hours. Heavy vehicles should operated only after 2100 hours;

� Movement of vehicles owned by local to be completely restricted;

� The contractor shall properly mark all access roads with proper signage.

contractors and transporters As the access road to ARAI is through the project area, appropriate authorities to coordinate traffic movement will also need to be consulted.

2.13 Noise and Vibration Impacts

� Middle noise sources such as cranes, earth moving equipment and heavy vehicles to be routed in such a way that there is minimum disturbance to receptors;

� Use of inherently quiet equipments (as far as reasonably practicable) and regular maintenance to ensure noise level are maintained at design level;

� Avoid loud, sudden noises wherever possible. Fixed noise sources to be located away- more than 50 m away from the site fencing;

� Integral noise shielding (including provision of tin sheets as noise barrier) to be used where practicable and fixed noise sources to be acoustically treated, for example with silencers, acoustic louvers and enclosures. All diesel generators to be installed in conformance with the statutory requirement of acoustic enclosure to achieve the required norm 75 dB(A) level at 1 m from its enclosure;

� Provision of rubber paddings/ noise isolators at equipment/machinery used for construction;

� Noise prone activities need to be restricted to the extent

Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring and Reporting to be undertaken as provided in the Environmental Clearance conditions. The EC condition clearly states that Ambient noise levels should confirm to residential standards both during day (55 dB(A)) and night (45dB(A)) time. Incremental pollution loads on noise quality should be closely monitored during construction phase and adequate measures implemented to meet the stipulated residential standards of CPCB/MPCB. Noise levels should be monitored along the boundaries of the site to check the compliance. Provision of training so that measures are discussed and implemented through contractors, suppliers and transporters.



12


possible during night particularly during 2200 to 0600 hours to reduce the noise impact. There is also requirement of providing make shift noise barriers surrounding the high noise generating construction equipment;

� Site workers working near high noise equipment use personal protective devices to minimise their exposure to high noise levels;

� Breaking of surfaces, if any to be done using the highest possible weight of breaker capable of doing the job without extending its duration;

� Construction vehicles to be well maintained and not idling equipment or vehicles when not in use; and

� Regular maintenance of vehicles to be taken up. 2.14 Community &

Occupational Health & Safety

� Attempts shall be made to keep the construction site clean by providing extra manpower for the purpose;

� Proper marking to be made for identification of locations of storages and waste collection and disposal as per their use;

� The vehicle maintenance area to be located in such a manner to prevent contamination of surface and ground water sources by accidental spillages of oil;

� Unauthorised dumping of used oil and other hazardous wastes should be prohibited;

� All the required safety measures based on individual job profile will be provided (as per working guidelines, use of personal protective equipments like gloves, helmets, ear muffs, safety belts etc.) for construction worker through the contractors. Personal protective equipment for everybody present at site to be made available;

� For safety of people occupying the site, regulations concerning fire safety to be followed. Some of the requirements include:

� Installation of fire extinguishers; � Provision of water sprinklers for unpaved roads; � Emergency exit; � Proper labelling of exit and place of fire protective system

installation;

Regular inspection is required for house keeping and EHS issue; To be managed during building, designing and implementing measures through suitable contractors.



13


� Trained personnel to use fire control systems; and � Display of phone numbers of the city/ local fire services, etc. � Provision of Sewage Disposal at labour campsite; � Construction contractors to provide first aid as well generate

awareness programmes on health and communicable diseases.

2.15 Demobilisation of construction material temporary sheds etc. having impact on Aesthetics & EHS

� Remove all construction equipment from construction site with due care on health, safety and environment;

� Remove all demobilisation waste from the construction site and dispose of non hazardous civil waste in low lying area within the site, while any hazardous waste is to be disposed as the requirement of MPCB;

� Re-vegetate bare area as per the landscape development plan.

Daily inspections Auditing immediately before and after the construction demobilisation


3 Operations Phase 3.1 Periodical maintenance

of permanent rehab buildings through its life cycle

� During the defect liability period, KUL to demonstrate and train the 21 residential building society members and Federation Society members on the importance of operation and maintenance of rehab buildings

� KUL to prepare and hand-over simple and easy to use building maintenance manuals applicable to individual flat owners and at Society level in local language

� Maintenance of rehab buildings will include: structural repairs such as cracks, member failures; painting and whitewashing; sweeping, cleaning and washing; lifts and related machinery; electrical wiring, fittings and fixtures; sanitary fittings, piping and fixtures; water supply pipelines, fittings and fixtures; and carpentry etc.

� KUL to help the 21 housing societies and Federation Society in identifying and appointing appropriate facility management service providers who deliver building maintenance services at renewable periods and at competitive rates. The terms of reference for delivering such services shall be drafted by KUL in consultation with Societies.

� Strive to identify the building/facility management service providers from within the rehabilitated community population itself.

� One training session delivered to individual building societies and Federation society on the maintenance of permanent rehab buildings during defect liability period

� Availability of Maintenance manuals in Marathi/Hindi covering individual flat owners and Society level issues.

� Terms of reference and contract documents prepared in Marathi for engaging building maintenance service providers.

� Fruitful attempts to identify building maintenance service providers from the rehabilitated local community population.

� During defect liability period and later during the entire project life cycle, effective building maintenance shall be monitored using following parameters which include: o Neatly painted and whitewashed exterior

and interior walls at least once in 3 years with no graffiti, dirt signs and worn out markings etc;

o Completely intact water and wastewater pipelines and sewerage system with no signs

Project Director, KUL/ 21 Building societies and Federation society


14


of leaks, seeps, spills, overflows; o Neat and clean lift cabins in working

conditions; o Neat and clean corridors, stairs, stairwells,

stair hand rails and other such public places within building without any signs of spitting, graffiti and other forms of abuse/misuse

o Presence of all electrical fitting and fixtures in working condition.

o No waste accumulation on sunshades, roof tops, ground floor space and other open areas.

o Neat and clean parking spaces with vehicles parked in an orderly manner.

� The building and federation society shall institute and inspection and auditing system to check the effectiveness of maintenance services from the 6th month of occupying the rehab flats.

� The inspection and auditing shall be done at various frequencies focussing on various issues: weekly, monthly and quarterly.

3.2 Maintenance of associated infrastructure facilities – water supply; sewerage system; sewage treatment plant (STP); Solid waste collection, transport, storage, segregation and disposal; Composting yard; Electricity distribution systems – Transformer yard, metering rooms, MCB panel board etc; Lift machinery; road infrastructure; Storm

� KUL to help the Federation Society in identifying and appointing one or many infrastructure facility operators who have the experience and expertise in operating the following facilities: o Water supply system; o Sewerage system; o Sewage treatment plant (STP); o Solid waste collection, transport, storage, segregation

and disposal; o Composting yard; o Electricity distribution systems – Transformer yard,

metering rooms, MCB panel board etc; o Lift machinery in each of the buildings; o Road infrastructure; o Storm water drainage and rainwater harvesting; o Landscaping

� Appointment of experienced infrastructure facility O&M operators

� Terms of reference and contract documents for delivering facility infrastructure O&M services prepared in local language. o Fruitful attempts to identify facility

infrastructure O&M services providers from within the rehabilitated community population itself.

o One training session delivered by KUL to 21 residential building society members and Federation Society members on the importance of operation and maintenance of each of the associated infrastructure facilities and their functions.

o As part of the inspection and auditing systems



15


water drainage; landscaping and rainwater harvesting etc.

� The terms of reference and contract documents for delivering facility infrastructure O&M services shall be drafted by KUL in consultation with Societies in local language.

o Strive to identify the facility infrastructure O&M services providers from within the rehabilitated community population itself, if possible.

o During the defect liability period, KUL to demonstrate and train the 21 residential building society members and Federation Society members on the importance of operation and maintenance of each of the associated infrastructure facilities and their functions.

o Appoint well experienced operators with institutional experience of not less than 10 years of operating such facilities for delivering O&M services to STP and Compost yard.

o Ensure effective O&M of STPs, Solid waste segregation centres and Composting yards to avoid foul smell emanating from them. Institute stand-by mechanisms to store or dispose off wastewater and solid wastes in case of system failure at STP and compost yards.

o No leaks, seeps or spills shall be allowed in the STP system, sludge storage/drying areas, Compost yards, sanitary piping on rehab buildings and underground sewerage systems to avoid soil and groundwater contamination. If any such leaks, seeps or spills is observed in any of the systems, the same shall be rectified within a week.

o Water quality aspects will depend largely on the effective O&M practices adopted for periodical cleaning and up keep of the entire water supply system consisting of supply pipelines (both above ground and below ground), valves and other pipelines fixtures, metering points/pits, storage tanks (both underground and above ground) etc.

o If PMC announces rationing or cut in water supply at any time of the year, the same shall be published in all building notice boards and respective building society informed about such measures.

o If abnormal high noise is generated during operation of STP

suggested earlier above, include infrastructure facility management services as well as part of the audit scope.

o Audit shall formulate performance assessment parameters facility-wise and the frequency of auditing of each facility depending upon the priority and significance attached to each facility by the local society.

� Associated infrastructure such as the following shall be monitored periodically as specified against each of them: o Water supply system – Drinking water

quality shall be monitored for all parameters specified under IS 10500 standards at 6 monthly intervals or as and when necessary. One of the sampling shall be done during monsoon season to detect wastewater contamination. Sampling shall be conducted at Underground /Overground storage reservoirs across all buildings and at 10% of household taps selected randomly;

o Sewerage system – the entire sewerage system network shall be physically inspected once in a month for leakages, seepages, overflow and manhole cover integrity etc. Any indications of network repair shall be addressed immediately.

o Sewage treatment plant (STP) – the operation of STP will be regulated by the Consent to Operate (CTO) issued by Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB). The monitoring program as specified under MPCB CTO or in the absence of any guideline, effluent standards specified under Schedule VI of EP Rules, 1986 shall be followed;

� For other facilities such as the following,


16


and water supply pumps, the same shall be attended to within a week to avoid inconvenience to nearby sensitive receptors.

operational monitoring parameters to gauge the quality of service rendered shall be specified in the service contract agreements and monitored accordingly: o Solid waste collection, transport, storage,

segregation and disposal; o Composting yard; o Electricity distribution systems – Transformer

yard, metering rooms, MCB panel board etc; o Lift machinery in each of the buildings; o Road infrastructure; o Storm water drainage and rainwater

harvesting; 3.3 Maintenance of social

infrastructure facilities � Implement similar measures suggested earlier for building

maintenance; � Ensure capacity building and training of new residents on

the use and minor upkeep of new sanitation and water facilities (toilets and taps) as well as general hygiene and sanitation.

Refer to Point 3.1 above. Project Director, KUL/ 21 Building societies and Federation society

3.4 Ecological conservation and development

� Ascertain the alignment of transport corridors proposed such as DP road and High Capacity Mass Transport Route (HCMTR) and plant dense tree plantation to form bio-screen on either side of the alignment to save the resident community from air and noise pollution aspects through annual plantation programs.

� Identify and plant as much variety of trees as possible along road side, along perimeter of parks and playgrounds, around building/facility sites and other such open spaces through sustained annual plantation programs.

� The residential societies must keenly monitor and report any development in the regulated hill top - hill slope region and other no-development zones (NDZ) within project site.

� As part of inspecting and auditing systems proposed earlier include the ecological conservation efforts and any developments in NDZ as part of audit scope.

� Monitor the number of trees planted every year, survival rates and total trees alive in the project site vis-à-vis targets set for the site.

� Monitor the density of trees planted along proposed DP road and High Capacity Mass Transport Route (HCMTR) – Density of vegetation should be such that none of the buildings should be visible from the alignment corridor.


3.5 Sustainable resource management

� During the defect liability period, KUL to demonstrate and train the 21 residential building society members and Federation Society members on sustainability concepts in building operation, maintenance and management.

� During defect liability period, KUL to formulate and institute

� Training sessions as suggested in the mitigation measures

� Sustainability monitoring and measurement systems run by 21 building Society members and Federation Society



17


simple sustainability monitoring and measurement systems for resource consumption in consultation with Society representatives such that they can continue operating the system in KULs absence as well.

� During defect liability period, KUL to formulate and implement continual improvement systems to sustain resource consumption over the long run. The society members shall be trained on operating the continual improvement systems.

� During defect liability period, KUL to increase awareness among 21 building society members and federation society members on green building certification systems, PMC eco-housing schemes and other such sustainability rating systems and their benefits.

� Continual improvement systems run by 21 building Society members and Federation Society

3.6 Visual environment During operational period, address following aspects and issues that will affect visual environment through measures suggested earlier above: � House keeping and facility management services; � Regular painting and whitewashing of buildings and

associated infrastructure components; � Abuse and misuse of building components such as roof area,

walls, sunshades, stair walls, stair wells, parking space etc. Abuse and misuse could be due to spitting, urinating, advertising, scribbling graffiti, pasting posters etc;

� Leaking sanitary pipes and fittings and overflowing underground sewerage systems;

� Maintenance of road infrastructure and road furniture’s; � Up keep and maintenance of project infrastructure (water

tanks, STPs, Compost yards, waste segregation centres, transformer rooms/yards etc) and social infrastructure (such as community halls, anganwadi, women centres etc) without abusing and misusing them;

� Up keep and maintenance of landscaped gardens, parks, recreational spaces, playgrounds etc without abusing and misusing them;

� Regular solid waste and garbage removal from the rehab area; and

See Points 3.1 and 3.2 above Project Director, KUL/ 21 Building societies and Federation society


18


� Sweeping and regular cleaning of open/public places/spaces.

3.7 Road infrastructure inside project site

� Prohibit honking and over-speeding of vehicles inside project site and empower society members to take action against violators of the society rules.

� As suggested earlier, up keep and maintenance of road infrastructure including road surface, street lighting, signs, furniture, islands, round-about, medians, landscaping and plantations shall be included as part of the scope of infrastructure facility management service contract.

� Monitor fatal and non-fatal accidents/ incidents on internal roads and take corrective actions within a month.

� KUL to deliver training on safe/good road user habits, parking along roads and inside buildings, safe driving methods etc to 21 building Society members and Federation Society. The society members shall in turn train the residents of individual buildings using the training resources shared by KUL or other resources.

� As part of inspection and auditing systems suggested earlier, include up keep and maintenance of road infrastructure as part of audit scope.

� As part of audits, review the fatal and non-fatal accidents/ incidents on internal roads and corrective actions taken.

� Training sessions at lease once as suggested under mitigation measure


3.8 Community H&S During defect liability period, KUL to train and increase awareness levels among the 21 Building Society members and Federation Society members on typical health, safety and hygiene issues of residents such as the following: � Leaking sanitary pipes and fittings on buildings � Overflowing underground sewerage systems � Dumping solid waste and floor sweepings into sewerage

system manholes � Indiscriminate dumping of domestic solid waste � Indiscriminate spitting and urinating in open/public spaces � Maintenance of underground and over ground drinking

water tanks and integrity of supply systems including metering pits

� Health and hygiene issues (clean drinking water, upkeep and maintenance of washrooms/bathrooms, safe cooking habits, cleaning floors, washing clothes etc)

� Health impacts due to poor indoor air quality such as cooking without adequate ventilation using firewood or kerosene

� Training session as suggested in the mitigation measures.

� Monitor the drinking water quality as specified under Item 3.2 .

� Monitor health, safety and hygiene related accidents/ incidents involving residents and implement corrective actions immediately.

� Presidents of Building Society and Federation Society shall walk-through and visually check for the signs of following community H&S issues at least once a month: o Leaking sanitary pipes and fittings on

buildings o Overflowing underground sewerage systems o Dumping solid waste and floor sweepings

into sewerage system manholes o Indiscriminate dumping of domestic solid

waste o Indiscriminate spitting and urinating in



19


� Exposure of residents to: fire hazards (due to electrical short circuiting, LPG cylinder blasts or other such incidents); earthquakes; electrical hazards; and mechanical failure of lift machinery etc.

� The individual building societies and Federation Society in turn to propagate awareness among residents on above listed community health, safety and hygiene issues through periodical awareness cum training programs using resources shared by KUL

open/public spaces o Maintenance of underground and over

ground drinking water tanks and integrity of supply systems including metering pits

o Health and hygiene issues (clean drinking water, upkeep and maintenance of washrooms/bathrooms, safe cooking habits, cleaning floors, washing clothes etc at 10% households every month)

o Number of awareness programs conducted every year on different subjects.

3.9 Occupational H&S � KUL to train the 21 Building society members and Federation Society members on typical OHS issues associated with building repair and maintenance and their legal ramifications, contractual provisions, risk and liability management, risk insurance products etc.

� Occupational H&S i(OHS) issues associated with routine building repair and maintenance (such as plumbing works, electrical maintenance, lift maintenance, carpentry works, painting works and associated infrastructure utility/facility O&M activities) will arise through project life cycle. This can be managed by the Societies by engaging service providers who have OHS systems in place and implement the same during contract period.

� Building societies and Federation society to put contractual obligations and liability on service providers on all matters pertaining to OHS aspects.

� Building societies and Federation society to retain contractual powers to disengage the service providers if the OHS systems and its implementation track record is found to be poor/ unsatisfactory as per internal audit systems.

� Training session as suggested in the mitigation measures.

� Contractual provisions as suggested in the mitigation measures that transfers liability on service provider and empowers societies to cancel the contract if OHS record is unsatisfactory

� Monitor OHS records of each of the service providers engaged and implement corrective actions.


3.10 Disaster Management and emergency response

� During operation phase, the major emergency event could arise due to: fire accidents; electrical short circuits/electrocution; major earthquake events leading to structural failure; LPG gas leak/blast; Lift failure and emergency health situations of individual residents.

� KUL to prepare simple and easy to understand manuals in

� Availability of Disaster and Emergency Management manuals in local language as suggested in mitigation measure

� Training and awareness sessions as suggested in the mitigation measure.

� Document the periodical awareness programs and



20


local language with illustrations and graphics on how to respond and manage each of the disaster and/ or emergency situations and respective government authorities to contact. These manuals shall be widely published and circulated among all building societies and individual residents.

� KUL to train and increase awareness among 21 building society members and Federation Society members about the probable disaster and/ or emergency situations in the project site and the management manuals prepared by it.

� The manuals prepared by KUL should include conduct of periodical awareness programs and mock drills among resident community along with clear division of emergency management responsibilities among the residents’ building society management to manage emergency situations.

� KUL to formulate and implement preventive maintenance of fire systems, lift systems and electrical MCB to avoid emergency situations. KUL to hand-hold Building societies and Federation society in running these preventive maintenance systems.

mock drills conducted among resident community � Identification of institutional mechanism to

manage disaster and emergency events within the residents’ building society management.

� Operational records of preventive maintenance systems..


21

1.2 IMPLEMENTATION MECHANISMS FOR THE ESMP

This section discusses the implementation mechanisms for the ESMP and key commitments that would be required from KUL to ensure environmental and social performance of Project Nirvana as per the applicable reference framework. The key commitments that have emerged from the ESMP are the following: � Capacity Building and Expansion of the EHS and Community Relations

Team which will be responsible for implementation of the ESMP and related management plans;

� Completion of the socio-economic survey for Wadarvasti in order to have an updated baseline of all slum dwellers impacted by the project whose status will need to monitored bi-annually up to the end of the construction phase;

� Formation of a Community Audit Group comprising of slum dwellers of each settlement/block to regularly monitor the performance of the project and its scheduling/design/completion status. These groups should be created in consultation with the Housing societies/Building Federations;

� Providing each EPC contractor, whether for civil works, or any other specialization with the ESMP requirements for the construction phase;

� Incorporation of a Training Program which will draw up a training calendar to implement the specific training requirements indicated by the ESMP.

� Determining a monitoring plan for environmental and social impacts on the basis of the ESMP and monitoring indicators.

1.2.1 Organizational Roles and Responsibilities

The implementation of the ESMP for Project Nirvana will be lead and managed by a designated Environmental and Social Manager (ESM) with direct reporting responsibilities to the Project Head/Engineering and Construction Head. The ESM will need to put in place a team of two coordinators (EHS and Community Relations) who would be further supported by project and site level officers as indicated in Figure 6.1. The organizational structure for the implementation of the ESMP will need to take into account that construction works are likely to have separate EPC Contractors, such as a contractor for civil and another for foundation works etc, each of whom would have sub-contractors for securing construction material, labour etc. This implies compliance risk for environmental and social regulations and hence emphasizes the need for training of contractors and specifying the requirements for EHS personnel within the contractor’s team. The designated Environmental and Social Manager will also need to coordinate across KUL functions, such as with the Liaisoning Department, the Planning & Design Department as well as Human Resources and Administration. As indicated in the ESMP, independent consultants, subject-matter experts etc. will also require to be engaged.


22

Figure 1.1 Organizational Structure for ESMP Implementation

*Suggested Organizational Structure


23

Box 1.1 Roles and Responsibilities of External Agencies

1.2.2 Inspection Monitoring and Audit

In order to implement the ESMP, the Environmental and Social Manager (in consultations with senior management of KUL) will develop a time-bound and action-oriented Environmental and Social Action and Monitoring Plan and assign roles and responsibilities among the ESM staff as well as contractors for the mitigation measures. The Environmental and Social Action and Monitoring Plan should be developed as soon as possible and at least 6 months prior to peak construction activities. The plan should be developed on the basis of the ESMP provided in this section. The budget for implementing the ESMP will need to be finalized in conjunction with formulating the action plan by the KUL and ESM team. Inspection and audit systems will need to be put in place to ensure that mitigation measures are being effectively put in place to address social and environmental sensitivities. This will be in the form of an Audit Program. The monitoring mechanism will cover all stakeholders including contractors, labourers, suppliers and the local community impacted by the project activities and associated facilities. Frequency of monitoring of the ESAP will be determined by the ESM staff. However, the implementation of the ESMP should be externally audited once every six months by an independent third-

As indicated in the suggested organizational structure, the ESMP implementation will need to be linked with roles and responsibilities of external agencies who would be involved primarily in (a) Implementation of the Rehabilitation Plan; (b) Providing Clearances, Permits and Approvals; (c) External Regulatory Monitoring. The indicative responsibilities are provided subsequently: � Slum Rehabilitation Authority (SRA): Nodal agency for the rehabilitation of slum dwellers.

The SRA does not have a direct implementation responsibility over the ESMP and is more of an overseeing authority for demolition management, progress of shifting/evacuation/transit and other formation of housing societies. It is suggested that the SRA should be informed about the progress of ESMP implementation;

� Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC): KUL will need to directly liaise with the PMC as it is the local agency responsible for the provision of utilities and other services (such as waste disposal) and granting of permits;

� Environmental Authorities: Other than the State Environmental Impact Assessment Authority which has the responsibility of providing Environmental Clearance to Project Nirvana, KUL will need to involve the regional office of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MOEF), the regional Pollution Control Board (PCB) for submission of reports (as per the frequency) for monitoring on environmental indicators. These environmental authorities will also be a part of the external regulatory monitoring;

� Community Audit Group: The CAG should be involved in undertaking regular checks of the progress of the project, specifically the Rehabilitation Plan and construction activities. The CAG should be trained by an external agency to develop a checklist of key indicators from the RP and ESMP and should also be given the role of liaising with the Engineering Head and the Head of Rehabilitation;

� Housing Societies: Housing Societies will be formulated and registered by the SRA, subsequent to which they will be handed over the management of various buildings. The housing societies will need to be adequately trained in order to manage and implement the operational aspects of the ESMP.


24

party monitoring agency during construction period and one every year during operations. The entire audit and monitoring process will be documented and corrective actions will need to be implemented. KUL will develop and implement a programme of reporting through all stages of the project construction and commissioning through EHS and Social performance reports, inspection checklists, monitoring of grievances etc. The program of reporting prepared within one month of instatement of the ESM team. In particular, for the rehabilitation plan, as the Nirvana Hills Phase II Project is categorized as Category A for Involuntary Resettlement, submission of semi-annual internal (KUL) and external monitoring reports is mandatory.

1.2.3 Documentation and Record Keeping

Documentation and record keeping system has to be established to ensure updating and recording of requirements specified in ESMP. Responsibilities have to be assigned to relevant personnel for ensuring that the ESMP documentation system is maintained and that document control is ensured through access by and distribution to, identified personnel in form of the following: � Master Social and Environmental Information System (MIS) that will be

tracked by the ESM; � Legal register/PERT Chart and its updation; � Grievance Redressal Management Database; � Consultation related documentation; � Socio-economic database of all slum dwellers; � Operation control procedures and work instructions; � Incident Reports and Accident Registers; � Emergency preparedness and response procedures; � Training records, modules and annual calendar; � Auditing and monitoring reports. KUL will need to develop internal monthly environmental and social monitoring reports. Project Nirvana has been categorized as Category B for Environment and Category A for Involuntary Resettlement. Hence, there will be a mandatory requirement to submit semi-annual internal (KUL) and external (ERM or similar consultancy) monitoring reports. A suggested outline for the internal monitoring report is provided hereunder: � Current project status and schedule; � Organizational structure; � Update on the monitoring indicator for each suggested action in the

ESMP; � Status of Regulatory Permits and Approvals; � Number of Stakeholder Consultations; � Current status report on grievances received till date (total

received/closed/pending closure/follow-up stage).


25

1.2.4 Community Disclosure and Grievance Redressal

KUL will establish a Community Disclosure and Grievance Redressal (CDGR) system that will be part of the Stakeholder Engagement Plan and that will be applicable for the entire project lifecycle. KUL will formulate a Community Relations team to implement the CDGR system and lead the community engagement process which would have the following tasks: � Interface between KUL, contractors, sub-contractors and the slum

dwellers; � Disclosure of project specific information across the slum blocks; � Establish a mechanism to obtain, report and monitor all grievances from

the local community; � Regular engagement with any slum societies that get formulated and other

external stakeholder groups identified in this report; and � To plan, implement and evaluate community development programs: To

the extent possible the CSR activities should be relevant to the needs of the locality and in no case should be detrimental to the E&S sensitivities of the project area.

The Community Relations Team will consist of 2-3 personnel/Community Liaison Officers for each slum block who would be lead by the Head (Community Relations). The Grievance Redressal procedure will outline the process and steps to be taken, the key people responsible, and the upper limit to the time taken to resolve a conflict to the satisfaction of the complainant. In case there are grievances that have reached a stalemate, a third party mediation may be considered. The framework to develop a Stakeholder Engagement and Grievance Redressal Plan is provided in Annex C and Annex D respectively.

1.2.5 Capacity Building and Training

The implementation of the ESMP will require a robust social and environmental, health and safety training plan which will ensure that the job specific training and EHS induction training needs are identified based on the specific requirements of ESMP and capacity of site and project personnel (including the Contractors and Subcontractors) to undertake the required actions and monitoring activities. General environmental awareness will be increased among the project’s team to encourage the implementation of environmentally sound practices and compliance requirements of the project activities. This will help in minimising adverse environmental impacts, compliance with the applicable regulations and standards, and achieving performance beyond compliance. The same level of awareness and commitment will be imparted to the contractors and sub contractors prior to the commencement of the project.


26

1.3 BUDGETARY ALLOCATION AND TIMELINES

Table 1.2 provides an indicative budgetary allocation on the basis of the key mitigation measures that have been proposed in the ESMP. The ESMP cost for Project Nirvana will include recurring cost as well as fixed capital expenses. The indicative estimates provided subsequently do not include expenses associated with an increase in the organizational capacity.

Table 1.2 Indicative Budgetary Allocation for the ESMP

S. No

Particular Capital Cost (INR in million)

Recurring Cost (INR in Million) per annum

A) Construction Phase 1. Provision of adequate drainage and

bunds/ diversion dykes, water sprinkling etc. to prevent soil/ raw material escape

Included in project cost Included in project cost

2. Development of vegetation and landscaping

Included in project cost Included in project cost

3. Toilets for workers and sewage disposal facility

Included in subcontractor agreement

0.25

4. Air and Noise quality monitoring 0.2 0.50 5. Water Quality monitoring 0.0 0.25 6. Disposal of hazardous waste and ACM 1.0 0.20 7. Miscellaneous expenses for construction

phase EMP implementation 1.5 0.25

B) Operation Phase 1. Sewage Treatment Plant Included in project cost Included in O&M cost 2 Wastewater quality monitoring Included in project cost Included in O&M cost 3. Solid Waste Management Included in project cost Included in O&M cost 4. Greenbelt & landscape maintenance 1.0 1.5 5. Environment, health and safety training

and EMP evaluation 1.5 1.0

C) Associated Plans 1. Rehabilitation Plan Included in Project Cost Included in the Corpus

Fund 2. Demolition Management Plan; Included in Project Cost 3. Labour Management Plan; Included in Project Cost Included in the Corpus

Fund 4. Stakeholder Engagement Plan; Included in Project Cost 5. Grievance Redressal Plan; Included in Project Cost 6. Gender Action Plan; Included in Project Cost 7. Risk Management Plan Included in the Corpus

Fund Included in the Corpus Fund

D) Implementation of ESMP 1. Capacity building and identification of

resources (Environmental and Social Manager)

Included in the Project Cost

Included in the Project Cost

2. ESMP Monitoring (Semi-annually) 0.5 0.5 3. Engagement of an NGO for capacity

building 0.25 0.25

4. Implementation of Grievance Mechanism Included in Project Cost

Note: The rehabilitation plan (separate document) has a distinct budgetary allocation that has been formulated by KUL.


27

Table 1.3 Timeline for Implementation of ESMP

S No Components Remarks Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

A) Construction Phase 1 Provision of adequate drainage and

bunds/ diversion dykes, water sprinkling etc. to prevent soil/ raw material escape

2 Development of vegetation and landscaping

3 Toilets for workers and sewage disposal facility

Immediate

4 Disposal of hazardous waste and ACM Immediate 5 Air and Noise quality monitoring Quarterly 6 Water Quality monitoring Quarterly B) Operation Phase 1 Sewage Treatment Plant 2 Wastewater quality monitoring 3 Solid Waste Management 4 Greenbelt & landscape maintenance 5 Environment, health and safety

training and EMP evaluation

C) Associated Plans 1. Rehabilitation Plan Formulated by KUL and ERM 2. Demolition Management Plan; Suggested Framework in Annex A 3. Labour Management Plan; Suggested Framework in Annex B 4. Stakeholder Engagement Plan; Suggested Framework in Annex C 5. Grievance Redressal Plan; Suggested Framework in Annex D 6. Gender Action Plan; Suggested Framework in Annex E 7. Risk Management Plan Suggested Framework in Annex F

*Note: The implementation schedule herein highlights key actions of the ESMP. The KUL ESMP Manager will need to develop a concise plan based on the present project status, construction priorities and stage of demolition activities.

Annex A

Demolition Management Plan

ESMP: ANNEX A-DEMOLITION MANAGEMENT PLAN

1.1 BRIEF SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION

The following demolition plan has been prepared for M/s Kumar Sinew Developers Limited (hereinafter referred to as “KUL”) for managing their undergoing demolition activities in their slum redevelopment and commercial cum residential project at “45 Nirvana Hills” in the city of Pune. A demolition plan is a structured protocol that is undertaken by any agency for undertaking deconstruction activities in an organized manner so as to mitigate adverse impacts with respect to Environmental, Social and Health and Safety aspects and risks on the immediate and neighbouring surroundings of the site where the work is to be carried out. This plan provides detailed guidance on managing the aforementioned demolition activities. Also, it outlines the roles and responsibilities of the client and its various agencies who would be involved in undertaking this deconstruction and demolition process. Overview on the Demolition Process

The demolition activities for Project Nirvana have already commenced and are being carried forwards in phases in the respective slum pockets. These slum pockets are namely:

� Kilewadi and Indira Park � Rajiv Gandhi Park � Hanuman Nagar � Vasant Nagar � Rautwadi

KUL are undertaking the demolition drive themselves, and are using their own machinery and manpower in these activities. They are coordinating with their Community Relations Team (CRT) to carry out the entire demolition process right from signing of the sale agreement to filling up of handover sheets and demolition checklists before commencing to demolition of the structure. During the demolition and deconstruction process, the entire area of the project site where the present slum pockets are presently located will come under the demolition drive. It is expected that a total of approximately 3400 structures might be deconstructed during the entire process. The following table is indicative of the various types of structures that could possibly come under the purview of the deconstruction:

Types of Structures to be Demolished and Deconstructed

SNo. Type of Structure Approximate Number of Structures* 1. Slum Residences, shops and

establishments 3307

2. Temples 26 3. Mandal Samities (Community Places) 5 4. Public Toilets 15 5. Gymkhana 1 6. Cow Sheds 2 7. Hospitals 3 8. Samaj Vikas Kendra (Community

Development Building) 1

9. Schools 5 10. Charitable Trusts 2 Total 3366 Source: KUL Socio-Economic survey *List is only indicative. Figures might vary during actual deconstruction at the discretion of the developer

1.1.2 Applicable Hours of Operation for the Demolition Process

For undertaking demolition of the structures by KUL and their personnel, the following hours for carrying out operations would be followed:

� Monday to Saturday: 7:00am to 5:00pm � Intermittent Break: 1:30pm to 2:00pm � Sunday and Public Holidays: No Work

Note:

� No demolition work will be carried out outside of the applicable hours nominated unless any approval or consent has been obtained from the concerned regulatory authority.

� Deliveries of heavy machinery including transfer of debris from the demolition sites to the landfills and other debris and waste management sites may be carried out of the proposed hours of operation but are required to be in conformance to the overriding requirements of the Roads & Traffic

1.1.3 Public Safety and Protection

The demolition drive is currently underway in a highly congested and densely inhabited location where almost 4800 people are presently residing. It is of prime importance that the safety of the people is taken into account and consideration before proceeding with any form of demolition activities. Therefore, certain precautionary measures that should be taken by the developer before the demolition process include:

� Cordoning off the area by proper perimeter fencing using Caution Tape or similar indicators;

� Limiting movement or trespassing of people around the area; and � Providing security.

1.2 FRAMEWORK/STAGES OF DEMOLITION PROCESS

The following diagram is an indicative representation of the various stages of work activities that are required to be carried out during the demolition activities:

Stage wise demolition plan for Project Nirvana

Source: Prepared by ERM in association with KUL

The various stages that are represented in the above thematic representation can be discussed as: Stage I: Completion of Legal Requirements and Transfer of Land

� It is the preliminary or preceding stage to the demolition activities that takes into account the completion of all the legal and statutory requirements including signing of the sale agreement between the owner and the developer, biometric registration of the owner and payment of applicable amount (including compensation, rent et.) as promised by the client;

� Once and only when the legal requirements are complete, the structure is required to be taken over from the owner in a free and fair manner without any external force. The consent of the same is required to be registered by the client in form of the Handover Sheet signed by the respective owner;

� The builder will then collate the Demolition checklist and prepare the site for deconstruction

� In case the site owner does not comply with the sale agreement, or refuses to transfer land, no undue and unfair force or external pressure should be used by the client. The same should be resolved amicably between the owner and the developer and if required with some form of participation from either the SRA or the local administration representative

Primary Role and Responsibility: Community Relations Team of KUL Stage II: Deconstruction of the Internal Components of the Site

� During this phase, the builder will dissemble all the internal fixtures of the structure including wall mounts, fixed furniture, electrical installations, sewer lines, sanitation utilities etc.

� The parts and components if desired by the owners can be given back to them; � The remaining components can be segregated according to their type, collected and

sold off to recycler or a scrap dealer � Hazardous wastes if found should be properly disposed in landfills and should not be

recycled Primary Role and Responsibility: Demolition team of KUL Stage III: Preparation for Structural Demolition

� Once all the internal fixtures, utilities etc. have been deconstructed, the demolition team is required to prepare the site for structural demolition i.e by demolition by usage of heavy tools and machineries;

� The primary step before proceeding for demolition is cordoning of the site with the help of a caution tape along its perimeter;

� Proper warning and hazards signs are required to be setup wherever deemed necessary;

� Trespassing by local public should not be allowed in this area for the duration of the demolition and the clearance of the debris;

� It is to be ensured that the personnel on the ground handling the demolition drive are provided with Personal Protective Equipments (PPE);

� Ensure that the machinery used is in good condition and the tools and equipments provided are also in functioning order

� Ensure the presence of a safety engineer and a first aid kit at close proximity to the site of demolition

Primary Role and Responsibility: Demolition team and H&S officer KUL Stage IV: Demolition of the structure

� The demolition should be carried out as per a structured plan as suggested by the site in charge;

� The demolition should commence from using lighter tools and equipments to moving towards heavy machinery and excavators during the demolish of bare concrete structure and crushing of large particles;

� Large debris should be destructed into smaller sections; � Debris should be segregated and collected at particular locations of the site and made

ready for transport to land fills and waste yards Primary Role and Responsibility: Demolition team and H&S officer KUL Stage V: Transfer and disposal of generated Debris

� Debris is required to be loaded by scoops and excavators into Lorries and dump trucks;

� The debris is required to be taken to authorized landfills properly disposed off; � Debris which include metals, plastics, GI sheets can be transferred to authorized

recyclers or sold off to scrap yards Primary Role and Responsibility: Contractor hired for debris clearance and management

1.3 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PROCEDURE

This section defines the structure demolition procedure that is mandatory to all KUL implementation staff as well as contractors. The demolition procedure has been developed with a view to minimize any risk that may occur for dwelling units within the scheme implementing under Slum Rehabilitation Authority Pune at Kelewadi.

1.3.1 Step 1: Consultation and Agreement

� The Community Relation officer (CRO) will understand from the Project Manager, the area required for construction, and properly mark on structure survey plan the numbers of structure and freeze the same by taking approval from Head Technical of the project.

� The Community Relation officer will start consultation with slum dwellers, concerned for vacation of structure and to shift in-transit accommodation in consultation with local leader and to involve local corporator, if required. He will explain the SRA scheme and methodology of rehabilitation. He will explain each and every details of amount to be paid towards rent, livelihood support and other information’s, when the dweller will reside on transition.

� The Community Relation officer will discuss the demolition process with community and neighbours to apprise them of the risks involved and what measures are to be taken to minimize those risks i.e safety measures being adopted and their participation co-operation.

� On agreeing to go for transition by the dweller, the CRO will furnish the consent agreement duly signed by the dweller to the Company.

� The CRO will furnish the rent requisition sheet (on prescribed format) towards payment of livelihood amount and rental cheques which he will give to structure owner at the time of vacation from structure.

� The CRO will ensure the empty possession of structure from the structure owner.

� The CRO will take the photograph of structure along with owner and his/her spouse as evidence of his entity being owner of structure within the scheme.

� If dweller wishes to shift in transit building, then the CRO will ensure the accommodation in the transit building and furnish the Transit flat allotment letter.

� The CRO will take care during shifting of dweller in the transit building till the dweller is shifted in the building/ own arranged accommodation.

� The CRO will fill the Livelihood Consultation Sheet to assess present livelihood status of the dweller and for monitoring of livelihood during transition. Also CRO will maintain the livelihood monitoring data of dweller to know the improvisation in his/her livelihood.

� The CRO will hand over empty structure to Project Manager on duly filled Structure Hand Over Sheet for further demolition.

� The Back Office In charge will acknowledge and submit the agreements to SRA for such demolition.

1.3.2 Step 2: Demolition of Structure/Tenement

� The Project Manager In-charge will execute the demolition process. He will ensure that structural stability of the adjacent structure/s has been verified by engineering team and their suggestions have been taken to account and assess the risk factor towards safety of human life that no inconvenience is evinced to social society by demolition.

� The Project Manager In-charge will ensure towards minimum environmental pollution by the demolition.

� The In-charge Project Manager will engage licensed contractor to remove electrical connection with prior acknowledgement /approval of Maharashtra State Electricity Board.

� The Project Manager In-charge will engage licensed contractor to remove pipe line connection with prior acknowledgement /approval of Local Municipal Office.

� The Project Manager In-charge will engage licensed contractor to sewer line with prior acknowledgement /approval of Local Municipal Office.

� The Project Manager In-charge will check and ensure the following key issues are completed: � Formal document of handing over of possession and no objection to

demolition from the pitch holder has been obtained. Last paid bills of amenities have been collected Electric Meter has been duly surrendered;

� Water connection has been duly surrendered; � Sewer lines have been duly disconnected; � Structural Stability of the adjacent structure/s has been verified by

engineering team and their suggestions taken to account; � SRA authorities has been informed of the demolition plan date and

time; � Safety cordon placed to ensure no movement of people through

demolition area; � Recheck – and ensure that structure and surroundings are vacant; � Provision for Announcement over the Public Address system to

inform people to remain away from demolition area and maintain safe distance;

� The Demolition team has safety equipment and aware of all Safety procedures. Hard hat area clearly demarcated and signage are in place. First Aid Team on standby;

� The In-charge Project Manager will ensure the barricading of clean area and make proper arrangement towards further encroachments till construction starts.

1.4 POTENTIAL IMPACTS ON ENVIRONMENT, SOCIAL AND HEALTH AND SAFETY DURING THE DEMOLITION PROCESS

During the demolition and deconstruction process, there are certain concerns that are generated with regards to environmental, social and health safety impacts. Some of these concerns have been identified and the mitigation measures for the same has been suggested in the following sections

1.4.1 Environment

There are certain environmental impacts that arise from any form of structural demolition process. Some of these impacts can be broadly classified under the categories of:

� Dust Emissions � Noise Impacts � Storm Water run-off � Storage of Dangerous Goods � Hazardous waste management

The client is required to understand these impacts and implement mitigation measures for the same in order to prevent any serious escalation of these impacts which can cause both contamination and damage to the surrounding environment. Therefore, the above mentioned points are broadly discussed and suggestive mitigation measures are specified for the same.

1.4.2 Fugitive Dust Emissions

Dust is a significant problem during any demolition process. Significant amount of dust plumes arise during destruction of concrete structures. The primary line of action to control these fugitive emissions include

� Spraying of Water is at the source of origin, over demolished materials (concrete) and on to the materials before loading to settle the dust particles and avoiding the migration of the same into the surrounding environment. It is advisable to install mobile water points at locations of ongoing demolition for providing faster access to water;

� Using smaller to medium tools for preliminary demolition with heavy machineries such as bull dozers and excavators being used only at the latter stage as their use and movement exponentially increase the amount of dust generated; and

� Covering dump trucks and lorries carrying debris with tarps so as to prevent continuous generation of dust cloud while it is transferring debris to a landfill.

1.4.3 Noise Impacts

The Noise generated from demolition activities are another form of environmental impact that can pose problems and annoyance to the surrounding vicinity. In any demolition site, noise can be primarily managed by primarily two types of controls. These include: Administrative Control: Include management decisions which can drastically reduce the impacts of noise on the immediate surrounding. These administrative controls include:

� Suitable timings of undertaking demolition activities. All demolition activities are required to be carried out only during designated working hours. No machine work will be allowed outside the prescribed timeframe.

� Relegating demolition activities near sensitive receptors such as schools and hospitals to Saturdays or during timeframes where the impacts due to the generated noise would be minimal;

� Shutting down noisy machinery when not in use Engineering Control: This sort of control requires usage of physical components (such as dampers, mufflers, enclosures etc.) on the tools, machineries and vehicles used in the demolition process. Some examples of engineering controls include

� Substituting existing equipment with quieter equipment; � Retro-fitting existing equipment with damping materials, mufflers, or erecting

enclosures and barriers. � Reducing Vehicular noise by regular maintenance and servicing

1.4.4 Storm Water runoff

During the period of rainfall, a lot of the loose rubble, soil gets washed off by the rainwater. This rainwater is channelled through the storm water drainage systems already constructed by the local municipal corporation in the area. Due to this, a lot of sedimentation occurs in the storm water drainage channels because of which clogging is possible leading rain water stagnation and accumulation. This situation can be controlled by:

� Regular clearance of debris from the site; � Ensuring no blockage of existing drainage channels so as to allow surface run-off along

existing contours (down slope) with the existing drainage system on-site of kerbs, gutters, gully pits and pipes etc.

� Using drainage control devices if need arises

1.4.5 Storage of Dangerous Goods

There is a possibility that during the demolition activities, dangerous materials like diesel, petrol, oxyacetylene etc. would be required. It is suggested that following safety measures are kept in mind while using these materials:

� Proper storage of these materials in sheds, secondary containments providing proper ventilations and also providing proper signage, warning signs for indicating the same;

� Restrict entry to authorized personnel only; and � Providing fire safety equipments such as extinguishers, sand buckets for emergency

use.

1.4.6 Disposal of Hazardous Wastes

There are various forms of hazardous wastes that might be generated during the demolition process especially during demolition of commercial establishments. These hazardous wastes include Asbestos, oils sludge, acid alkali residues, plastics, used batteries, hospital wastes etc The client is required to properly handle such wastes by using proper PPE and dispose the same only via proper channels and authorized agencies. They should be recycled only if possible, but otherwise be properly disposed in designated land fills and disposal sites.

1.4.7 Community Health and Safety

During the demolition drive, certain considerations are required to be provided to the health and safety of the community in the immediate surroundings. Some of these considerations include:

� Identification of key sensitive receptors like hospitals, schools colleges and other public places such as temples, prayer halls, and community halls near to the site of demolition and synchronizing demolition activities after taking their suggestions and due recommendations;

� Manage movement of people around the demolition site especially with regards to movements of construction vehicles, excavators, dump trucks etc. The drivers should be trained and provided guidance on safe driving measures;

� A traffic management plan can be followed for the movement of debris vehicles in and out of the site so as to avoid any traffic jams and snarls and road blockages

� Exposed pits and excavated areas should be properly barricaded and put out of reach from general public;

1.4.8 Key Performance Indicators

There are certain key performances indicators that are required to be managed and monitored during the entire time span of the demolition and deconstruction activity. The following table details these indicators as well as advocates roles and responsibility to the client, its various agencies as well as any other external agency that might be a direct or indirect participatory party in the exercise.

Performance Indicator Table

Key Monitoring Indicators Role and Responsibility Deliverables and Timeframe Provision of adequate time to the Slum Residents for removal of their personal belongings and artefacts

� SRA (Strictly Monitory) � Community Relations Team

(CRT) of KUL

� Time to evacuation would be evaluated based on mutual agreement between the CRT and the individual slum dweller

Registering complaints and grievances of the Slum Residents caused by the demolition activities. Special priority should be given to vulnerable classes of the society including old, impaired, widows, orphans and disables

� CRT � Demolition Team

� Continuous during the demolition process.

� A complaint register can be

maintained by the CRT and updated regularly with these grievances

Number of complaints registered by the neighbouring community including residents, schools, colleges, hospitals etc. on fugitive dust, noise generation and other construction related activities ;

� CRT � Demolition team

� The same complaint register can be functional and utilized for registering complaints and grievances arising from the non-rehabilitated community as well during the demolition process.

Safety incidence among on-site workers, as well as the residents

� H&S Officer of KUL (Periodic Verification and Monitoring)

� H&S Officer/Incharge of the Subcontractor (Direct Verification and Monitoring)

� Onsite manager (Direct Verification and Monitoring)

� Project Management Consultant (PMC)

� Continuous Process

Hazardous Waste Encountered during demolition Evidence of Debris removal and site cleaning

� Demolition Team � Subcontractor � PMC

� Documentation of Debris clearances which will include logging of time of clearance, type of clearances (material type), mode of clearance, vehicle no. (if applicable) and dumping site location details

Annex B

Labour Management Plan

ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES MANAGEMENT

1

ESMP: ANNEX B-LABOR MANAGEMENT PLAN

1.1 INTRODUCTION

The construction phase of the project, 45 Nirvana Hills, has significant involvement of construction labor. It is for this purpose that a labor management plan is required to manage the labor issues, including the migrant laborers. This plan will be applicable not only for the direct contractors, but also for the various sub contractors whose services would be engaged for the project. The plan first puts together the present status of the project in terms of the construction and the hiring of the laborers and a brief description of the future component which would require engaging of laborers.

1.1.1 Project Location and Components

The project can be broadly divided into three components: (a) Rehabilitation Component; (b) the Sale Component, i.e. commercial and residential buildings; and (c) Construction of associated infrastructure and other facilities to support development of Nirvana Hills Phase 2 Project. The entire project is to be developed over an area of approximately 79.75 acres or 3, 22,736.799 m2 and will be in a phased-approach over the next 5 years. Table 1.1 provides details on the slum blocks that are to be considered under the scheme. Slum Zone and Number of Tenements

Name of the Zone Number of Tenements Phase of Development Wader Vasti 488 Phase I (completed) Kilewadi and Indira Park 1145 Phase II Rajeev Gandhi Park 985 Phase II Rautwadi 498 Phase III Hanuman Nagar 1145 Phase IV and V Vasant Nagar 571 Phase V Total 4832 From Phase II to Completion *Source: Phase II to Phase V data from KUL Socio-economic Survey 2011 The Rehabilitation Component (not including the completed rehabilitation of Wadarvasti in Phase I of the development) involves the construction of 21 buildings, each having 11 floors with 13 flats on each floor. The net carpet area provided for each of these apartments is equivalent to 25m2 or 269 feet2 as per SRA guidelines. KUL has obtained sanction or commencement certificate for 725 tenements for Rajeev Gandhi Park (KUL is yet to receive a sanction/commencement certificate for the 711 slum dwellers eligible for rehabilitation at Kilewadi and Indira Park). Component 1: Slum Rehabilitation Component � Includes construction of two transit buildings � Area of Construction: Kilewadi and Rajiv Gandhi Park � Contractor: M/s Karan Builders � Labor licence for 70 laborers � No. of Laborers – approximately 40 laborers working at site � Labor camp has been setup behind the KUL Community Relations office (as well as site

office) at Rajiv Gandhi Park � Most of the laborers are migrants from Bihar and Bengal � Facilities of portable toilets, water and electricity has been provided on site


2

� PF, insurance/mediclaim documents were shown for review during ERM visit

The Free Sale Component will involve utilization of transferable development rights and a Floor Space Index of 2.5 from the construction of the rehabilitation buildings to develop commercial and residential spaces inside the project zone. Out of the 41 towers, KUL will establish 18 residential and commercial towers in the area allocated as per TDR and FSI by the SRA for their own sale.

The Amenities and Infrastructure Component is one of the most significant aspects of the Nirvana Hills Phase II Project which distinguishes it from a housing project to incorporate elements of a planned township project. In terms of welfare amenities, KUL will provide additional amenities such as temples, playgrounds, library, community halls etc. in the immediate vicinity of the rehabilitation component. Some of the general multipurpose utilities include shopping malls, community centre, kids’ playgrounds, crèche, temples and green zones. The key infrastructure facilities that will be planned for the project area includes: (a) a proposed development plan road in addition to expansion of the existing ARAI road; (b) water supply, storage and rainwater harvesting systems; (c) sewage treatment and disposal systems; (d) Fire fighting systems; and (e) Power Supply and Back-up System.

1.1.2 Purpose

This code relates to labor management throughout the life cycle of the project. The understanding of the labor or the workers for the purpose of this plan has been considered to be wide, including the full time employees of the KUL and not only the construction workers employed at the site. This also includes the non employee workers who will be working as sub contracted workers through the many small scale contractors that may be hired from time to time. The purpose of the labor management plan, especially keeping the context of the KUL operations and the nature of the present work is to identify and incorporate desired actions and monitoring indicators for various aspects related to handling labor/ worker related issues effectively.

Component 2: Free sale Component � Includes development of commercial and residential towers to be put up for sale by KUL in

the allotted TDR and FSI space near Wader Vasti � Presently, construction of C2 tower is ongoing in this area � The contractor is M/s Man Infra Construction Limited � Possess a labor licence of 100 laborers currently. Will apply for more as and when required � Present temporary labor camps are located next to the construction site itself adjacent to the

Karve road and laborers are camped here. � The camps presently house approximately 50 laborers. � New labor camps are been constructed at the quarry site also located adjacent to the

construction site. The capacity of these camps would approximate to about 300 laborers � Most of the present laborers are migrants from Bihar, Orissa and West Bengal � Facilities of mobile toilets, water and electricity has been provided on site � Man Infra has a project execution plan that they maintain when it comes to managing the

laborers (a scanned copy is attached with the mail) � PF, insurance/mediclaim documents were shown for review during ERM visit


3

1.1.3 Scope:

The scope of the KUL Operations is understood to be starting from construction, and ending at decommissioning of the housing projects. However, there will be a section of employees who will continue to work as regular staffs even after the completion of the present housing project. The scope of the present labor management plan has been broadly categorised into two components: Aspects for Ensuring Proper Labor Management

� Human resource Policy � Working Relationship Policy � Working Conditions & Terms of Employment Policy � Workers’ Organizations � Non-Discrimination & Equal Opportunity � Retrenchment � Grievance Mechanism � Child Labor � Forced Labor � Occupational Health & Safety � Non-Employee Workers

Setting up and management of Labor Camp

� Site Selection and construction � Facilities at the labor camp including safety, amenities etc. � Use and maintenance � Dismantling and reinstatement of labor camp occupied land

Setting up and management of labor camp has been dealt with separately as they are considered to be an integral part of any construction project involving influx of migrant workers travelling alone or with their families including the children in some of the cases. Labor camp is mainly envisaged to be set up during the construction phase and the laborers would mostly fall in the category of either inter state or intra state migrant laborers. Note: The grievance redressal mechanism for labors/ workers has been separately dealt in the Grievance redressal plan. References and Recommended further reading

� The Building and other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996 and Central Rules, 1998 made thereunder stipulates that all establishments employing more than ten (10) workers will have to meet the provisions of the act and rules made thereunder.

� For engaging twenty or more labor on contract on any day the Contractor shall also abide by the provisions laid down in the Contract Labor (Regulation & Abolition) Act, 1970. Under this Act, the Contractor shall secure a license from the Labor Commissioner after certification from the Employer (KUL). The contractor shall maintain all wage, attendance, PF, leave registers as applicable under the Act and shall keep them available for any inspection by the Employer.


4

� Similarly the provisions of Interstate Migrant Workmen Act 1979 shall become applicable in case 5 or more interstate migrant workmen are engaged by the Contractor.

� Child labor prohibition Act shall be universally applicable to the Contractor which prohibits employing of any workmen/labor below the age of 14 years. In addition compliance to labor laws like payment of wages, payment of PF, equal remuneration, hours of work, overtime, weekly holiday etc shall be observed by the contractor as per applicable laws.

� Chapter 6 of The Building and other Construction Workers Act and Chapter 28 of Central rules stipulate the basic welfare measures that are to be provided by the employer or establishment. Similarly Chapter 5 of Contract Labor Act stipulates the basic welfare measures. The stipulations shall be reviewed and followed.

� http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARDS&p_id=9791

� www.whoindia.org/.../Water_Quality_neeri_Annexure-I_DRINKING_WATER_–_SPECIFICATION.pdf

Different Aspects of Ensuring Labor Management

Aspects for Ensuring Proper Labor Management

SNo. Guiding principles Desired Actions Responsible Agency Monitoring Indicators 1 Human resource Policy � KUL will have a

documented policy and procedure related to Human resources.

� KUL will inform workers of their rights under national labor and employment law (Kindly refer ANNEXURE to the plan)

� Policy must be clear and understandable to all workers

� Centrally organize all policies and procedures;

� Identify and record responsible person and last date modified

� Conduct an annual review of all policies and procedures

� Prominently display policies and procedures in all local languages

� Appoint a person responsible for monitoring policies and procedures related to labor law implementation

� Implement standardized routine training

� KUL Management Team

� Complete review of all policies and procedures

� Review of management-worker committee meeting minutes

� Communications (memos, letters, etc.) to workers, suppliers, contractors and multi-stakeholder groups

� Interviews with management and workers � Interviews with external stakeholders � Budgets related to implementing labor

policy � Training curricula and logs

2 Working Relationship Policy � KUL will document and

communicate working conditions and terms of employment to all workers

� Wages and benefits must be clearly communicated and understood by all workers

� Provide all workers with a contract in their native language

� Provide documented training on contracts, wages, benefits and deductions for all workers

� Routinely provide workers with a clear record of pay calculations

� KUL Management Team

� Contracts for all workers � Policies and procedures related to worker

contracts and wages � Communication and training on wage

calculation, including local laws � Payroll records, time sheets and pay stubs � Piece rate or performance pay calculations

verified against minimum wage � Worker interviews

3 Working Conditions & Terms of Employment Policy

� If there is a collective bargaining agreement, the company will respect its terms

� KUL must provide reasonable working conditions and terms of

� Ongoing internal verification that all workers are receiving wages and benefits as prescribed by law

� Ongoing communication and training on legal labor rights and company personnel policies

� Worker representatives meets

� KUL Management Team/ Human Resources & Administration

� Collective bargaining agreement (if one exists)

� Worker contracts � Policies and procedures related to wages,

benefits, hours and leave � Wage calculations as they relate to local

laws

SNo. Guiding principles Desired Actions Responsible Agency Monitoring Indicators employment, at a minimum complying with the various local laws as attached in ANNEXURE to this plan

regularly with HR and company management

� Training on minimum legal benefits for all workers, including contractors, and employment agencies

� Worker and external stakeholder interviews � National law as it relates to wage and

benefit minimums � Employment and termination records

4 Workers’ Organizations � KUL will recognizes

workers’ rights to form and to join workers’ organizations

� KUL cannot interfere with or discriminate against workers who choose to organize

� Worker representatives must have access to management

� Worker organizations are expected to fairly represent the workforce

� Clear communication to workers on their rights to collective bargaining

� Allow workers to meet to address workplace issues

� Regular training on worker-manager communications

� Regular meetings of management and worker representatives

� Periodic documented communication with local unions and NGOs

� KUL Human Resources and Administration

� Documented policy regarding collective bargaining

� Minutes and records from collective bargaining sessions, reviews or other actions

� Procedure for workers to select worker representative without management interference

� Interviews with workers, NGOs and trade unions

� Collective bargaining agreements � Grievance mechanism

5 Non-Discrimination & Equal Opportunity

� People should be hired, promoted and compensated solely based on their ability to do the job

� All workers should have equal access to training, tools and opportunities for advancement

� All workers should be free from harassment by management or other workers

� Positive discrimination may be allowable in cases where it protects disadvantaged or

� Clearly define anti-discrimination policy in hiring, training, promotions and compensation

� Regularly review worker and manager demographics

� Develop long term remediation plan to address past discrimination

� Provide regular training to workers and managers

� Establish confidential and secure communication channels for workers to reach managers

� Actively promote a harassment-free workplace


� Discrimination policy and related employment policies and procedures

� Company policy and procedure to address and manage discrimination issues when found

� Comparative demographics of workers and managers

� Documentation of handled discrimination cases

� Diversity training curriculum and attendance log

� Interviews with workers and managers, including those who may be likely to be discriminated against

� Interviews with local NGOs and trade

SNo. Guiding principles Desired Actions Responsible Agency Monitoring Indicators excluded groups and provides them special opportunities

unions � Hiring, promotion and termination records � Local laws related to discrimination

6 Retrenchment � KUL will develop and

implement a plan to mitigate the adverse impact of retrenchment if it anticipates a large number of layoffs

� The plan will incorporate non-discrimination principles and include the input of workers, their organizations, where appropriate, the government

Note: The contractors may be asked to prepare such a lay off plan especially if the local community is engaged as laborers, as most of the migrant laborers are shifted to other sites for work by the contractor itself.

� Policy and procedure for workforce reduction, including worker selection

� Analysis of alternatives to workforce reduction

� Engage workers in discussions with workers related to workforce reduction as early as possible

� Communication to all workers about why and how the reduction will take place

� Discussions with local NGOs about how the community impact of workforce reduction could be minimized


� Policy and procedure related to workforce reduction, severance and transition

� Analysis of alternatives � Procedures for selecting workers impacted

by workforce reduction � Documentation of prior instances of

workforce reductions � Minutes from management meetings and

discussions � Communications with workers related to

workforce reduction � Communications with external stakeholders

and community groups

7 Grievance Mechanism � KUL will establish a

transparent process for workers to express concerns and file grievances

� There will be no retaliation or discrimination against those that express grievances

� KUL Management will treat the grievances seriously and take appropriate action

� KUL’s grievance mechanism

� Establish clear policies and procedures for grievances

� Communicate the grievance process to all workers in a clear, understandable manner

� Provide ongoing training to all workers

� Document all grievances and the resulting actions

� Make worker representatives a key part of the process

� Community Relations Team, KUL Human Resources and Administration

� Documented policy and procedure for worker grievances

� Worker and manager interviews � Training curriculum and log on grievance

handling � Communications to workers, supervisors

and managers � Records of complaints lodged and actions

taken on grievances � Employment and termination records

SNo. Guiding principles Desired Actions Responsible Agency Monitoring Indicators does not replace other channels as defined by law or collective bargaining agreements

Note: Kindly refer to the grievance redressal Plan for KUL for detailed information

8 Child Labor � KUL will not employ

workers under the minimum age for employment as defined by national law (.i.e below 18 years of age)

� Workers between the minimum age and 18 will not be employed in dangerous work or work that interferes with their education or development

� Write clearly defined policies and procedures for age verification – make them publicly available

� Develop remediation plan for use in cases where children are unknowingly employed despite KUL’s No Child Labor policies and procedures (ex: child presents false ID)

� Engage with local stakeholders to develop proactive plans to address child labor issues

� Communicate child labor policies to KUL’s suppliers and contractors – and provide them with the training and tools to address the issue


� Policies and procedures for age verification in hiring

� Interviews with workers, local children, trade unions and NGOs

� Visual observation � Pay records, medical records, birth

certificates, panchayat certificate

9 Forced Labor � KUL will not employ forced

labor � Workers have the right to

retain their personal documents and money

� Workers are free to leave the workplace after work

� Workers have the right to resign

� Clearly define worker’s freedom in employment contract

� Provide employment contracts to all workers in their language - direct or contracted

� Define and enforce policy regarding use of employment agencies and expectations

� If employment agencies are used, audit relationship between the agency and the workers

� Provide training for all workers to explain their rights


� Employment contracts in all appropriate languages

� Contracts with employment or recruitment agencies

� Payroll records, timesheets and wage deduction calculations

� List of permanent workers and contracted workers at KUL facility

� Worker passports or IDs � Interviews with all workers, employment

agencies and external stakeholders � Interviews with security guards

SNo. Guiding principles Desired Actions Responsible Agency Monitoring Indicators � Pay all job related training and

equipment expenses 10 Occupational Health & Safety � KUL will take all reasonable

precaution actions to protect the health and safety of workers

� KUL will ensure that workers are not exposed to unnecessary or unreasonable risks at the workplace, dormitories etc.

� KUL will implement an OHS management system consistent with international standards such as OHSAS 18001.

� KUL will systematically assess all of the OHS risks, conducting a comprehensive job safety or job hazard analyses.

� KUL will implement preventive and protective measures according to the order of priority: Eliminating the hazard, Controlling the hazard at its source, Minimizing the hazard, Providing appropriate personal protective equipment

� KUL will document, investigate and report all accidents and occupational diseases.

� KUL will investigate and identify the root causes of all accidents with working

� Structuring an OHS team and an OHS accountability framework (including production area)

� Conducting a comprehensive job safety or job hazard analyses

� Developing a Corrective OHS Action Plan based on the likelihood and severity of the consequence of exposure to the identified hazards

� Proper equipment design, maintenance and procedures, such as: Designing machines and equipments like stairs, to eliminate trap hazards

� Turning off, disconnecting, isolating, and de-energizing (Locked Out and Tagged Out) machinery with exposed or guarded moving parts or being serviced

� Marking and checking all energized electrical devices, cords and lines with warning signs

� Implementing proper monitoring systems of hazardous agents and proper control measures (eliminating risk, PPC, PPE)

Some examples of things to be done include: � Integrity of Workplace Structures –

reachable, easy to clean, fore resistant, floors

� Workspace and exits – unobstructed, clearly marked, consider disabilities

� Fire Precautions � Amenities- toilets, potable water, lighting � Safe Access –even pathways, falling

objects, railings

� Contractors, Community Relations Team and KUL Human Resources

� Visual observation � Exposure to hazardous agents monitoring

log � Manager and worker interviews � Accident and medical treatment logs � Equipment maintenance logs � Fire and safety drill logs � Health and safety risk analysis � Health and safety inspection logs with test

results � Government health inspection reports � Training curriculum and logs

SNo. Guiding principles Desired Actions Responsible Agency Monitoring Indicators time loss, and implement appropriate corrective actions

Note: This can be done through the involved contractors also.

� First Aid- training � Fresh air supply � Physical Hazards- Working at heights,

Vibrations, Electrical, Ergonomics, illumination

� PPEs � Communication- Induction orientation,

training

11 Non-Employee Workers � KUL will extend the

previously discussed indicators to contractors hired directly or through employment agencies.

� KUL will not use contracting as a means of circumventing labor rights and laws.

� Employment and recruitment agencies will be monitored to verify their adherence to labor rights and laws.

� Provide employment contracts to all workers in their language - direct or contracted

� If employment agencies are used, audit relationship between the agency and the workers

� Provide training for all contracted workers to explain their rights

� Include contracted workers in grievance process access and training

� Contractors, Community Relations Team and KUL Human Resources

� Contracted labor contracts in all appropriate languages

� Contracts with employment or recruitment agencies

� Payment records, timesheets and wage deduction calculations for contracted workers

� Listing of direct employees and contracted workers at KUL facility

� Interviews with managers, employment agencies and external stakeholders

� Interviews with contracted workers - directly contracted and through agencies

Labor Camp management

Procedures and Responsibilities

SNo. Key areas of work Description Responsibility Format/ Record Reference 1. Need for Labor Camps

Weigh the options � It will be the responsibility of Contractor to make his own arrangement

for the land required by him for setting up site offices, labor camps and stores.

� For small duration works, Contractor may not require a dedicated labor camp to be set-up. Instead, Contractor can analyse all the best available options such as rental or leased housing stock available with the local community for providing housing to his labor staff.

� Contractor may also analyse the option of hiring local laborers in both skilled and unskilled category to avoid setting up dedicated labor camp under the project.

� However, if the Contractor decides to set-up labor camp(s), the management measures recommended in this SOP shall be fully complied as a minimum requirement.

Contractors and Sub contractors

� Site selected keeping environmental issues as one of the criteria

2. Site Selection during Project planning stage

� EPC Contractor shall identify probable labor campsites both within project area and outside after having consultations with KUL.

� The selected sites shall be evaluated against environmental impacts anticipated at each site. The site with least environmental problems which are mitigable shall be identified and reported to KUL for approval.

� Assistance of KUL shall also be sought in order to identify a land which has no local issues and ownership conflicts since the contractor will have to pay rent for using the land.

Other best practices: � Building Standards –construction material, fire and electrical safety

(where cooking is allowed), plumbing and sanitation. � General Living Facilities:

a. Avoid areas of water logging and natural hazards b. Reasonable distance to place of work c. Transportation is safe and free d. Good repair and kept clean


� Site selection criteria adopted

� Site identified in tender documents

3. Land Use � Ideal land use at probable construction campsites could be open, barren and non-agricultural land devoid of any vegetation or minimum


� Vegetation removal with permission

SNo. Key areas of work Description Responsibility Format/ Record Reference vegetation. In urban areas, unused and isolated private/public lands shall be preferred over properties located in midst of residential or forested land use. Vacant, unused lands that are located at least 500-1000 m away from nearest habitation areas shall be preferred.

4. Tree Felling � At selected site, no trees above 100-mm girth size shall be felled. All

efforts to reduce felling of trees shall be encouraged by working out alternate layout plans. Tree felling is a regulated activity.


5. Agreement with Landowner Note: to be applicable only if the camps are constructed outside the project area.

� Contractor shall obtain the approval of landowner even in the case of government owned land. The agreement or approval letter shall specifically state that land will be returned to the owner in pre-project stage status after the agreed duration.

� Payment of fair land rent value, clause for payment of compensation for any damages due to project work and time period within which the land shall be returned etc shall be explicitly mentioned in the agreement with the landowner.

� To record the pre-construction stage status, contractor shall take photographs of the site from every angle and document the same.

� During the agreement period Contractor will be responsible for discouraging encroachers and hawkers around the campsite. A copy of final agreement shall be kept ready for any inspection by the KUL.


� Agreement with landowner

6. Soil Environment � Before setting up construction camps, during clearing operation, topsoil of about 100-150 mm thick, shall be removed, if the site selected is having vegetation even in the form of ground grass cover. The removed topsoil shall be preferably used for landscaping efforts at project site or within the camp site.

� Stacking at camp site should be exercised as the last option. If stored in stacks, care should be taken to avoid anaerobic condition developing in the stacks by limiting stack height to a maximum of 1.5 m and overturning the stacks after every 3-6 months.


� Practices adopted to save and store topsoil

7. Sensitive receptors � Sensitive receptors such as residential areas, educational institutes, hospitals, religious places, community playgrounds, water bodies used for public purposes, declared forested areas etc shall not share boundary with camp site.

� Preferably, the campsite should be located at the farthest location possible.


� Location with respect to nearby sensitive receptors. Document the selection process.

SNo. Key areas of work Description Responsibility Format/ Record Reference

8. Sanitary facilities � Toilet facilities adequate in number for the capacity of the camp shall be provided.

� A shared toilet facility shall be located at least 200 feet away of residential dwelling units. If less distance is available, the orientation shall be kept in such a way that facility faces away from residential area. No shared toilet facility shall be closer than 100 feet to any sleeping room, dining room, lunch area, or kitchen.

� Separate toilet rooms shall be provided for each sex. These rooms shall be distinctly marked "for men" and "for women" by signs printed in English and in the native language of the persons occupying the camp, or marked with easily understood pictures or symbols. If the facilities for each sex are in the same building, solid walls or partitions extending from the floor to the roof or ceiling shall separate them.

� Number of privy toilet seats shall be in the ratio of one unit to each 15 persons, with a minimum of two units for any shared facility.

� Urinals shall be provided on the basis of one unit or 2 linear feet of urinal trough for each 25 men. Urinals shall be provided with adequate water flush.

Best practices: � Easily cleanable � Cleaned regularly � Adequate privacy � Separate for men and women � Adequate numbers (between 1/6 to 1/15) � Not far – 30mt to 60 mt from residence � Hand-washing facilities


� Adequate number in compliance

� Adequacy of facilities provided for both sex

� Location and provision of sanitary facilities

9. Bathing facilities � In the campsite, shared bathing rooms in the ratio of one room for every 10 persons shall be provided.

� If bathing facilities for each sex are in the same building, solid walls or partitions extending from the floor to the roof or ceiling shall separate them.

� Bathing room floors shall be made of smooth finish but not slippery materials; they shall be impervious to moisture. Floor drains shall be provided in all bathrooms.

Best practices:


� Adequate bathroom facilities

SNo. Key areas of work Description Responsibility Format/ Record Reference • Adequate numbers (between 1/6 to 1/15) • Safe and clean floors – not slippery • Cold and hot running water, if possible

10. Laundry and washing

facilities � Hard floored washing area behind bathing facilities shall be provided in

the ratio of 20 sq.ft per 30 persons or 15 families. � Flooring material shall be of smooth finish but not slippery. Floor drains

shall be provided to clear wastewater. Facilities for drying clothes shall be provided.


� Adequate washing facilities

11. Upkeep and maintenance of sanitary facilities

� Each toilet rooms, bathing rooms and washing area shall be lighted naturally or artificially by a safe type of lighting at all hours of the day and night.

� Each of toilet, bathrooms and wash area shall be kept in a sanitary condition. They shall be cleaned at least daily.


� Adequate lighting in all enclosed rooms

12. Lighting � Where electric service is available, each habitable room in a camp shall be provided with at least one ceiling-type light fixture.

� Laundry and toilet rooms and rooms where people congregate shall contain at least one ceiling- or wall-type fixture.

� Light levels in toilet and storage rooms shall be at least 20 foot-candles 30 inches from the floor.

� Other rooms, including kitchens and living quarters, shall be at least 30 foot-candles 30 inches from the floor.


� Adequate luminance

13. Domestic garbage disposal bins

� Common campsite garbage bins shall be provided at least 100feet away from nearest residential unit.

� Bins shall be made of metal barrels with lids and tarred inside or other equivalent container material.

� The containers shall be kept clean and emptied when full, but not less than twice a week.

� Disposal shall be at designated disposal sites as advised by the local Panchayat body or the municipal corporation.


14. Construction Camp facilities

� One residential unit shall be provided for each family at the campsite. � Any dimension of the residential unit shall not be less than 7 feet. Each

adult person shall have minimum dwelling area of not less than 40 sq. feet. In case of dormitories, each person shall have a minimum of 50 sq. feet of dwelling area.


� Adequate dwelling space

SNo. Key areas of work Description Responsibility Format/ Record Reference � In the units wherein workers cook, live and sleep in a single room, a

minimum area of 100 Sq. feet per person shall be provided. � In addition, if the contractor is engaging women labor, the provisions

regarding crèches shall also be observed as per law. Best practices: Rooms and Dormitories � Density- 4-5.5 sq mt space � clean, ventilation � Clean floors � Ceiling height – at least 2.1 mt � Room sharing – range between 2-8 � Lockable doors and windows � Mosquito screens/options � Mobile partitions, curtains � Every resident provided- bed, chair, table, bedside lamp, mirror � Separate sleeping area for men and women � Beds

a. Separate bed for each worker- avoid hot bedding b. Space between beds at least 1 mt c. Double deck avoidable. If not, then at least 0.7-1.1 mt difference d. Triple deck- prohibited e. Clean mattress and bedding f. Storage space g. Space to PPEs and safety boots etc

15. Material of Construction � The residential units shall be constructed of reusable/ recyclable

materials, which are easy to construct and dismantle. � Construction material shall be selected to provide protection against

harsh natural elements such as heat, cold, monsoon etc. � If corrugated GI sheets are used as roofing material, to provide cool

liveable environment inside, double roofing of the same material or providing a thatched roof above campsite units shall be considered.


� Reuseable materials used

16. Provision for drinking water

� Wholesome drinking water at the rate of 10 litres per person per day shall be provided in the camps which shall be used for drinking and cooking purpose only.

� For bathing, washing and ablution purposes, potable water at the rate of 30 litres per person per day shall be provided.


� Adequate quantity of water provided

SNo. Key areas of work Description Responsibility Format/ Record Reference � The water quality provided at the campsite for all purposes including

bathing and washing should meet the ISO 10500-1993 specifications for desirable quality parameters (weblink provided at the end).

� The contractor shall arrange for the testing of drinking water by way of personal equipment or through an analytical laboratory.

Best practices: � Water-

a. Easy access to clean source of water. b. Clean storage c. Monitoring quality

17. Provision for cooking fuel � All laborers staying in the camp shall be provided with/or encouraged

to use kerosene stoves at the least for cooking purposes. � Use of firewood for cooking shall be discouraged or prohibited. � Within the residential unit good ventilation shall be provided if cooking

is to be done inside. It will be better to cook outdoors than inside dark and enclosed living rooms of the unit.


� Cooking practices adopted at campsite

18. Liquid waste generation and disposal – Regulatory Compliance

� Liquid waste generation and disposal from labor camp site is a regulated activity under the Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974.

� Any new discharge or disposal of liquid waste requires consent to establish (CTE) and operate (CTO) from the Maharashtra State Pollution Control Board (MSPCB).

� The regulatory implications and applicability of the act on the construction labor camps needs to be ascertained from the local Regional Office of MSPCB. At any point during the contract period, Contractor is expected to comply with the regulations and directives of MSPCB.

� If CTE and CTO are not required under the Water Act for labor camp facilities, an exemption letter issued by MSPCB shall be maintained as part of Project Records. A copy of the CTO/CTE or the exemption letter shall be kept available for any inspection by the KUL.


19. Liquid waste generation and disposal

� A common kitchen utensil washing area shall be provided. Washing outside dwelling units shall be prohibited.

� Liquid waste generated from bathing, laundry wash, kitchen utensils wash areas shall be collected at one point and disposed off to public sewer system if available.

� If more than 1000 litres of water is consumed at a campsite for various


� Practices adopted to handle liquid waste

SNo. Key areas of work Description Responsibility Format/ Record Reference purposes, installing appropriate, onsite packaged treatment plant will be appropriate.

� Treated wastewater can be used for landscaping and gardening purposes or disposed off in public sewer system.

Best practices: � Discharge should meet national and WB standards – see Pollution

Prevention and Abatement Handbook, July 1998 – WB � Rubbish removal- containers at least 30 mt away from each shelter, at a

height, easily cleaned, cleaned regularly, odour etc managed. � Vector control

20. Wastewater generated from toilets

� Wastewater emanating from toilets and urinals shall be treated onsite before disposal.

� Onsite options such as septic tanks and twin pit pour flush latrines shall be preferred.


� Practices adopted to handle toilet waste

21. Solid waste generation and disposal

� Solid waste generated shall be collected in common campsite garbage barrels as mentioned earlier.

� Collected garbage shall not be burnt in open as it is prohibited under Solid waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2000.

� Salvageable dry waste (such as recyclable plastics, metal, glass, containers etc) shall be removed prior to disposal through the use of local scavengers.

� Wet solid waste shall be transported to nearest municipal/Panchayat disposal site.

� If area is available onsite treatment systems such as composting shall be encouraged for treating wet waste.

Best practices: � Discharge should meet national and WB standards – see Pollution

Prevention and Abatement Handbook, July 1998 – WB � Rubbish removal- containers at least 30 mt away from each shelter, at a

height, easily cleaned, cleaned regularly, odour etc managed. � Vector control


� Practices adopted to handle solid waste

22. General Housekeeping and Sanitation

� The entire campsite area shall be managed with better housekeeping practices.

� Sweeping the area daily at least once, prohibiting spitting, bathing,


� General cleanliness of campsite

SNo. Key areas of work Description Responsibility Format/ Record Reference washing etc in open camp community space, avoiding cesspool formation of water/wastewater in low-lying areas, not throwing garbage and waste food indiscriminately in open areas, or feeding to local cattle, prohibiting open defecation etc.

� Effective measures shall be taken to prevent infestation by and harbourage of animals (pigs and stray dogs) or insect vectors or pests especially at waste disposal locations

23. Reinstatement of Land � During reinstatement, all efforts to return the land in its pre-construction

stage status shall be taken. Onsite treatment systems like septic tanks, leach pits, composting yards, if established, shall be closed safely.

� Topsoil collected prior to establishment shall be re-spread and vegetation reinstated.

� Any encroachers within or adjoining camp boundary shall be discouraged and Landowner/ KUL shall be kept informed about such developments.

� A satisfaction certificate will be secured form the landowner upon handing back the land. This certificate as well as photographs of restored land shall be kept as a document of proof and shall be provided to KUL during any inspection.


� Satisfactory reinstatement of land occupied by campsite

24. Health and Welfare Measures

� If the project campsite is to be used and maintained for more than 6 months duration at a location, the Works contractor may organise and arrange medical camps exclusively for the benefit of construction workers and their families staying in the camp.

� The medical camp shall be organised under a registered medical practitioner.


� Health and welfare measures provided


19

Relevant Stipulations Reproduced from Construction Workers Act, 1996 and Central Rules, 1998

Annex 1


20

The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and

Conditions of Service) Act, 1996

CHAPTER VI

Hours of Work, Welfare Measures and Other Conditions of Service of Building Workers

28. Fixing hours for normal working day, etc.- (1) The appropriate Government may, by rules, -

(a) fix the number of hours of work which shall constitute a normal working day for a building worker, inclusive of one or more specified intervals;

(b) provide for a day of rest in every period of seven days which shall be allowed to all building workers and for the payment of remuneration in respect of such days of rest;

(c) provide for payment of work on a day of rest at a rate not less than the overtime rate specified in section 29

(2) The provisions of sub-section (1) shall, in relation to the following classes of

building workers, apply only to such extent, and subject to such conditions, as may be prescribed, namely - (a) persons engaged on urgent work, or in any emergency which could not

have been foreseen or prevented; (b) persons engaged in a work in the nature of preparatory or

complementary work which must necessarily be carried on outside the normal hours of work laid down in the rules;

(c) persons engaged in any work which for technical reasons has to be completed before the day is over;

(d) persons engaged in a work which could not be carried on except at times dependent on the irregular action of natural forces.

29. Wages for overtime work- (1) Where any building worker is required to work on any day in excess of the

number of hours constituting a normal working day, he shall be entitled to wages at the rate of twice his ordinary rate or wages.

(2) For the purpose of this section,” ordinary rates of wages” means the basic

wages plus such allowance as the worker is for the time being entitled to but does not include any bonus.

30. Maintenance of registers and records- (1) Every employer shall maintain such registers and records giving such

particulars of building workers employed by him, the work performed by them, the number of hours of work which shall constitute a normal working day for them, a day of rest in period of seven days which shall be allowed to them, the wages paid to them, the receipts given by them and such other particulars in such form as may be prescribed.


21

(2) Every employer shall keep exhibited, in such manner as may be prescribed, in the place where such workers may be employed, notices in the prescribed from containing the prescribed particulars.

(3) The appropriate Government may, by rules, provide for the issue of wage books or wage slips to building workers employed in an establishment and prescribe the manner in which entries shall be made and authenticated in such wage books or wage slips by the employer or his agent.

31. Prohibition of employment of certain persons in certain building or other construction work- No person about whom the employer knows or has reason to believe that he is a deaf or he has a defective vision or he has a tendency to giddiness shall be required or allowed to work in any such operation of building or other construction work which is likely to involve a risk of any accident either to the building worker himself or to any other person. 32. Drinking water- (1) The employer shall make in every place where building or other construction

work is in progress, effective arrangements to provide and maintain at suitable points conveniently situated for all persons employed therein, a sufficient supply of wholesome drinking water.

(2) All such points shall be legibly marked “Drinking Water” in a language understood by a majority of the persons employed in such place and no such point shall be situated within six metres of any washing place, urinal or latrine.

33. Latrines and urinals- In every place where building or other construction work is carried on, the employer shall provide sufficient latrine and urinal accommodation of such types as may be prescribed and they shall be so conveniently situated as may be accessible to the building workers at all times while they are in such place. Provided that it shall not be necessary to provide separate urinals in any place where less than fifty persons are employed or where the latrines are connected to a water-borne sewage system. 34. Accommodation- (1) The employer shall provide, free of charges and within the work site or as near

to it as may be possible, temporary living accommodation to all building workers employed by him for such period as the building or other construction work is in progress.

(2) The temporary accommodation provided under sub-section (1) shall have separate cooking place, bathing, washing and lavatory facilities.

(3) As soon as may be, after the building or other construction work is over, the employer shall, at his own cost, cause removal or demolition of the temporary structures erected by him for the purpose of providing living accommodation, cooking place or other facilities to the building workers as required under sub-section (1) and restore the ground in good level and clean condition.

(4) In case an employer is given any land by a Municipal Board or any other local authority for the purposes of providing temporary accommodation for the building workers under this section, he shall, as soon as may be after the


22

construction work is over, return the possession of such land in the same condition in which he received the same.

35. Creches- (1) In every place wherein, more than fifty female building workers are ordinarily

employed, there shall be provided and maintained a suitable room or rooms for the use of children under the age of six years of such female workers.

(2) Such rooms shall- (a) provide adequate accommodation; (b) be adequate lighted and ventilated; (c) be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition; (d) be under the charge of women trained in the care of children and

infants. 36. First-aid- Every employer shall provide in all the places where building or other construction work is carried on such first-aid facilities as may be prescribed. 37. Canteens, etc.- The appropriate Government may, by rules, require the employer- (1) to provide and maintain in every place wherein not less than two hundred and

fifty building workers are ordinarily employed, a canteen for the use of the workers;

(2) to provide such other welfare measures for the benefit of building workers as may be prescribed.


23

The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and

Conditions of Service) Central Rules, 1998

CHAPTER XXVIII

WELFARE OF BUILDING WORKERS 243. Latrine and urinal accommodation- Latrines or urinals, as the case may be required to be provided under section 33 of the Act shall be of the types as specified below, namely -

a) every latrine shall be under cover and so partitioned off as to secure privacy, and shall have a proper door and fastenings;

b) i) where both male and female building workers are

employed, there shall be displayed outside each block of latrines or urinals a notice containing therein “For Men Only” or “For Women Only”, as the case may be written in the language understood by the majority of such workers;

ii) such notice shall also bear the figure of a man or of a woman, as the case may be;

c) every latrine or urinal shall be convenient situated and accessible to building workers at all times;

d) every latrine or urinal shall be adequately lighted and shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition all times;

e) every latrine or urinal other than those connected with a flush sewage system shall comply with the requirements of the public health authorities;

f) water shall be provided by means of tap or otherwise so as to be conveniently accessible in or near every latrine or urinal;

g) the walls, ceilings and partitions of every latrine or urinal shall be white washed or colour washed once in every period of four months.

244. Canteens- (1) In every place wherein not less than two hundred and fifty building workers

are ordinarily employed, the employer of such building workers shall provide an adequate canteen in the manner as specified in this rule for the use of such building workers.

(2) The canteen, referred to in sub-rule (1) shall consist of a dining hall with furniture sufficient to accommodate building workers using such canteen, a kitchen, store-room, pantry and washing places separately or building workers and for utensils.

(3) i) The canteen referred to in sub-rule (1) shall be sufficiently lighted at all

times when any person has access to it; ii) the floor of such canteen shall be made of smooth and impervious material

and inside walls of such canteen shall be lime-washed or colour-washed at least once in every six months.


24

Provided that such inside walls of the kitchen of such canteen shall be lime-washed once in every three months. (4)

i) The precincts of the canteen referred to in sub-rule (1) shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition;

ii) waste water from such canteen shall be carried away in suitable covered drains and shall not be allowed to accumulate in the surroundings of such canteen;

iii) suitable arrangement shall be made for the collection and disposal of garbage from such canteen.

(5) Building of the canteen referred to in sub-rule (1) shall be situated at the distance not less than fifteen point two metres from any latrine or urinal or any source of dust, smoke or obnoxious fumes. 245. Foodstuff to be served in the Canteen- The foodstuffs and other items to be served in the canteen, referred to in sub-rule (1) of rule 244, shall be in conformity with the normal dietary habits of the building workers. 246. Serving of tea and snacks at the work places- At a building or other construction work where a work place is situated at a distance of more than zero point two kilometres from the canteen provided under sub-rule (1) of rule 244, arrangement shall be made by the employer employing building workers at such place for serving tea and light refreshment to such building workers at such place. 247. Charges of foodstuff- (1) The charges for foodstuff, beverages and other items served in the canteen

provided under sub-rule (1) of rule 244 shall be based on “no profit no loss” and the price list of such items shall be conspicuously displayed in such canteen.

(2) In arriving at the prices of items referred to in sub-rule (1) the following shall not be taken into consideration as expenditure, namely -

(a) the rent for the land and building of such canteen; (b) the depreciation and maintenance charges for the building and

equipment provided in such canteen; (c) the cost of purchase, repairs and replacement of equipments including

furniture, crockery, cutlery, utensils and uniforms provided to the employees of such canteen;

(d) the water charges and other charges incurred for lighting and ventilation of such canteen, and

(e) the interest on the amounts spent for providing and maintaining furniture and other equipment for such canteen.


25

Contract Labor (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970

CHAPTER V

WELFARE AND HEALTH OF CONTRACT LABOR

16. Canteens.- (1) The appropriate Government may make rules requiring that in every

establishment-to which this Act applies, wherein work requiring employment of contract labor is likely to continue for such period as may be prescribed, and wherein contract labor numbering one hundred or more is ordinarily employed by a contract, one or more canteens shall be provided and maintained by the contractor for the use of such contract labor.

(2) Without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, such rules may provide for-

(a) the date by which the canteens shall be provided; (b) the number of canteens that shall be provided, and the standards in

respect of construction, accommodation, furniture and other equipment of the canteens; and

(c) the foodstuffs which may be served therein and the charges which may be made therefore.

NOTES Provisions, held, are not unreasonable. Gammon India Lid. v. Union of India, (1974) 1 SCC 596. 17. Rest-rooms.- (1) In every place wherein contract labor is required to halt at night in connection

with the work of an establishment-to which this Act applies, and in which work requiring employment of contract labor is likely to continue for such period as may be prescribed, there shall be provided and maintained by the contractor for the use of the contract labor such number of rest-rooms or such other suitable alternative accommodation within such time as may be prescribed.

(2) The rest-rooms or the alternative accommodation to be provided under sub-section (1) shall be sufficiently lighted and ventilated and shall be maintained in a clean and comfortable condition.

NOTES Provisions, held are not unreasonable. Gammon India Ltd. v. Union of India, (1974) 1 SCC 596. 18 Other facilities.- It shall be the duty of every contractor employing contract labor in connection with the work of an establishment to which this Act applies, to provide and maintain-

� a sufficient supply of wholesome drinking water for the contract labor at convenient places;

� a sufficient number of latrines and urinals of the prescribed types so situated as to be convenient and accessible to the contract labor in the establishment; and washing facilities.


26

NOTES Provision, held, reasonable. Gammon India Ltd. v. Union of India, (1974) 1 SCC 596. 19. First-aid facilities.- There shall be provided and maintained by the contractor so as to be readily accessible during all working hours a first aid box equipped with the prescribed contents at every place where contract labor is employed by him. 20. Liability of principal employer in certain cases.- (1) If any amenity required to be provided under Section 16, Section 17, Section 18

or Section 19 for the benefit of the contract labor employed in an establishment is not provided by the contractor within the time prescribed therefore, such amenity shall be provided by the principal employer within such time as may be prescribed.

(2) All expenses incurred by the principal employer in providing the amenity may be recovered by the principal employer from the contractor either by deduction from any amount payable to the contractor under any contract or as a debt payable by the contractor.

NOTES Ss. 20 & 21- Obligation to provide amenities conferred under the Act to the workers is on the principal employer. Government will be responsible for enforcement of those amenities where contractors engaged by it for executing its construction project fail to provide the amenities to its workers. Government's failure to perform its obligation amounts to violation of Art. 21 and workers can enforce their right by writ petition under Art. 32. Peoples’ Union for Democratic Rights v. Union of India, (1982) 3 SCC 235 1982 SCC (L & S) 275. 21. Responsibility for payment of wages.- (1) A contractor shall be responsible for payment of wages to each worker

employed by him as contract labor and such wages shall be paid before the expiry of such period as may be prescribed.

(2) Every principal employer shall nominate a representative duly authorised by him to be present at the time of disbursement of wages by the contractor and it shall be the duty of such representative to certify the amounts paid as wages in such manner as may be prescribed.

(3) It shall be the duty of the contractor to ensure the disbursement of wages in the presence of the authorised representative of the principal employer.

(4) In case the contractor fails to make payment of wages within the prescribed period or makes short payment, then the principal employer shall be liable to make payment of wages in full or the unpaid balance due, as the case may be, to the contract labor employed by the contractor and recover the amount so paid from the contractor either by deduction from any amount payable to the contractor any contract as a debt payable by the contractor.

NOTES S. 21 -Payment of wages including overtime wages etc. must be made directly to the workers in full except with authorised statutory deductions, if any. Payment through


27

khatedars after deducting any advance repayable by the workers to the khatedars or any messing charges etc. was not proper. Due amounts could be recovered from the workers after paying full wages. Laborers Working on Salal Hydro Project v.State of J. &. K., (1983) 2 SCC 181 1981 SCC (L & S) 289.


28

THE INTER-STATE MIGRANT WORKMEN (Regulation of Employment) AND

Conditions of Service) ACT, 1979

I. Object To regulate the employment of inter-state migrant workmen and to provide for their conditions of service and for matters connected therewith. II Applicability It extends to the whole of India and applies to (1) Every establishments in which 5 or more inter-state migrant workmen (whether

or not in addition to other workmen) are employed or who were employed on any day of the preceding twelve months

(2) To every contractor who employed 5 or more interstate migrant worker (whether or not in addition to other workmen) on any day of the Preceding twelve months.

III Who is an Inter-State Migrant Workman Any person who is recruited by or through a contractor in one state under an agreement or other arrangement for employment in an establishment in another state whether with or without the knowledge of the Principle employer. IV Registration of Establishments Every principle employer of an establishment to which this Act applies shall make an application for registration in triplicate in Form No.1 to the registering officer, along with the Prescribed fees. On receipt of an application, registering officer shall issue a registration certificate in From-II based on the specifications stipulated in the concerned State Inter-State Migrant Workmen (regulation of employment and conditions of service) Rules V Fee for Registration (a) If the number of Inter-State Workmen

is 5 but does not Exceed 20 Rs.50.00 (b) Between 20 - 50 Rs.100.00 (c) Between 50 - 100 Rs. 200.00 (d) Between 100 - 200 Rs. 350.00 (e) Between 200 - 400 Rs. 650.00 (f) Above 400 Rs. 800.00 VI Prohibition against Employment of Inter-State Migrant Workmen without Registration No principle employer shall employ inter-state migrant workmen in the establishment unless a certificate of registration is obtained under this Act. VII Licensing Of Contractors No contractor shall


29

(1) Recruit any person in a state for the purpose of employing him in any establishment situated in another state except without obtaining a recruitment licence issued by the licensing officer of the area where the recruitment is done.

(2) Employ any interstate workmen without obtaining an employment licence received from the licensing officer of the area where the establishment is situated.

VII Grant of Licenses The contractor shall apply for a recruitment licence in triplicate in From-IV to the licensing officer having jurisdiction in relation to the area wherein recruitment is made.

Annex C

Stakeholder Engagement Plan

ESMP: ANNEX C -STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT PLAN

1.1 BRIEF INTRODUCTION

The stakeholder engagement plan detailed here relates to Project Nirvana, a slum rehabilitation initiative of Kumar Sinew Urban Developers Limited (KUL), spread over an area of approximately 79 acres and covering six major slum zones. The project is being undertaken in phases and the client is implementing the second phase of the slum rehabilitation (first being Wadar Vasti) in the Kilewadi and Indira Park area that included about 1145 tenements. Due to the prevalent nature and context of the project, the people of the area are likely to face few undesirable and temporary setbacks. Moreover, a project of the scale and nature such as Nirvana would have many other stakeholders too each of whom would be required to co-ordinate and align together for the successful commissioning of the project. Note: The stakeholder engagement plan has taken into consideration the ADB Public Communications Policy which will be effective from April 2012. It is understood that the public disclosure requirements as relevant for the stakeholders identified will need to be compliant with the ADB Communications Policy.

1.2 PROBLEMS OF THE PROJECT AFFECTED PERSONS

Some of them have been detailed below:

� Issues of non-eligibility and compensation: The domicile cut off date is likely to result in about 500 slum households being declared ineligible for rehabilitation according to SRS. These categories of impacted families are likely to be most adversely impacted with eviction/separation form their established networks and accesses.

� Livelihood Disruptions: Displacement of ineligible households and closing down

of ineligible commercial tenements is likely to cause short to medium term income losses to few of the slum dwellers

� Continuous Movement of Men and Material: Demolition of hutments, influx of

migrants and increased movement of vehicles is likely to disturb the existing ambience of the community during the operations phase.

� Community Health and Safety: The resulting piles of debris and construction

materials and subsequent degradation of the water and air quality during the operations phase are a health and safety threat to both labourers and the community people.

1.3 NEED FOR STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATIONS

� Managing community apprehensions about the project: Through consultations, the apprehensions and doubts in the minds of the community people due to the likely evictions, social disturbances and livelihood disruptions can be quelled to a great extent

� Creating Awareness about the project: Stakeholder consultations can help create

awareness about the SRS scheme and the terms of agreement for rehabilitation to a large segment of the ignorant population.

� Garnering voluntary support for the project: Stakeholder consultations bring about

greater transparency likely to result in greater acceptance of the rehabilitation scheme and people taking informed decision about the rehabilitation.

� Discussing in-transit arrangements: During stakeholder consultations, transit

options could be discussed and finalised with individual households so that the process of transition would be carried out in a smooth and quick manner.

� Entitlement options: Consultations can bridge the expectations and limitations of

the both parties resulting in a mutually agreeable entitlement options. � Formation of housing societies: Through stakeholder consultations people can be

oriented towards the new lifestyle and the importance of the societies can be embedded in the minds of the people to minimise possible conflicts and confusions that may arise during the actual process of establishment of societies.

� Ongoing consultation for the operation and maintenance of societies: Stakeholder

consultations can also act as a monitoring mechanism to evaluate the progress of housing society operations and incorporate corrective action whenever necessary.

(This engagement plan has to be seen in conjunction with the stakeholder analysis in section 5 of the ESIA and the stakeholder section in the RAP).

1.4 LEGAL REQUIREMENT FOR STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATIONS

Right to Information Act, 2005

The Act applies to whole of India and includes the right to: � Inspects works, documents, records; � Take notes, extracts or certified copies of documents or records; � Take certified samples of materials; and � Obtain information in the form of printouts, diskettes, floppies, tapes, video

cassettes or in any other electronic mode. RTI act covers only government institutions and departments. However, there is an indirect implication in case a citizen wants to get information about any aspect of the project, s/he may approach the relevant govt official through a process outlined in the above regulation. The SRA disclosure process

Stakeholder engagement and regular public consultations are also in-built into the SRA Guidelines. These responsibilities are shared by the Builder and the SRA as follows: � Disclosure requirements of (a) Letter of Intent with the Builder and Society

Members; Intimation and Notice of the SRA Annexure II Survey; and Results of the SRA Annexure II Survey;

� Compulsory Consent of at least 70% of the tenement owners/occupiers to the builder’s development proposal;

� Verification of the cooperative housing society by the SRA through a public meeting and subsequently a public hearing for general community grievances; and

� The SRA expects the builder to keep the community informed at intervals as desired by the society on the project details, schedules etc.

The EIA public Consultation and Disclosure process

As per the EIA Notification, 2006 the public hearing is required to be conducted by the State Pollution Control Board (SPCB) or the Union territory Pollution Control Committee (UTPCC) concerned in the specified manner and the proceedings are required to be forwarded to the regulatory authority concerned (MoEF/SEIAA). IFC Performance Standards

The 8 Performance Standards (PS) established by IFC stipulates that the project shall meet certain requirements throughout the life cycle of an investment by IFC or other relevant financial institution, who are signatory to the Equator Principles, 2006. One of the main tenets of PS1 (Social and Environmental Assessment and Management Systems) is the engagement with the community to ensure free prior informed consultations (FPIC), community grievance redressal and constructive relationship all through the project life cycle. ADB’s Public Communications Policy of the Asian Development Bank: Disclosure and Exchange of Information (2011) ADB has recently completed a review of the 2005 Communications Policy in consultation with a range of stakeholders to gauge their perceptions of ADB’s performance and communications. This revised public communications policy takes into account the internal and external comments received, and the findings of the global perception surveys with respect to the public communications approach, disclosure details and implementation arrangements. ADB’s Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS) and disclosure Policy

In July 2009, ADB's Board of Directors approved the new Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS) governing the environmental and social safeguards that applies to all ADB-financed and/or ADB-administered projects and SPS2 deals with involuntary resettlement and a project will be categorised in terms of the involuntary resettlement impacts.

� ADB’s safeguard policy imply the need for prior and informed consultation with affected persons and communities in the context of safeguard planning and for continued consultation during project implementation to identify and help address safeguard issues that may arise.

1.5 SUMMARY OF STAKEHOLDER ANALYSIS

An earlier section of this report has discussed the stakeholder identification and analysis. The major stakeholders for the project have been classified as internal and external stakeholders. The stakeholder analysis table had also detailed out the

expectations of each of the stakeholders along with overall influence of each of the stakeholder on the project and the level of priority that KUL has to give for each of the stakeholder that has been discussed. The table below summarises the stakeholder analysis.

Stakeholder Category Overall Influence on the Project

Priority for KUL

CATEGORIZATION OF INTERNAL STAKEHOLDERS

Project Management

Kumar Sinew developers and holding company Kumar Urban Developers Private Limited

High High

KUL Employees Medium Medium

Contractors And Sub-Contractors

Man-Infra Construction Limited Low Medium Karan Builders Low Medium Fusion India Management Private Limited Low Medium CATEGORIZATION OF EXTERNAL STAKEHOLDERS

Project Financiers

Banks and Local Financing Agencies High High Lenders, Investors, Financiers and Development Agencies

High High

Existing Slum Dwellers/Residents And Local Community

Residents including Owners, Tenants and Squatters.

High High

Hawkers and other commercial entities High High Slum Lords (large, medium, marginal and small) with multiple slum holdings


Local concerned slum representatives Low to Medium Medium Anti-social elements and people with extortionist approach

Medium Medium

Women Low to medium Medium Vulnerable groups Low Low Nearby community Low Low

Regulatory Authorities And Local Administration

SRA Pune High Medium Ministry of Environment and Forest and State level Environmental Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) and State level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC)

Medium Medium

Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB)

High High

Pune Municipal Corporation (PMC) Medium Low

Public Works Department (PWD), Government of Maharashtra

Low Low

Political And Local Groups

Local Corporator and Other Political Groups High Medium

1.6 APPROACH TO STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT

KUL project will be implemented with due regard to the guiding principles for public consultation and disclosure enunciated below:

� Early consultation: Early consultations for the KUL project facilitate identification of stakeholders and mapping out their influence and interest.

� Identify and engage project stakeholders: This all-inclusive exercise will consult both internal and external stakeholders and the vulnerable and weaker sections of the society.

� Grievance Redressal Mechanism; The scope of the Stakeholder Grievance Redressal Mechanism relates specifically to the following issues: Definition of a complaint/grievance: If any internal or external stakeholder believes that the company’s business practices or activities are having an adverse impact on their quality of life, livelihood or environment, which they want the project team to address, such a grievance or concern can be classified as a complaint. Reporting Procedures: The procedure for complaint registration has been suggested below: o Contacting the local Community Relations Team (CLT), for which contact

number/address of CRT should be made available to all community members for any emergency

o Obtaining a copy of the Complaint Reporting Form, which can be procured without any effort;

o Creating systematic mechanisms within the organization to accept complaints and feedback and forward them to the relevant individual;

o Reporting concerns via any media convenient to the complainant, i.e. telephone, post, internet, or in person/community meeting.

Procedure to address feedback: Any complaint has to be registered electronically and mechanisms to acknowledge receipt of the complaint or feedback and its nature must be laid down, which will consider the medium of response, confidentiality of the complainant and the timeliness of the response. Community Relations Officers will aim to acknowledge complaints within 7 days. KUL has to aim to investigate and resolve a complaint within a timelimit of 30 days. If a particular complaint has serious implications on KUL’s business practices or project activities, the lessons will be incorporated into internal systems to avoid the recurrence of the issue. One of the management representatives of KUL, who would be in charge of stakeholder engagement will be constantly kept in loop with respect to complaint registration and redressals. Timelines: Generally complaints should be resolved within 30 days. These timelines may be dynamic or flexible as per the nature of the complaint (except for those governing acknowledgement) and must be communicated to the complainant in the acknowledgement process. � Deliver on commitments: Commitments will only be made after internal consultation, alignment with the national and state laws as well as company’s policy and code of conduct, and are in line with the Project commitments. Delivering on commitment will result in developing a credible relation with the community and consequently built up the social licence required for the smooth implementation of the project Documentation and Regular Feedback A consultation record/database, which addresses both technical and general queries and concerns, will be designed. This will also include the project uncertainties and the

inputs needed from the stakeholders to be used in decision making processes. Feedback will be provided to the stakeholders in the required format as early as possible. Prompt responses will help manage stakeholder’s concerns and build mutual trust. Managing the consultation database will help map stakeholder relationships and be informed on prevailing sentiment, for example from communities, and contractors, and will provide a more holistic picture of the effectiveness of the stakeholder engagement strategy, allowing for modifications where improvements are required.

1.7 STAKEHOLDER ENGAGEMENT PLAN

It is essential that KUL understands and follows a prescribed plan for stakeholder engagement. The table below mentions the phases of the project that calls for stakeholder engagement, the objective of engaging at that particular phase, the form of addressing the community, the frequency of engagement with the community for each phase and the expected desirable outcome of each engagement

Table 1.1 Stakeholder Engagement Plan

Phase of Project Objective of Consultation Medium for Engagement Frequency for Engagement and Documents for Disclosure

Desired outcome

Stakeholder (Internal): Community

Pre- construction phase

Socio-economic Survey

� Awareness generation about SRS scheme � Introduce the project proponent to the

community and initiate rapport building � Early identification of potential issues, conflicts

and benefits

� Approach each hutment and engage with families

� Once during the course of the survey

� Increased awareness about SRS scheme � Changed perceptions (for the better) towards the

proposed rehabilitation scheme and the project proponent

On-going consultations prior to finalisation of Annexure II

� To elicit the apprehensions of the community towards the project.

� Understand the community expectations in terms of compensation and facilities desired.

� Increasing the confidence of people on the benefits of the project.

� To allay the fears of the households that are likely to be declared ineligible.

� One Consultation to be held with key people in the slum at a mutually agreeable location in the slum area

� Another consultation for which open invitation has been send out to all slum dwellers

� Two consultations in a span of a month;

� Results and updates of Annexure II survey to be displayed

� Increasing community cohesiveness by facilitating the sharing the fears and expectations of the community in an open platform.

� Making community realise that the rehabilitation is an open and community friendly initiative and that everyone would be treated fairly.

� Sensitise the likely ineligible households to the possibility of eviction.

� Develop various compensation plans for finalisation.

� Informed decision making by the community. Consultations after the finalisation of Annexure II

� Finalise compensations for the ineligible households.

� Understand and arrange for the necessary support required by the ineligible households for smooth transition.

� Communicate the terms and references of rehabilitation to the eligible households.

� Communicate the in-transit options available for the eligible households. The eligible households are given two options of either moving into the in-transit tower or arrange for own in-transit facility, the expense of which will be compensated by KUL.

� Consultations both at the household level and group level for ineligible households.

� Consultations at group level with eligible households

� Continuous engagement with the ineligible households until smooth transition

� Two to Three community level meetings with eligible households

� Minimise possibilities of community unrest by positively channelizing the energy of ineligible households towards favorable transition.

� Reduce project delay by expediting the process of signing of agreements for rehabilitation.

� Optimise in-transit costs by finalising the in-transit arrangements and establishing the time frame for eviction.

In-transit phase


Desired outcome

Shifting to the transit towers

� Make the community comfortable with the new arrangement.

� Understand the problems faced and develop corrective measures in collaboration with the community.

� Orient the community towards life in an apartment

� Consultations at group level at common locations in the in-transit towers.

� Visits to individual houses

� Schedule of transit accommodation completion, demolition and shifting to be communicated in advance and displayed;

� Group meetings to be held

twice every month until allotment and shift to the rehabilitation buildings.

� Household visits can be

randomly conducted occasionally

� Increased acceptance of the new lifestyle before actual rehabilitation.

Prior to actual rehabilitation

� To make the community aware of the formation of housing societies.

� To make them aware of the functions and roles of housing society and its members.

� To make the community aware of the election process for the housing societies.

� Group consultations at a common location at the transit site. Invitations to be send to all concerned households including those who have opted for own transit arrangements outside the project area.

� Three to four consultations to be held exclusively focusing on formation and roles of housing societies.

� One separate group consultation focusing on the election process for the housing societies.

� Creation of voluntary demand for effective housing societies.

� Increase in community participation pertaining to housing society functions and activities.

� Minimise conflicts and confusions during the actual election process for the housing societies.

Rehabilitation phase

Election to the housing society

� To facilitate smooth elections for the formation of housing society

� Group meeting at a common area in the rehabilitation tower

� Display of appropriate notices on election procedure;

� Once after the rehabilitation of the community.

� Formation of a strong and effective housing society.

� Smooth transition of community people into the rehabilitated way of life.

Ongoing consultations for routine operations and maintenance

� Integrate support services like solid waste management and maintenance services with the housing societies.

� Empower housing communities to manage day-to-day needs of the apartment and resolve routine problems

� Meetings with the housing society

� Group meetings with

community

� Continuous interaction with housing society members during the first two months of society establishment.

� Weekly meetings with

� Empowerment of community by increasing their self-reliance to manage the day-to-day functions of the society.

� Maintenance of aesthetic value of the apartments


Desired outcome

society members for the next two months, followed by monthly meetings for the next two months

� Group meetings with

community members once a month for the first three-four months

� Increase in quality of life of the residents by ensuring a clean and comfortable apartment life.

Stakeholder (Internal): Contractors

Operations Phase � To communicate the ADB and IFC standards for slum rehabilitation projects.

� To ensure compliance with national and state labor and contractor rules.

� Ensure compliance as per international standards pertaining to the provision of amenities to laborers and addressing their health and safety concerns.

� Communicating the reporting and grievance redressal mechanisms to the contractors and laborers.

� To monitor the progress of construction and address any bottlenecks for construction.

� To monitor the expenses incurred by the contractors.

� Group meeting with laborers.

� Individual and group

meetings with contractors

� Group meeting with laborers and contractors should be conducted separately once every month

� Individual meeting with

contractors could be held once every three months

� Minutes of meetings and

stakeholder consultations to be maintained.

� Timely completion of project and within the budget.

� Meet all compliance requirements of ADB/IFC and SRA.

� Minimise social conflicts of laborers with community

Stakeholder (External): Slum Rehabilitation Authority

All phases of the project

� Updation of slum rehabilitation progress � To understand and comply with the phase

specific requirements and standards of SRA

� Face to Face meetings � Site visits by SRA

representative

� Face to Face meetings once every 3 months.

� Site visits by SRA representative every six months

� Progress Reports to be maintained

� Building credibility of KUL with SRA � Smooth transfer of the ownership of the slum

rehabilitation buildings from the developer to SRA

� Enthusiastic participation of SRA in formation of housing societies

Stakeholder (External): Lenders

All phases of the project

� Regular updation of the timely progress of the project.

� Face to Face meetings

� Meeting can be conducted with the lenders every

� Build credibility of KUL with the lenders.


Desired outcome

� Regular updation of lenders on E&S impacts and their addressal.

� To close any existing gaps in compliance to its existing environmental and social safeguard policies.

� Site visits by the lenders

three months. � Site visits could be

undertaken by the lenders every six months.

� Uninterrupted funding during the course of the project.

� Minimise project risk in the short and long term

especially from social and environmental perspective

1.8 MONITORING OF STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION PLAN

For effective engagement with stakeholders it is essential that the stakeholder plan is strictly adhered to and a constructive feedback mechanism is established. This requires continuous monitoring of the engagement process by KUL representatives and the management. The Community Relations Team (CRT) would be primarily responsible for the implementation and monitoring of stakeholder engagement plan.

CRT Responsibilities

Responsibilities of CRT will include as a minimum:

� Maintaining a current list of all stakeholders as well as onsite contractors; � Communicating each and every instance of meeting and/or consultation with the

community to the KUL management responsible for Community relationship; � Being seen as an open-door authority for the complainant to be contacted at any

time. � Assuring the community that accurate and timely action on any grievance will be

taken. � Providing onsite advice to the community and contractors on minor issues; � Supervising, investigation and Facilitating resolution of complaints and

grievances of both the community and contractors; � Deciding upon severity and timelines to resolve complaints; � Monitoring the progress of the complaint through a Feedback Register; � Keeping the complainant informed about the progress of the complaint; � Following-up to avoid recurrence of the concern or issues; and � Facilitation and co-ordination, where appropriate, of communications between

KUL, regulatory organisations, local people and other stakeholders on any social issue

The CRT team will be led by designated personnel from the KUL team who will have the responsibility of reviewing the stakeholder management plan internally every month. This is necessary considering the dynamic nature of stakeholder engagement process. Third party monitoring gives robustness to any monitoring system and in the case of Project Nirvana, ERM would be the external monitor who would examine the engagement plan and progress every six months. The KUL management will also have to ensure that the progress of stakeholder engagement is monitored every six months. The documents pertaining to the external monitoring of the stakeholder engagement plan will be disclosed to the community and to the general public in accordance to ADB’s Communications Policy (2011). This is in cognizance of the fact that Environmental and social monitoring reports require disclosure to the affected community in a form and language they can understand and public disclosure of the report in full (English) on ADB website.

Annex D

Grievance Redressal Plan

ESMP: ANNEX D-GRIEVANCE REDRESSAL PLAN

1.1 INTRODUCTION

The grievance redressal for this project is primarily aimed to address the issues mostly pertaining to addressing conflicts and appeal procedures regarding eligibility and entitlements, implementation of the resettlement activities and degradation of environmental quality. However, this also covers the grievance redressal mechanism for the employees and workers engaged at the site, by the different subcontractors already engaged for the project, or the ones which are likely to be engaged for the future construction activity. As the project is being commissioned in an urban area, there may be likely issues for the local nearby community, especially during the mobilisation and the construction phase. It is therefore suggested that KUL has a streamlined grievance redressal mechanism in place to address the range of grievances which may arise from various quarters identified earlier.

1.1.1 Scope of the Grievance Redressal Plan

The scope of the grievance redressal plan is to assess the existing grievance procedures that have been constituted by KUL and further strengthen it by incorporating measures namely for the implementation of the rehabilitation plan, addressing the workers grievances effectively and in case there are issues with the nearby local community.

1.2 STRUCTURE OF THE GRIEVANCE REDRESSAL PLAN

The structure of the Grievance redressal plan is as follows: 1. Grievance Definition and Categorisation 2. Institutional Mechanism For Grievance Redressal

a. Existing Grievance Mechanism at KUL b. Suggested Grievance Mechanism

3. Grievance Reporting Procedure a. Current Grievance Reporting Procedures b. Suggested Grievance Reporting Procedures c. Suggested Grievance reporting for specific identified groups

4. Grievance Redressal Procedure a. Suggested Grievance Redressal Procedure b. Suggested Grievance Redressal Procedure for specific identified

groups 5. Disclosure 6. Monitoring and Evaluation 7. Budgeting

1.3 GRIEVANCE DEFINITION AND CATEGORIES

The grievance for this project can be broadly classified keeping in context the following stakeholder categories

Hutment dwellers covered under the rehabilitation scheme

The hutment dwellers are the main stakeholders for the project and the grievances from them is likely to be around the following concern areas:

� Eligibility issues for SRS; � Lack of transparency in identifying the eligible beneficiaries; � Eligibility criterion for the various segments including the tenants and

multiple house owners in the slum; � Entitlements for maximum number of families under SRS; � Negotiation on compensation for structures lost under the scheme; � Transition amount and facility; � Handing over of the flats in the stipulated time; � Community structures compensation; � Material used in the housing scheme; � Allotment of houses to the various groups.

Local Community Grievance

The surrounding community of the project are considered as important stakeholder by the organisation. The possible complains of the community could be

� Risks to community, health & safety (e.g. traffic); � Failure to comply with legislation, standards and guidelines; � Unethical Behaviour by KUL personnel or its sub-contractors; � Noise/dust/air emissions or any other impact on environment caused by

project or sub-contractors; For the purpose of reducing the complications hutment dwellers and the local community can have joint grievance redressal system. Contractors and Labour Related Grievance

The workers including the local and interstate migrant workers are likely to have the grievance related to the following issues:

� Risk to health and safety of the labourers or workers hired by the Contractors; � Working condition of the labourers; � Wage discrimination among the labourers; � Timing of the payments; � Adequate facilities in the labour camps including water supply and

sanitation; � PF, ESIC, Workmen’s compensation, adequate health facility related issues; � Unjustified deduction from the wages; � Minimum wage rates for the labourers; � Extended working hours; � Prevention and protection of child labour from hazardous work condition; � Issue of forced labour; � Gender discrimination.

Employees Grievance

This section provides likely grievance of the permanent employees of the organisation. Complains of the employee could include (but not be limited to):

� Complains pertaining to amount of wage, salary, other remuneration and benefits as per Company’s Human Resource policy;

� Timely disbursement of remuneration; � Risk to working condition, health and safety of the employees; � Unethical behaviour between senior and subordinate employees; � Discrimination on the basis of caste, creed, language, religion etc; � Gender discrimination; and � Issues related to workers organisation.

Suggested measures to reduce the grievances

1.4 INSTITUTIONAL MECHANISM FOR GRIEVANCE REDRESSAL

Existing Grievance Mechanism at KUL

KUL’s community relations team operates as a repository for grievances and complaints and provides counsel on different project related apprehensions and queries. This team functions as an independent entity under the KUL-ESM Cell and seeks to address issues raised by the slum dwellers, the flat residents, the employee, contractors and labour/worker community, who are advised to approach the cell for any complaint/ grievance/ suggestion. The present structure comprises of:

� A satellite Grievance Redressal Unit, comprising of Community Relations representatives, local resource person and external resource (where required) drawn from any NGO or Social Organization at Wadarvasti and Kilewadi.

� Signboards/visuals defining the Grievance Redressal procedure and advising the community, employees, contractors and labour to register grievances if any; and

Note: It was observed that the CR representatives are members of the KUL CR team. Local resource persons are social welfare workers who have been appointed by the PMC Municipal Corporator for the area. At the time of our visit, there were about 4 of them and they were helping get development agreements from slum dwellers and reporting of any concerns. Common grievances that are being registered through this process are related to maintenance of the transit accommodation; procedure of identification and registration of households; apprehensions on eligibility; family disputes pertaining to ownership/power of attorney/marital disputes etc.

The following measures will be taken by KUL in order to reduce grievance as possible: � Ensure compliance to local laws and regulations; � Ensure transparency in all the processes; � Ensure training and capacity building of all concerned on their rights and entitlements; � Ensure proper disclosure of important information to the concerned stakeholders; � Ensure participatory decision making to the extent possible with the stakeholders; � Ensure that the processes already in place work effectively. These measures will facilitate KUL in substantially reducing the instances of grievance. However, in case there are grievances with respect to any of the stakeholders identified earlier, the grievance redressal system as suggested should be implemented as early as possible.

Suggested Grievance Mechanism

A Grievance Officer will be appointed on behalf of the CR Head and KUL who will inturn appoint Community Grievance Officers for each of the 6-7 SRS Working Groups. For community grievances, there will also be a committee with representation from the community and the representative will be elected by the community than by single individual. The two key institutional mechanisms that are proposed are (a) an SRS Working Group for each of the slum blocks in the scheme; (b) Officers responsible for specific functions, i.e. Grievance Redressal, Implementation and Liaisoning; (c) Community Audit Group with nominated representatives from each slum block. The organizational structure is also linked to that of the Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) through a coordination channel between the Head of Community Relations and the Environmental and Social Manager for the ESMP as provided subsequently.

Recommended Organizational Structure

Source: Proposed RAP

SRS Working Groups

The organizational structure suggests that an SRS Working Group would need to be formed for each slum block. Each working group would comprise of 3 community relation/ liaison officers (CLOs) and one representative of the local corporator, i.e. the Welfare Officer. This working group would directly interface with the slum dwellers as well as any implementation partners. The activities of the working group would be monitored by a Community Audit Group, representing members of each slum block. Each of the 6-7 Working Groups that are formed would report to the Implementation Officer, who would be the same as the Community Relations Coordinator for the ESMP.

Project Head/Engineeringand Construction Head

Environmental and Social Manager for

ESMP

Implementation Officer/CR Coordinator for ESMP

Head – CommunityRelations

SRS Working Group for each slum block (6-7 in total)

Implementation Partners: NGOs/CBOs

Community Audit Group

SRS WG will consist of 3 CROfficers representing the

above functions and 1PMC Welfare Officer

SRA

Liaisoning OfficerGrievance RedressalConsultation Officer

PMC

General Slum Dwellers/Affected Community

Project Head/Engineeringand Construction Head

Environmental and Social Manager for

ESMP

Implementation Officer/CR Coordinator for ESMP

Head – CommunityRelations

SRS Working Group for each slum block (6-7 in total)

Implementation Partners: NGOs/CBOs

Community Audit Group

SRS WG will consist of 3 CROfficers representing the

above functions and 1PMC Welfare Officer

SRA

Liaisoning OfficerGrievance RedressalConsultation Officer

PMC

General Slum Dwellers/Affected Community

1.5 GRIEVANCE REPORTING PROCEDURE

Current Grievance Reporting Procedures

A satellite Grievance Redressal Unit, comprising of Community Relations representatives, local resource person and external resource ( including NGOs as applicable) units are responsible for collection of grievances, recording and registering them with appointed Focal Authority, Tracking, follow up on action and intimation of result/ solution and final closure of the issue. Suggested Grievance Reporting Procedures

The channels for receipt of grievances can include:

� Complaints received through Project staff or employees; � Complaints received by Community Relations staff directly involved in

handling grievances; � Complaints received from the workers/ labourers; � Complaints received through third parties such as the corporator/NGO.

All complaints/ Grievances will be documented from their original format into a prescribed format and will need a sign-off from the grievant or representative (if it is institutional). The Grievance/complaint will be registered with the Grievance Redressal Consultation Officer (GRCO) responsible for administering grievance mechanism, which will then assign responsibility for completing the actions, and establish the schedule for completion in consultation with:

� The Grievant; � Personnel involved in grievance management; � Community Liaison officers (CLOs) � Operations/Project managers; � Senior management; � Third-party/ contractors.

Any one who considers himself/herself or themselves as complainant have the right to complain. Such a complainant must have a defined medium to register his/her/their concern. Suggested Grievance reporting for specific identified groups

The section below lists the GR procedure for some of the stakeholders. Hutment dwellers and the local outside Community:

The hutment dwellers and surrounding community of the project can choose one of the following ways/media to register their complaints/feedback; � Contacting the local Community Liaison Officer (CLO) appointed by the project; � All complaints regarding entitlements, benefits, etc. for the hutment dwellers

should be reported through this system; � Special care should be taken to address the needs of the vulnerable groups like

elderly, disabled, widowed;

� CLOs should be trained in being gender sensitive especially keeping in mind the nature of the population, wherein women are significant contributors to the livelihood of the family and have special concerns;

� Contact the number/address made available to the community members for any emergency – accidents, serious injury or loss of life need to be reported immediately;

� Register complain through Complaint Reporting Form; � Creating hierarchies within the organization to accept complaints and feedback

and forward them to the relevant department/individual; � Reporting concerns via any media convenient to the complainant, i.e. telephone,

post, internet, or in person/community meeting. Contractors

The grievance related to contractors operation can be lodged in following way; � Contact Liaison Officer of the contactor ; � The officers of KUL monitoring the contractor’s operation may also be contacted. Employees

The selection of the procedure may depend upon the nature of the grievance and accessibility of the employee. Some of the ways in which employees of the organisation can register his/her complain would include: � Verbally report to immediate supervisor/reporting authority; � Report to Head of Department/Unit of the organisation; � Contacting HR division of the company and register his/her complain; � GRCO officer may be approached in case it is coordinated with the HR division; � Approach to Workers Union (if existent and applicable) of the company; � Register complain in court of the concerned territory. Once a reporting framework has been established, it must be clearly communicated to all stakeholders involved in the project.

1.6 GRIEVANCE REDRESSAL PROCEDURE

Suggested Grievance Redressal Procedure

The Grievance Process should operate as follows:

� The CLOs will have the responsibility to take account of, and resolve, any grievances raised by communities;

� Where the CLO and SRS Working Group cannot resolve grievances directly, the grievance mechanism will refer these grievances to the Grievance Officer and if required the CR Head;

� Where grievances remain unresolved, slum dwellers should have the option to seek legal redress.

The grievance mechanism will also need to be adequately linked to the Dispute and Eligibility Resolution Process of the SRA, wherein a tribunal is formulated to decide on eligibility status of families. This can be ensured through the Liaisoning Officer.

Tracking Action

The Grievance Officer responsible for administering grievance mechanism in co-ordination with SRS Working Group will:

� Keep track of Details of the complaint (when, where, how it occurred; who was involved; complainant’s story and expectation; date and place the grievance was received and recorded);

� Evidence, supporting documents and statements will be collected; � Complaints will be screened, reviewed and validated; � Follow-up with concerned parties; � Initiate corrective actions where required; � Progress recorded (pending, solved, agreements/commitments).

Each grievance will need to be lodged into a Management Information System which will be used to track the receipt, action, closure and any follow-up of grievances. This will be managed by the Grievance Officer and will need to be available for audit of the Community Audit Group. Closure

The suggested actions are to include:

� Conveying outcome and response to the grievant(s); � Recording how, when, and by whom a decision was communicated; � Recording closure date, and confirmation that the complainant was satisfied; � Acceptance/Sign-off by grievants; � Documenting Management actions to avoid recurrence; � Linkage to the Grievance Mechanism under the ESMP.

Suggested Roles and Responsibilities for Persons handling grievances at various levels

Suggested grievance redressal mechanism specific to the nature of the complainants would be as follows:

The specific responsibilities of the concerned officials appointed for management of grievances i.e would include (but not be limited to): � Facilitate resolution of complaints; � Keeping the complainant informed about the progress of the complaint; � Assuring the complainant that accurate and timely action on any grievance will be taken; � Managing the Feedback Management Process and monitoring the progress of the

complaint through a Feedback Register � Supervising investigation and resolution of reported complaints; � Deciding upon severity (in consultation with the Project Management Team) and timelines

to resolve complaints; � Co-ordinating between KUL and Contractors to ensure timely redressal of the issue; � Signing off the complaint; � Following-up to avoid recurrence of the concern or issues; � Being seen as an open-door authority for the complainant to be contacted at any time.

Suggested Grievance Redressal Procedure for specific identified groups

Hutment Dweller and Local Community Grievance

Handling grievances of the community can be considered as part of community engagement programme of the company. Some issues can be immediately acted upon by the Community Liaison Officer (CLO) and resolved and for any other complaints, the following can be the framework to address complaints. � Receipt of a feedback or complaint: Once a complaint has been received, the

community liaison officer will try to get in touch with the concerned department. The complaint will in parallel be recorded in the complaint register (in physical and electronic form), which should be maintained to monitor the resolution of the complaint.

� Acknowledgement: Mechanisms to acknowledge receipt of the complaint or

feedback and its nature must be laid down, which will consider the medium of response, confidentiality of the complainant and the timeliness of the response. CLO will aim to acknowledge complaints within 7 days.

� Investigation: The issues raised must be assessed, prioritised and then forwarded

to the relevant department, through the person assigned. This person will then be responsible for co-ordinating attempts to investigate the context and the details of the complaint, which may include consulting the complainant, the individuals in questions etc.

� Resolution: Once an issue has been investigated by the person assigned to it, with

the concerned department, the proposed course of action must be decided. This will have to be communicated to all parties involved. If the complainant is satisfied with the measures taken, the complaint may be signed off, and if there are concerns pending, there must be procedures to reassess it, and also look at inadequacies for why it was not resolved in the first attempt. The Project will aim to resolve each complaint within 30 days.

� Monitoring/Follow-up: If a particular complaint has serious implications on

Projects business practices or Project activities, the lessons will be incorporated into internal systems to avoid the recurrence of the issue. This will have to be monitored by the concerned department. Alternatively, a parallel mechanism, involving the CLO can be constituted, where the complainant would be contacted at a later stage to ensure that the concern has not recurred.

In case the CLO is not able to handle the grievance, the matter can be directly taken to the GRCO. Contractors Grievance

The projects managed by KUL will ensure that their contractors maintain the same spirit of grievance handling for their employees/workers. For this, KUL managed projects will have the right to check and monitor the grievance redress system of their contractors. Employees Grievance

The procedure to deal with grievance of the employee of the companies managed by KUL is as delineated below:

� Most of the work related complaints or disputes can be settled in conversation

between the employee and his superior. Hence they are encouraged to resolve any problem by seeing their superior.

� The aggrieved employee may, consult with the head of Department/Unit or the HR Department instead of meeting his superior.

� If the employee is not satisfied with the response of his superior to his complaint, following steps may be taken:

o The employee has to submit grievance description form, duly filled in, to his superior. The employee has to identify the resolution that is being sought. The superior is to send a copy of the form to HR Department.

o The superior has to give a written reply within 7 days of the receipt of Grievance

Description Form and mark a copy of the same to HR department. The superior must discuss the HR department wherever policy matter is involved before replying to the employee. If additional time is required to give the response, superior will inform in writing to the employee of the date the written reply will be made available. If the superior doesn’t respond as mentioned above, employee can present the grievance to next level or to the HR department within 10 days from the date on which response from superior was due. If the employees fails to present the grievance within 10 days, the grievance will be considered as terminated;

o If the employee not satisfied with written response of the superior, the employee may

request in writing, review of the matter before the Head of Department (HOD). The HOD will provide a written response to the employee within 10 days from the date of receive of such request. HOD will consult the HR Department before giving the response. If HOD requires additional time to give response, HOD will inform employee in writing of the date the written reply will be provided. If HOD doesn’t respond on time, employee can present the grievance to next level or to the Head of HR department within 10 days from the date on which response from HOD was due. If the employees fails to present the grievance within 10 days, the grievance will be considered as terminated;

o If the employee doesn’t feel satisfied with the response of HOD, employee may send

request to HR department to review the grievance. HR Head will establish a grievance committee with members of relevant functionaries to consider the grievance. The committee will hear the employee and Management Representatives, review the documentation and will speak to any other individual it deem necessary to process the grievance. The committee shall submit its recommendation to HR Head within 15 days after formation of the committee. HR Head will render the final decision to the aggrieved employee;

� Employees can also approach to Worker’s Union of the project (if existent and

applicable) for redress of their grievances.

1.7 DISCLOSURE

Some of the important points regarding disclosure of the plan are: � The grievance redressal process should be disclosed and the procedures

mentioned therein should be properly disseminated to the identified stakeholders, where most of the grievances are likely to come from.

� KUL should integrate it as a part of the training programme especially for the workers. For the rest of the stakeholders, it can be displayed at important places on the site, at office and on the website.

� The disclosure and the display should clearly mention the name and designation of the grievance redressal officials, office location and their respective contact numbers.

1.8 MONITORING AND EVALUATION

Monitoring and evaluation of the grievance redressal system in place is important to the success of any project. Like the other project components it needs to be monitored to ensure the stakeholders are having no or limited issues with the project and in case there are concerns, they are being adequately addressed as per the mandate. The mechanism will be based on two components of internal monitoring and reporting and external monitoring and reporting which will run simultaneously. Mostly they are aligned with simultaneous process monitoring rather than doing it separately all the time. Internal Monitoring Process

This monitoring process will be undertaken by the SRS Working Groups and the Community Audit Group used to analyse progress and change at regular intervals of implementation. Monitoring should be done in close collaboration and consultation with local communities. The internal monitoring will be regularly tracked by the ESMP team. External Monitoring Process

As and when there is a third party evaluation of the processes related to RAP implementation or annual monitoring or third party review or audits, it should ensure that assessment of the grievance redressal mechanism is done as a part of the monitoring and evaluation process. It is recommended that the external monitoring process should initially be conducted every quarter and as the process progresses, the frequency should be reduced to bi-annually and annually as required. Monitoring Indicators

Some of the process, activity and outcome indicators that can be monitored include:

Indicative Monitoring Indicators

Aspect Monitoring Indicators

Grievance Mechanism Process Indicators

� What was the process of putting the grievance redressal system in place?

� Is it transparent enough? � Has the grievance redressal system been disclosed with the

community, workers, employees, hutment dwellers, and other stakeholders?

� How easy is it to lodge grievances? � Effectiveness of the process for lodging, tracking and following up on

the grievances? � How easy is it especially for the vulnerable including disabled,

widowed population to access the grievance redressal system? � Is it conducive from the gender perspective? How easy is it for the

women to lodge grievances? � Are the literates only able to make complaints? What happens to the

illiterate population?

Aspect Monitoring Indicators � What are the different ways in obtaining grievances? � Are people being stopped from making grievances? Is it discouraged? � Are vulnerable groups able to access the grievance mechanisms?

Grievance Mechanism Outcome Indicators

� What is the awareness level of the people towards the existing grievance redressal system?

� What types of grievances have been identified & what were outcomes?

� Is there proper documentation of all the grievances and are they being tracked?

� How many of the grievances have been settled? � How many of the grievances are yet to be settled? � What is the average time taken for the grievance redressal? � Does the grievance redressal procedure stop people from accessing

the redressal procedure as suggested under the local laws? � Percentage of grievances resolved by KUL channels versus

government channels versus project-specific? � What is the satisfaction level of the people from the existing grievance

redressal system?

1.9 BUDGETING

The KUL administration should ensure that there is adequate budgeting and resource allocation for implementing the grievance redressal plan. As KUL has already instituted the grievance cell, its enhancement and capacity building as required by the plan is covered in the Environmental and Social Management Plan.

1.10 TIMEFRAME

The Grievance Redressal Plan will need to be implemented throughout the lifecycle of the project. The collection, redressal and closure of grievances will need to take place in a real time and dynamic manner and will need to be tracked by the Community Relations. It is suggested that monitoring of the grievances should be undertaken on a monthly basis.

Annex E

Gender Action Plan

ESMP: ANNEX E –GENDER ACTION PLAN

1.1 INTRODUCTION

The Gender Action Plan (GAP) for the Nirvana Hills Phase II Project in Survey No. 44/1, Erandwane, Pune has been developed in adherence to the Asian Development Bank’s Gender and Development Policy (1998). The objective of the Gender Action Plan (GAP) is to ensure the mainstreaming of gender issues and concerns into all aspects of the ongoing slum rehabilitation project throughout its lifecycle through detailed planning, implementation, monitoring and evaluation activities. The Nirvana Hills Phase II Project that is being implemented by Kumar Sinew Developers Limited can be classified as a Category III Project, i.e. “Some Gender Benefits” (1) wherein there have been specific efforts in project planning to identify possible impacts on women and to include mitigation features in the project design. The Project has potential to

(i) improve access to economic resources (equal employment opportunities during construction phase, skills development and assistance to form self-help groups and undertake self-employment activities);

(ii) improve urban infrastructure (improved living conditions and welfare facilities); and

(iii) enhance women’s voices and rights (facilitating tenure rights for women, female representations in housing societies).

The Gender Action Plan that is discussed subsequently comprises of the following:

� Socio-economic profile of the women in the project area; � Potential Gender-based impacts (adverse and beneficial) from the proposed

slum rehabilitation scheme; and � Recommended actions to incorporate a gender-sensitive approach to Project

Nirvana.

1.2 SUMMARY OF SOCIO-ECONOMIC PROFILE

The socio-economic baseline assessment that was conducted for the development of the ESIA and the Rehabilitation Plan has brought forth the following observations on gender-based issues in the project area. Prevailing Gender Dynamics

The project area has a notably lower sex ratio of 888 females per 1000 males as compared to that of the district of Pune (917/1000). This indicator is observed across the slum blocks that are to be resettled. In terms of education, the socio-economic survey has captured gender-disaggregated estimates of higher education level as provided in Table 1.1.

(1) http://www.adb.org/documents/papers/gender_action_plan/IN291-02.pdf

Table 0.1 Education Profile of Women aged 15-65 years

Proportion of Women (%) Education Level

Total Number

% share of total Phase II Phase III Phase

IV Phase V

SSC 1173 55.2% 57.6 63.0 55.4 41.3 HSC 500 23.5% 24.0 20.9 24.0 25.7 Graduation 310 14.5% 15.5 12.9 16.7 12.6 Post Graduation

115 5.4%

1.9 1.6 2.5 19.4 Vocational 26 1.2% 1.0 1.6 1.3 1.0 2124 100% 100 100 100 100 No estimates are available on the number of women that have had limited access to formal education and/or are illiterate. From the above table, it is evident that the majority of the women in Phases II-V have attained only secondary education. Approximately 20% of the total female population in the area has at least a graduate degree, while only 1% has vocational education. Phase V has a much better educational profile of women with almost a third of its women having attained at least graduate education, while Phase III is at the bottom with 63% of its women having only secondary education.

Figure 0.1 Age and Gender Profile

Livelihood Status

It can be observed that women represent the economic mainstay of the household within the slum community due to the prevalence of vices (such as substance abuse, alcohol addiction etc.) among the male members. As a result, one observes good participation in day-to-day economic activities. Women are generally engaged in unorganized activities such as employment as maids/household help and a small (but steadily increasing) minority of women can be seen in the forefront of shop keeping, self-help groups and vocational courses (tailoring, beauty etc.). Discussions with the Corporator indicate that although the prevailing gender dynamics are skewed in favour of men, women are more vociferous and vocal with their demands for benefits under in-situ rehabilitation during frequent community-based meetings.

Age and Gender Profile

0200400600800

1000

Phas

e II

(Kel

ewad

i/In

draP

ark)

Phas

e III

(R.G

.P/V

asan

tNag

ar)

Phas

e IV

(Han

uman

Nag

ar)

Phas

e V

(Rau

twad

i)

Slum Blocks

Uni

ts

Sex RatioAge % of women from 15 to 65

Box 0.1 Case Study - Mahila Milans

*Source: Burra (1999), R&R of the Urban Poor: The story of Kanjur Marg; Working Paper Number 99 Vulnerability

The ESIA has indicated that there are several categories of vulnerable people based on demographic characteristics, income levels and physical/mental handicap. No specific data is available from the socio-economic survey on the extent of women-headed households. However, based on an aggregate estimation of 5-10% of the households, approximately 169 households are likely to be women headed.

1.3 GENDER ISSUES IN THE PROJECT AREA

A study by the Centre on Housing Rights and Evictions (2008) indicates that as women mostly end up migrating to slum along with their spouses, the slums reflect a “gendered social fabric where women are in a subservient and exploitable position relative to men”. No specific gender disaggregated information on household income, disabilities etc is available from the socio-economic survey. However, consultations indicate the following issues which need further attention:

� Security of Tenure: While the SRA guidelines acknowledge joint ownership, the concept excludes a large number of women who are not legally able to prove any relationship with a man. This gap is a major challenge for single women, widows, deserted women and elderly women. Women in the slum areas are not fully aware of their right to security of tenure, and hence will need to be engaged to explain the same. In addition, women who are destitute or socially vulnerable due to their marital status will not be in position to assume responsibility for security of tenure without provision of support and supervision/monitoring;

� Usage of Public Space: Studies (Pukar, 2008) indicate that the public space available to women outside of the tenements is an important aspect of their

Mahila Milan is is a CBO made up of collectives of women pavement and slum-dwellers whose central activity is the operation of savings and credit activities. Set up in 1986, as a result of SPARC's work with the Muslim pavement dwelling women of the Byculla area of Mumbai, the rationale behind the formation of Mahila Milan lay in the recognition of the central role of women in the family as well as the enormous potential that women's groups had in transforming relations within society and in improving the lives of poor families. Mahila Milan, as a CBO has been used extensively in resettlement projects in urban areas that have involved the World Bank and infrastructure agencies in the city of Mumbai. Mahila Milan now conducts informal training and support activities, as well as savings and credit groups, and aims to empower women to play a greater role in community management and to work with NSDF on broader policy issues at state and city levels. Mahila Milan thus represents both an opportunity to satisfy the credit needs of poor women and a strategy to mobilise them towards taking a more pro-active role in relation to their own poverty. The organisation lays less emphasis not so much on concrete achievements and outputs as on the learning process and the building of confidence among poor women. In the Byculla area, approximately 600 women are members of Mahila Milan, but together with NSDF, Mahila Milan now has a total of over 300,000 households as members across the country.

recreation, and low-rise structures with easy access to corridors and laneways help channelize increased interaction with other groups of women;

� Participation in Planning: Cooperative societies often tend to be dominated by men or the perceived decision makers within a slum and hence women are constrained in meaningfully participating in conceptualisation, design and implementation phases of slum rehabilitation; and

� Other Social Issues: Consultations with womens’ groups across slum blocks indicate that the most important issues that are key to welfare are (a) improving the health status of women as well as their health-seeking behaviour; (b) assessing the vulnerabilities of households that are led by disadvantaged women, such as estranged wives, widows etc; (c) mapping of livelihood activities that are currently prevailing within self-help groups and other small to medium scale ventures.

Overall, it can be ascertained that the rehabilitation of the Nirvana Hills Phase II Project will need to adopt a gender sensitive approach in order to improve the perceived benefits of access to improved housing, quality of life and most importantly, access to improved and personalized sanitation and health & education networks.

1.4 ADDRESSING GENDER-BASED CONCERNS

This section summarizes the specific actions that have been undertaken during the planning phase and the recommended actions during construction and operations to ensure gender-based benefits of the proposed project. In general, the stakeholder consultation plan underscores the importance of participation of women (across slum blocks) in a free, prior and informed manner across various activities of engagement. Overall, it is recommended that KUL engender the support of existing self-help groups as well as NGOs to mainstream the activities and measures as described in Table 1.2. The basic objectives of the Gender Action Plan are:

� to identify and understand the profile of women in the slum area and whether they face any unique vulnerabilities;

� Mitigate impacts that are primarily felt by women; � Use the opportunity in the project to address some root causes of gender

based discrimination, including asset ownership and participation in decision making; and

� Intervene to develop long terms programmes to improve the lives of the women living in the rehabilitation tenements and buildings.

Based on these objectives the gender action plan should include:

� Livelihood measures as outlined in the Livelihood Restoration Plan; � Compliance to the Housing Society norms on women participation – ensure

that the women members in the Housing society are made aware and trained to play a more effective role in the society’;

� Decision making during the planning phase, i.e. linking up womens’ opinions in design, location, use of common spaces & amenities;

� Joint ownership of the flats (already mandated under SRA) � Mahila Milans to be trained to become drivers for pushing the Housing

Societies to function;

� Monitoring role of progress of the project, as well as formation and development of the housing society. Women can also play a key role in aspects like social behaviour, resolution of conflicts etc;

� Skill develop and training to add income generation potential. Provision of micro credits for entrepreneurial activities; and

� Gender-sensitive community engagement through focused groups etc.

Table 0.2 Measures for the Gender Action Plan

Activity/Measures Measures of Engagement

Performance/Target Indicators Responsible agency/unit Timeframe

Ongoing Activities Participation: Women have been encouraged to participate and present their views and opinions during the series of consultations that have involved responding to socio-economic surveys and community meetings with the senior management at KUL; This includes inputs into the design and layout of the rehabilitation flat and the amenities therein;

% of meetings conducted with female participation % of women participating in meetings % of suggestions brought forth and their incorporation

Through NGOs and Community Relations Teams

Ongoing – up to the time of demolition of structure and finalization of design

Identification of Development Opportunities: Community liaison officers have identified opportunities, such as self-help groups and entrepreneurial ventures, to facilitate gender-based initiatives to promote self-employment. Efforts are ongoing to understand how similar activities can be continued during transit and post rehabilitation.

Number of skills and/or entrepreneurial training programs conducted for women in collaboration with an NGO. Number of gender-specific programs conducted each year and proportion in total CSR Budget; Number of women participating in each of the venture; Tracking impacts of such ventures by concrete measurable impact indicators such as improved income, better employment of women, etc

Specific programs that cater to such issues will need to be developed through NGOs and training will need to be conducted (preferably during transit phase)

To be completed as soon as possible to ensure that programs are implemented during the transit phase

Design Issues: Sample rehabilitation plan that has been constructed by KUL has encouraged feedback from women across slum blocks for aspects of utility, design, usage of space and furnishings. Specific feedback of

Record of design inputs and their perceived benefits for the women; Incorporation of the gender-

- Completed



women in the community has been incorporated into the modifications of the sample rehabilitation flat (such as the additional space for a porch in front of main entrance).

specific design evident in the facilities

Recommended Measures Resourcing & Staffing: Identify female community liaison officers for the Community Relations Team in order to better access and understand any specific concerns and problems of the women in the slum community;

Number of women as a part of CR team (at least 30-40%); Number of meetings/discussions led by women recruits and participation in the same

Sensitization as well as identification

Ongoing – contingent to availability of candidates and resources

Skill Mapping: Conduct a skill mapping of women enrolled in higher education/vocational training and any relatively good profiles should be provided to recruitment agencies in the city for them to avail of opportunities;

Tracking number of women identified and proportion that find gainful employment


To be completed within two months of demolition

SRA-based Initiatives: Rehabilitation Assistance and Security of Tenure Identify women-headed households as an indication of vulnerability and facilitate assistance for establishing eligibility, transit accommodation etc. SRA recommends that ownership titles of the rehabilitation tenements will need to be in the name of the wife along with the husband (in case of a male head of household). In addition, women are required to have a representation of at least 33% within housing societies that will be formulated and registered before handing over the society/rehabilitation building to the occupants.

Number of societies wherein female participation exceeds 33%; Tracking eligibility, and income profile of the women headed households Ownership titles of rehabilitation tenements to be named and awarded to both wife and husband. Number of women participating in trainings on housing societies and gender awareness

Training and formation of housing societies and sensitization about the participation of women; Training programs on operating and running housing societies

Monthly modules/programs during the transit accommodation phase

Grievance Redressal: The appointment of female community liaison

Number of grievances raised by women;

Selection of female CLOs, tracking and maintaining the

Immediate



officers would be useful in furthering the grievance redressal mechanism through the construction, transit and rehabilitation phase

Number of appointed female community liaison officers.

grievance MIS

Community Audit Group: It is recommended that women are made to assist with the proceedings of the Community Audit Group (CAG) activities that are to take place on a monthly and/or quarterly basis. KUL should ensure that specific feedback from women gets heard as well as addressed during such initiatives

Number of women participating in CAG activities. % of CAG participants that are female


Immediate – CAG audits to be undertaken during pre-construction/construction and operations

1.5 CONCLUSION

The Gender Action Plan that has been formulated will need to be revisited and reassessed as the project continues. Emphasis will need to be made on the importance of women’s involvement in leadership and community development. The central role that women will need to play in the successful implementation of the Nirvana Hills Phase II Project is justified not only on the grounds of gender equity but also upon the demonstration of their skills as managers of the family. With their experience of running households on inadequate budgets, poor women take easily to managing projects when given exposure, training and opportunity. Representative community organizations are crucial for developmental initiatives that target the poor and a significant women's presence not only makes the representation more even but more effective as well.

Annex F

Risk Management Plan

ESMP: ANNEX F –RISK MANAGEMENT PLAN

1.1 INTRODUCTION

Any project or activity will have certain underlying risks associated with it both due to internal or external factors. Therefore, from the perspectives of health and safety and investment it is essential to identify the potential hazards and risks that may pose a major threat to the project. The Risk Assessment Plan (RMP) for the Nirvana Hills Phase II Project in Survey No. 44/1, Erandwane, Pune has been developed in adherence to the Asian Development Bank’s Safeguards Policy (2009). The objective of the Risk Management Plan (RMP) is primarily to identify and enlist the possible risks that the project may face. The Plan outlines the responsibilities of Project Management, its contractors and employees at the construction site of Project Nirvana. It provides a reference document that can be used for risks and hazard analysis and outlines the steps to be taken if incidents occur during the construction as well as operation phases of the project. The key hazards identified have been broadly classified as man-made and natural hazards. The risks subsequently discussed have been mentioned below: � Operational Risk associated with actual engineering, procurement, construction

execution, contractual risks etc: � Financial and Economic Risk- This may be attributed to mismanagement of

project, unforseen delays or changes in macroeconomic scenario � Natural or Environmental Risks like inundation and earthquakes � Social and Political Risks � Health and Safety Risks

1.2 OBJECTIVES

The key objectives of the Plan are to: � To localize the risks and if possible eliminate it; � To avoid confusion, panic and to handle the emergency with clearly defined

actions; � To reduce the incidence and severity of injury in case of accidents; � Identify the designated personnel and responsibilities for dealing with

emergencies on and ; � To take remedial measures in a quickest possible time to contain the incident and

control it with minimum damage; and � To mobilize the internal resources and utilize them in the most effective way.

1.3 HAZARDS AND RISKS OF THE PROPOSED PROJECT

The potential hazards associated with the present project have been outlined in the following sections. Type of Risk Actions to be taken Implementation &

Resources Monitoring Indicators

Operational Risk associated with actual engineering, procurement, construction execution, contractual risks etc:

� Proper inventorisation of all construction material � Understanding and adherence to legal requirements � Adherence to contractual requirements � Use of construction materials meeting approved standards � Re-verification of construction plan diagrams and measurements

Engineering Team Contractors Legal Team Procurement Team Project Management

Instances of deviations from the proposed construction plan; Instances of delay in material procurement; Instances of disagreements with contractors pertaining to committed or expected output

Financial and Economic Risk: This may arise either when funder refuses to continue the partnership due to any identified mismanagement by the company or due to improper budgeting and planning

� Systematic approach to strategic and business planning � Focus to internal audit programs � Decision making on effective use of resources � Develop a vehicle for communication with stakeholders, investors and

other interested parties � Proper estimating budgeting and cost control � Provisions for accommodating contingencies like hike in construction cost,

inadequate manpower; delay in procurement etc.

Project Management Financial Team

Communication channels with Lenders Progress on agreed actions

Natural or Environmental Risks

Inundation � Adequate storm water drainage systems � Better land use management � Proper storage of equipments, construction materials and chemicals � Develop emergency response plan for evacuation of labor camps and

response to spread of diseases among workers Earthquake Pune lies very close to the seismically active zone around Koyna dam about 100 km south of the city and has been rated in Zone 4 (on a scale of 2 to 5, with 5 being the most prone to earthquakes). Therefore high rise structures such as Project Nirvana should be constructed such that they are resistant to high intensity and frequent quakes. � Appropriate architectural and structural configuration � Accurate determination of earthquake load � Proper dimensioning of beams and columns � Good quality of construction with proper mixing and quantity of water;

good quality sand and aggregates; designed quantity of cement in the mix; proper mixing of all ingredients with control on water cement ratio; proper placement of steel and adequate curing

� Stabilisation of infill wall panels by properly attaching either to the column or top beams

� Adequate separation between buildings to avoid pounding damage � Since the project is being constructed on stilts, clause 7.10 of IS: 1893-2002

(Part I) is recommended which provides two alternative design approaches: 1) dynamic analysis of the building including strengths and weaknesses of infills 2) Bare frame analysis of building neglecting infills and columns and beams to be designed 2.5 times the storey shear and moments

Architectural team; Construction and engineering team; Contractors Health and Safety Team; Project Management

Adequacy of the slope and drainage patterns on site; Instances of water accumulation during the construction phase Instances of inundation; Indicators are based on the assumption that regular disaster management drills will be carried out: � Frequency of drills v/s

proportion of successful drills;

� Average time taken for completion of drills;

� Time taken for emergency response services onsite

Social and Political Risk � Managing social and cultural impacts of the project on the community through project disclosures and community engagement at appropriate intervals.

� Managing labor colonies such that they do not become a nuisance for the residents

� Meeting the requirements of the ineligible residents adequately and skilfully by adhering to the provisions of the ineligibility policy

� Identifying and managing issues of local protectionism skilfully � Anticipating and overcoming regulatory impediments � Taking into confidence the local political powers convincing them the

social benefits of the project � Documentation and Follow-up on consultation meetings

Community Relations Team Compliance Team

Instances of complaints from community Number and frequency of stakeholder consultations held

Health and Safety Risks

1. Traffic Management on Site Construction site vehicle incidents can and should be prevented by the effective management of transport operations throughout the construction process.

Health and Safety Team Contractors

% of incidents reported Number of diversions/traffic issues caused and time for resolution of the same

Keep Pedestrians and Vehicles apart

The majority of construction transport accidents result from the inadequate separation of pedestrians and vehicles.

This can usually be avoided by careful planning, particularly at the design stage, and by controlling vehicle operations during construction work.

The following actions will help keep pedestrians and vehicles apart:

Entrances and exits - provide separate entry and exit gateways for pedestrians and vehicles;

Walkways - provide firm, level, well-drained pedestrian walkways that take a direct route where possible;

Crossings - where walkways cross roadways, provide a clearly signed and lit crossing point where drivers and pedestrians can see each other clearly;

Visibility - make sure drivers driving out onto public roads can see both ways along the footway before they move on to it;

Obstructions – do not block walkways so that pedestrians have to step onto the vehicle route; and

Barriers - think about installing a barrier between the roadway and walkway.

Health and Safety Officer Community Relations Team

Maintaining records for vehicle movements; Monitoring adequate signage, their visibility and location;

Minimising vehicle movements

Good planning can help to minimise vehicle movement around a site. For example, landscaping to reduce the quantities of fill or spoil movement. To limit the number of vehicles on site:

� provide car and van parking for the workforce and visitors away from the work area;

� control entry to the work area; and

� plan storage areas so that delivery vehicles do not have to cross the site.

Health and Safety Officer Community Relations Team

Maintaining records for vehicle movements;

People on Site Employers should take steps to make sure that all workers are fit and competent to operate the vehicles, machines and attachments they use on site by, for example:

� checks when recruiting drivers/operators or hiring contractors;

� training drivers and operators;

� managing the activities of visiting drivers.

People who direct vehicle movements (signallers) must be trained and authorised to do so.

Accidents can also occur when untrained or inexperienced workers drive construction vehicles without authority. Access to vehicles should be managed and people alerted to the risk.

Health and Safety Officer Compliance team Contractor for transport vehicles

Occasional checking of licenses and competencies of drivers or operators

Turning Vehicles The need for vehicles to reverse should be avoided where possible as reversing is a major cause of fatal accidents.

One-way systems can reduce the risk, especially in storage areas.

A turning circle could be installed so that vehicles can turn without reversing.

Installation of appropriate signages and systems for guiding vehicular movement.

Visibility If vehicles reverse in areas where pedestrians cannot be excluded the risk is elevated and visibility becomes a vital consideration.

You should consider:

Aids for drivers - mirrors, CCTV cameras or reversing alarms that can help drivers can see movement all round the vehicle;

Signallers - who can be appointed to control manoeuvres and who are trained in the task;

Lighting - so that drivers and pedestrians on shared routes can see each other easily. Lighting may be needed after sunset or in bad weather;

Clothing - pedestrians on site should wear high-visibility clothing.

Health and Safety Officer Contactors for transport vehicles

Occasional checking of the functionality of aids for drivers. Monitoring of lighting facilities

Signs and Instructions Make sure that all drivers and pedestrians know and understand the routes and traffic rules on site. Use standard road signs where appropriate

Provide induction training for drivers, workers and visitors and send instructions out to visitors before their visit.

Contractors Health and Safety Officer

Occasional awareness checks of drivers and pedestrians on traffic rules and routes.

2. Working at height Assessing work at height - Assess the risks, take precautions, and issue clear method statements for everyone who will work at height.

Roof work - Plan safe access, and prevent falls from edges and openings.

Fragile surfaces - The hierarchy of controls for working on or near fragile surfaces is avoid, control, communicate, co-operate.

Ladders - When it’s appropriate to use ladders – and the three key safety issues – position, condition and safe use.

Tower scaffolds - Select the right tower for the job; erect, use, move and dismantle the tower safely; ensure that it is stable; inspect it regularly; prevent falls.

Contractors Health and Safety Officer

Occasional awareness checks about the precautions for working at height

3. Structural Stability Assess the risks and prevent unintentional structural collapse during alterations, demolition and dismantling; and the measures you need to take to prevent accidents in excavations.

� Structural stability in alterations demolition and dismantling - Key issues include survey and assessment, preventing structural collapse, arrangements for demolition and consulting building control departments

� Structural stability in excavations - Making excavations safe so that people are not injured by collapse of excavation, by material falling on them, or by falling into the excavation.

Engineering team Contractors Health and Safety Officer

-

4. Cranes Tower and mobile cranes are used extensively on construction projects and present two principal hazards:

� Collapse of the crane – such incidents present significant potential for multiple fatal injuries, both on and off-site;

� Falling of the load – these events also present a significant potential for death and major injury.

All lifts operations must be planned carefully to ensure that they are carried out safely.

� planning – including site preparation, crane erection and dismantling;

� selection, provision and use of a suitable crane and work equipment

� including safe slinging and signalling arrangements;

� maintenance and examination of the crane and equipment;

� provision of properly trained and competent personnel;

� supervision of operations by personnel having the necessary authority;

� thorough examinations, reports and other documents;

� measures to secure safety of persons not involved in the lifting.

� preventing unauthorised movement or use of the crane; and

Construction Contractor Crane owning company

Monitoring of incidents, near-misses, accidents of cranes; Adequate signage; Training of crane operators; Effectiveness of safety buffer around zone of crane movement

5. Slips and Trips Uneven Surfaces

Many slips and trips occur when people are walking on uneven surfaces. The risk can be reduced by providing walkways that are;

� clearly designated as a walkway;

� provided with good conditions underfoot;

� signposted and provided with adequate lighting.

Obstacles

Other slips and trips happen because there is something in the person’s way, such as building materials or waste. You can help avoid these incidents by:

� Housekeeping - everyone keeping their work and storage areas tidy;

� Deliveries - planning deliveries to minimise the amount of materials on site;

� Waste - designating areas for waste collection, providing skips and bins where needed and making clear the responsibilities for waste removal.

Trailing Cables

If you can use cordless tools you may not need to use cables. Where you need cables for temporary lighting or mains-powered tools, run them at high level, especially along corridors especially along corridors

Site Contractors Engineering Team Health and Safety Officer

Number of signpost erected

Wet or Slipper Surfaces

Treat slippery surfaces with stone (mud) or grit (for ice) or provide temporary covering.

Signpost any slippery areas and make sure footwear with a good grip is worn.

Changes in level

Where you cannot avoid small changes in level, such as in doorways, consider installing ramps. If you cannot do this, use signs to warn workers to look out for the change in level.

6. Fire Risk Assessment

1. Identify hazards: consider how a fire could start and what could burn;

2. People at risk: employees, contractors, visitors and anyone who is vulnerable, e.g. disabled;

3. Evaluation and action: consider the hazards and people identified in 1 and 2 and act to remove and reduce risk to protect people and premises;

4. Record, plan and train: keep a record of the risks and action taken. Make a clear plan for fire safety and ensure that people understand what they need to do in the event of a fire; and

5. Review: your assessment regularly and check it takes account of any changes on site.

Means of Escape

Routes: your risk assessment should determine the escape routes required, which must be kept available and unobstructed;

Alternatives: well-separated alternative ways to ground level should be provided where possible;

Protection: routes can be protected by installing permanent fire separation and fire doors as soon as possible;

Assembly: make sure escape routes give access to a safe place where people can assemble and be accounted for. On a small site the pavement outside may be adequate; and

Signs: will be needed if people are not familiar with the escape routes. Lighting should be provided for enclosed escape routes and emergency lighting may be required.

Principal Contractor responsible for the site Health and Safety Officer or Incident controller

Number of mock drills conducted Number of signages erected

Signs: will be needed if people are not familiar with the escape routes. Lighting should be provided for enclosed escape routes and emergency lighting may be required.

Warning Systems

Set up a system to alert people on site. This may be temporary or permanent mains operated fire alarm (tested regularly), a klaxon, an air horn or a whistle, depending on the size and complexity of the site. The warning needs to be distinctive, audible above other noise and recognisable by everyone.

Fire Fighting Systems

Fire extinguishers should be located at identified fire points around the site. The extinguishers should be appropriate to the nature of the potential fire: � wood, paper and cloth – water extinguisher; � dry powder or foam extinguisher; � electrical- carbon dioxide extinguisher Nominated people should be trained in how to using extinguishers

7. Electrical risks Electrical equipment must be safe, and properly maintained. Only in exceptional circumstances should work be carried out on live systems, and then only by a competent authorised person.

� Electrical systems in buildings - Refurbishment work in buildings presents the greatest risk and must be planned, managed and monitored to ensure that workers are not exposed to risk from electricity.

� Overhead power lines - Any work near electric overhead power lines must be carefully planned and carried out to avoid danger from accidental contact or close proximity to the lines.

� Underground cables - Damage to underground electrical cables can cause fatal or severe injury you must take precautions to avoid danger. These precautions include a safe system of work based on planning, use of plans, cable locating devices and safe digging practices.

Maintenance Team Principal Contractor Health and Safety Officer or Incident Controller

Number of electrical risk incidents recorded

1.4 DISASTER PREPAREDNESS

Disaster preparedness provided for hazard identification and risk analysis. It indicates basic information about the resources, demography, and existing organisational setup, administrative facilities at that level, both at state and district levels. The primary aim is to create awareness through disaster education and training and information dissemination to the people to cope with disasters. The disaster management activity comprises certain key components as indicated in the Figure 0.1.

Figure 0.1 Disaster Management-Key Components

1.4.1 Emergencies and Post Disaster-Assistance

The overall aims of emergency and post-disaster assistance are: � To ensure survival of the maximum possible number of victims, keeping them

in the best possible health in the circumstances; � To re-establish self-sufficiency and essential services for all with special

attention to those whose needs are maximum, the most vulnerable. � To repair or replace the damaged infrastructure and regenerate viable

economic activities.

1.4.2 Emergency Response Procedure

Responses are structured as per the nature of disaster. Three levels of each type of disaster have been identified-potential, limited and full emergency conditions. The process takes place in the following steps:

� Trigger Mechanism: It is an emergency quick response mechanism which would spontaneously set the vehicle of management by evolving an effective signal or warning system, identifying activities and levels, determining the response type of each activity, undergoing preparedness drills;

� Emergency Operations Centre to plan, manage and execute operations.

DEVELOPMENT

RECOVERY

RESPONSE

PREVENTION

MITIGATION

PREPAREDNESS

DISASTER IMPACT

1.4.3 Emergency Facilities

Emergency Control Centre (ECC)

For the purpose of handling emergency, separate emergency control centre should be established in close proximity of the slum buildings. All communications to and from should originate from this control centre. The area in project site office complex has been identified for establishment of ECC. All the key personnel such as Site Controller/ Incident Controller Officers, Senior Personnel would be located here or have access to the ECC. The ECC will also coordinate with District Emergency Operation Centre (DEOC). Infrastructure at Emergency Control Centre

Emergency control centre should therefore contain the following: 1. A copy of on-site emergency plan; 2. A copy of evacuation plan; 3. An adequate number of internal and external telephones lines; 4. A copy of layout plan showing areas of large inventories of hazardous and explosive materials and sources of safety and first aid equipments; 5. Layout of fire-fighting system including locations of fire extinguishers with their type, hydrant system; 6. Location of assembly points; 7. Information on additional sources of water; 8. Site entrance and roadways, including up-to-date information on road traffic; 9. List of important telephone numbers such as Police, Fire Brigade, Hospitals, and other outside Emergency Services, etc.; 10. List of key Personnel with addresses and telephone numbers; 11. List of Personal Protective Equipment; 12. First Aid box; 13. Alarm Control system. Emergency Medical Facilities

Stretchers, gas masks and general first aid materials for dealing with burns, burns, fractures etc. would be maintained in the Medical Centre as well as in the ECC. A range of medicines should be maintained in the ECC/ Medical Centre. Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment should be provided and maintained. Apart from the project site first aid facilities, external facilities would be augmented. Checklist of name of medical personnel, medical facilities available in the surrounding area to be prepared and updated.

1.4.4 Emergency Response Coordinators

First-aid Team Members of first-aid Team will report to the Incident Controller on hearing of the alarm. The Emergency vehicle driver, if safe to do so, shall collect the emergency vehicle and park nearest to the scene of the incident. First aider shall inform the incident controller that the Emergency Vehicle is leaving the site, giving the name of the patient and destination i.e. hospital or doctor’s room and request the Incident Controller to inform the destination (hospital, etc.) advising them about the casualties reaching there. Training and Education

Major emergency procedure should be laid down clearly and convincingly to everyone on site particularly Key Personnel. For this purpose, on site training and mock drills should be conducted periodically and documented. The duties and responsibilities of each person and the emergency procedure to be followed by him should be very clear. Procedure for Mock Rehearsal

� Inform all the employees about mock drill; � Fix the date for mock drill; � Observers (senior personnel) will not be involved in the exercise. They will

monitor the Mock drill; � Emergency Siren / alarm will be raised; � After hearing the Siren /alarm, Emergency procedure will be followed as

mentioned in the Onsite Emergency Plan; � Observer will note down the activities with respect to the time and identify

any gap.

1.5 EMERGENCY ACTION PLANS

1.5.1 Action Plan for Personnel Medical Injury

During construction operations, accidents may occur during transport of dumpers, trucks, dozers and other heavy vehicles attributing to mechanical failure and human errors. Following Line of Action shall be followed if any worker is injured during operational activities: 1. If a person finds someone injured, he shall immediately tell his shift in charge about the accident; 2. The shift in charge shall inform the ECC and First Aid Team about the injury and location of accident. 3. On receiving the information, First Aid Team should go to the accident site immediately; 4. First Aid team shall provide the first aid to the injured person and make necessary arrangements for taking him to the hospital, if required; 5. After this, First Aid Team shall report the ECC and make entries in the register about the incident, it’s cause and measures taken.

1.5.2 Action Plan during Fire

The potential sources of have been mentioned in the above sections. The following line of action shall be followed during fire accident at site: 1. Any person noticing any sign of fire in the area shall start shouting to attract other people working in that area; 2. Siren installed in the area to be blown; 3. Steps to be taken to control the fire by using fire fighting equipments available in that area; 4. Switch off the power supply of the area in case of electrical fire; 5. In the meantime, the ECC shall be informed about the incident; 6. The shift Incharge shall conduct a head count to determine whether any individual is missing;

7. On receiving the information at ECC, ECC should immediate contact the incident controller, fire squad team, first aid team and security personnel and direct them to reach the incident site; 8. On reaching at site, the fire squad shall take steps to extinguish the fire depending on its nature, class and extent. The persons to be rescued if any involved in the fire; 9. The first aid team shall provide immediate first aid to burnt person, if any and make arrangements to send him to nearest hospital; 10. The security staff should prevent the unauthorized entry in the area and keep the workers beyond the safety zone; 11. The incident controller shall supervise the fire fighting operation and keep updating the site controller about the situation. 12. Once the situation is controlled, the Emergency Response Team shall carried out a detailed analysis of the causes of the accident, evaluate them and minimize them for future.

1.5.3 Action Plan for Earthquake

According to BIS seismic map, 2002, Project Site falls in Zone III. Zone III is defined as a zone having medium damage risk and vulnerable to earthquakes of intensity MSK VII or less (as defined by Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council). Thus, the Project accordingly is required to have provisions of earthquake resistant construction of building structures. Structural designers should use this factor for earthquake resistant design of structures. The steps to be followed during an earthquake are as below: Before (in office building) 1. Check first aid supplies; 2. Secure all cabinets and shelving to prevent tipping; 3. Remove heavy items from high shelves; 4. Keep passage clear of stacked materials and file cabinets; 5. Ensure that computers, printers, and typewriters will not fall; 6. Arrange work areas to prevent “trapping” of personnel; 7. Make sure that exits are clearly marked. During Earthquake 1. When first tremors are sensed during an earthquake, the siren should be blown to

declare emergency by ECC; 2. Hearing the siren or self experiencing the tremors of earthquake, all personnel

should evacuate the building and assemble at pre designated assembly point. The assembly point should be an open space away from any structure;

3. If inside the building, try to occupy a safe place, such as beneath sturdy table; 4. Remain calm and don’t get panic; 5. Listen battery operated radio for latest information; After Earthquake 1. After major earthquake, there are likely to be aftershocks and great confusion. So

remain at your place for few minutes and prepare for possibilities of aftershocks; 2. Once, the earthquake stops, the check for injured workers. Do not attempt to

move injured persons unless they are in immediate danger; 3. If the office building appears to have significant damage, evacuate to a safe place; 4. After earthquake, don’t enter the damaged buildings immediately; 5. Check for fire hazards, electrical dangers; 6. Do not spread rumours; 7. ECC should coordinate with DEOC in rescuing the trapped people.

1.5.4 Action Plan during Floods

The action plan to be followed during floods is as below: Before Floods 1. ECC to identify highest locations at site in advance to assemble during floods; 2. During floods, the project site may experience the debris flow along with the

construction material and the roads may become unapproachable. Therefore, separate evacuation route to be designed which should be tried and made familiar to workers during mock drills;

3. During monsoon season, all emergency supplies to be kept handy at ECC and assembly point, such as flashlights, portable battery operated radios, extra batteries, emergency food and water, essential medicines, first aid kits etc.;

4. ECC should keep track on rainfall intensity and local weather forecast during the monsoon season.

During Floods 1. Getting first sign of abnormal high rains or local announcement of flood

declaration, ECC should blow the emergency siren; 2. On hearing the siren, evacuate the area through pre designed evacuation route

and assemble at the earlier identified safe areas; 3. The electricity supply to be shut down and emergency lights to be operated; 4. Listen the battery operated radio for latest information; 5. Do not try to escape through using cars or other vehicles as these may be washed

away by force of water current; 6. Help the affected persons; 7. The site controller should get into communication with DEOC and informing

about the current situation at the site; 8. The onsite Emergency Response Team to help the Government Relief team in

guiding them about the site and rescuing the people in the affected areas. After Floods 1. Don’t return until the district authorities declares safe to return; 2. After restoring the situation, the Emergency Response Team should examine

carefully project site office building, storage areas and other areas for danger of collapsing, fire hazards etc.;

3. Watch out the closed areas for animals especially snakes that may have come along with flood water;

4. Pumped out the water gradually through installing pumps at site; 5. ECC to document the damages happened and take photographs for further

damage cost assessment;

1.5.5 Post Emergency Analysis and Evaluation

When the emergency is over, the Emergency Response Team will carry out a detailed analysis of the causes of the accident, evaluate the influence of various factors and minimize them for future. At the same time, the adequacy of the Disaster Preparedness Plan will be evaluated and shortcomings will be rectified for subsequent improvement of the plan.

ERM�consulting�services�worldwide�www.erm.com�

ERM has over 140 offices Across the following countries worldwide Argentina Netherlands Australia Peru Belgium Poland Brazil Portugal China Puerto Rico France Singapore Germany Spain Hong Kong Sweden Hungary Taiwan India Thailand Indonesia UK Ireland USA Italy Venezuela Japan Vietnam Korea Malaysia Mexico ERM India Private Limited

Ground Floor, Block 3A, DLF Corporate Park,DLF City, Phase-III, Gurgaon NCR – 122 002 IndiaTel : 91-124-4170300 Fax: 91-124-4170301 Email: [email protected]

www.erm.com

EIA: India: Pune Nirvana Hills Slum Rehabilitation Project

Documents

Transcript of EIA: India: Pune Nirvana Hills Slum Rehabilitation Project